Home

Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual

1. 1 3 Virtual Tape Library sanaaa ee 1 3 Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology 1 4 Tape Image Replication 1 ce ee 1 4 Hitachi Protection Platform Service Console 1 4 COMPPCSSIONs s s ra raima ah ee ae ea a 1 5 Symantec NetBackup OpenStorage 1 5 Data Erasure 266 ene aveaeendue brinu ee be Ga Fe 1 5 Hitachi Protection Platform Support Portal 1 6 Benefits of Delta Differencing Deduplication and Tape Image Replication aaa 1 6 Keeps Pace with Data Growth 000005 1 6 Consolidates IT Infrastructure 00008 1 7 Long term Vaulting 0 eee es 1 7 Simple Management 0 000 cee ee 1 7 Unparalleled Scalability 00000 cae 1 7 Fully Integrated Solution 0 eee ees 1 7 Industry s Fastest Backup and Restore Times 1 7 Logging Into the Console Manager 0008 1 8 Accepting the EULA ouaaa a 1 9 Obtaining a License Key from the HPP Support Portal 1 10 Installing a License Key a a 1 10 System StartUp saaa eee Oe dw aS eee 1 12 Dashboard SCC sia ta ek ee ee ee ee ee a ee 1 12 Confirming Storage Presence 0 cee ee ee 1 13 Confirming Storage PoolS 00 ce eee 1 13 Storage Pool Status Parameter Details 1 14 Confirming Storage LUNS 0 0 eee 1 15 Adding Storage LUNs to a Storage Pool 1 16 Configuring the 81500 wasccteetecerrevectsaviaseanebiew
2. Notes emphasize or supplement important points of the main text Caution Cautions indicate that failure to take a specified action could result in damage to the software or hardware The following typographic conventions are used in this document Convention Description Bold Indicates text on a window other than the window title including menus menu options buttons fields and labels Example Click OK Italic Indicates a variable which is a placeholder for actual text provided by you or the system Example copy source file target file Angled brackets lt gt are also used to indicate variables screen code Indicates text that is displayed on screen or entered by you Example pairdisplay g oradb lt gt angled Indicates a variable which is a placeholder for actual text provided by brackets you or the system Example pairdisplay g lt group gt Italic font is also used to indicate variables 10 Preface Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Convention Description square Indicates optional values brackets Example a b indicates that you can choose a b or nothing braces Indicates required or expected values Example a b indicates that you must choose either a or b vertical bar Indicates that you have a choice between two or more options or arguments Examples a b indicates that you can choose a b or nothing a b
3. 5 Click Submit to confirm the changes The screen refreshes and the Target Details screen is displayed Tape image replication allows flexible cartridge slot based configuration Slot mapping refers to the assignment of physical slots in a library to correspond to a specific virtual Mirror Copy Pool Mapping occurs as a Mirror Copy Pool is created however mapping can be changed at any time Reasons to change the slot mapping include the need for a group of slots to expand to match the corresponding Mirror Copy Pool the need to shrink an existing Mirror Copy Pool to make more room for a growing pool and the need to rearrange the mapping so that the pools correspond to a consecutive set of slots To Edit Slot Maps 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Figure 3 19 Click Edit in the Tasks bar The Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings screen is displayed Figure 3 20 Click Edit Slot Maps in the Tasks bar The available slots for this target are displayed Enter the Start Slot and the End Slot under Add Additional Slots and click Add to add additional slots To edit the current slots click Edit under Actions The following scr
4. Refer to the EMC NetWorker documentation for additional information Maintaining Your 1500 6 49 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Windows Device Configuration You should disable Plug and Play Test Unit Ready TUR for any tape drivers in use ASCSI TUR command may rewind a mounted NetWorker tape unexpectedly causing data loss Refer to the following link for additional information http support microsoft com kb 842411 Enable verify header on eject in the NetWorker autochanger This marks any tapes corrupted by a SCSI TUR reset rewind as suspect Confirm that the Fibre Channel device supports a maximum block size larger than that being used in NetWorker This can most easily be done in Windows via the NetWorker mt command as shown in the following example C gt mt f Tape4801110 status Tape4801110 Media Capacity 292 97GByte Media Remaining 289 95G Byte Media Blocksize 0 Media Partition Count 1 Media is not write protected default blocksize 65536 maximum blocksize 524288 NOTE If the maximum supported block size found via the mt command is too small typically 64 or 96 KB contact the Fibre Channel HBA Vendor for assistance in modifying the SCSI Scatter Gather registry setting in the Windows Registry for the FC HBA 6 50 Use Windows Tape Drive Persistence to ensure that tape device names do not change when Windows is rebooted This will enable device paths other th
5. Reporting It is essential to implement a proactive reporting mechanism to detect trends in the metrics that can indicate an issue is about to occur This approach allows for implementing the required corrective action prior to experiencing an outage You should review the client deduplication status of jobs processed and identify clients that need to change their content aware deduplication settings to optimize results Analyze the amount of data ingested into the clients Review the data and backup types Delta differencing deduplication technology reporting includes email reports at set intervals of the deduplication system statistics These reports can present data in a comma separated value CSV file format that can be easily included into a trend analysis report 6 52 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Reviewing Operational Changes Whenever changes to the backup environment are necessary make sure to determine the impact to backup windows available bandwidth or capacity requirements Typical changes that impact the operation of the delta differencing deduplication include increased amounts of data to be stored on the S Series system This increase may be the result of a change in backup retention policies or an increase in raw data amounts Increases in the amount of data can require an increase in the fiber link bandwidth or can require additional capacity or bandwidth be added to the S
6. Enclosure HS1235TATX 32 Slot 6 SAT Enclosure HS1235TATX 32 Slot 7 SAT Enclosure H51235TATX 32 Slot 8 SAT Enclosure H51235TATX 32 Slot 9 SAT L Prelaciwa HC192CTATY 29 Cah in CA Figure 5 18 MSM Logical View The MSM Logical View displays the hierarchy of controllers virtual drives and the drives and drive groups that make up the virtual drives The properties for these components appear in the right panel You should refer to the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager online help for the complete details on the MegaRAID Storage Manager screens Monitoring Your 1500 5 16 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Accessing the Capacity Manager The Capacity Manager provides a set of screens with different capacity usage views Follow these steps to access the Capacity Manager screens 1 Log into the S Series Console Manager 2 From the side bar navigation tree select Capacity to display the System Capacity screen GEcend Coia Reie g Chassis br yspt rspmion con a iiaa System Capacity S caririages apacity Manager ye Duphaston i Esokup Repor Views 0 000 aa Contiguretion H aiT E a Proosssing Nodes Statistical t LUH Mepis z Libraries j G rap h gl Borage Pools a Borage Pood 4 dorege LU gj Cartridges H Disk Arrays Figure 5 19 System Capacity Screen 3 Expand the navigation tree to view the options including e Storage Pools e Libraries e Disk
7. Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual CB IEC 60950 1 Safety International VCCI 2012 04 Class A EMC Japan N N COMBS QDIAAHRBRHREATT TORE FSER CHATAZALCBRHBSSSRCTCEASDVET IORS TIER D AU ARAA akk ADT EF VCCI A a Safety EMC China GB 4943 1 2011 GB 9254 2008 GB 17625 1 2003 Regulatory Compliance Notices E 11 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual SNMP V2 Event MIB The MIB Management Information Base is a hierarchy of objects The SEPATON MIB is a V2c compliant MIB used to represent an SNMP V2 event i e the previous terminology for an event in SNMP V1 was a trap The Protocol Data Unit PDU sent from an S Series is referred to as a trap See Downloading the SNMP MIB on page 2 15 to download SEPATON MIB The SEPATON OID descriptions follow TABLE F 1 SEPATON OID Descriptions sepatonAlarmObject 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 The SEPATON alarm object sub tree sepatonChassisl d 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 1 The chassis ID of the S Series platform sepatonTrapSource 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 2 The URL of the S Series platform sepatonEventSeverity 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 3 The event severity ERROR WARNING INFO UNKNOWN sepatonFaultMessage 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 4 The fault description sepatonFaultComponent 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 1 1 1 1 5 The fault component The SEPALS Trap MIB in Text Format kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SE
8. Maintaining Your 1500 6 15 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual To delete a cartridge and remove it from the S Series system follow these steps 1 Make sure any data you want to keep that Is on the cartridges you will be deleting has been safely copied to other media 2 Navigate to the Cartridges Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Cartridges The Cartridges Summary screen is displayed Figure 6 8 3 If desired choose the number of cartridges to view at a time from the Cartridges Per Page Selection and click View The Cartridge Details screen is displayed 1 ot 215 Lasi Pagu Next 100 ah Wipetlate EL B z a Fie si T g ko a r n 73 a i CY a E pl a 1m gt a G E a Ti 3 4 E i q i 4 4 Lf E i E g s Figure 6 11 Cartridge Details Screen 4 Click the checkbox beside the cartridges you want to delete You can also click Select All checkbox near the bottom of the screen to delete all cartridges in this view NOTE As with creating cartridges moving or deleting cartridges takes at least several seconds per cartridge Do not attempt to perform any other operations while this deletion is in progress A success message is displayed when the deletion is complete Deleting Cartridges Used by Tape I mage Replication You may delete the cartridges that are being used by tape image replication on the source or the target S Series system Deleting a sou
9. Management console terminal using a LAN cable when you use the remote interface management function If you install an optional Rear HDD kit ES7623 Y ES7623 R you can add two extension storage bays 2 5 inch connector For the details of the remote management function see Remote Management User s Guide Serial interface You can use this connector to connect a device such as a connector COMO modem that uses a serial interface az VGA connector BR Connect a computer display to the VGA connector S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 9 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Notes 1 A dummy tray is installed for an extension bay without an internal HDD 2 The LED lights green while the HDD is being accessed for rebuilding PCI slots The slot numbers are as follows 4 PCI slot 2 __ Seaos Besoueeooe _____ pcI slot 5 i p T BRRGRRRERE o e PC slot 4 a l o e H PCI slot 3 A Figure A 6 Location of PCI slot Ti at A The specifications for the PCI slots are as follows Table A 7 PCI slots specification PCI Express 2 0 x 1 1 lanes Low profile PCI Express 2 0 x 4 4 lanes Low profile PCI Express 3 0 x 4 4 lanes PCI Express 3 0 x 8 8 lanes 1 The shape of connector is x 4 4 lanes 2 The shape of connector is x 8 8 lanes A 10 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications
10. j Hompo status Moi When siorage camacky ls iso S Fill Resors Contg qj Carindges Dapo p 410163131 SS Mabienance Ti de Disk Arrays Da Subnet 255 255 248 0 Ghal Wetworm Senings Gateway 182165101 E 12103 1013 Mang DNS 100 10 Damal Name Be om Appr betings MOTIFIC ATOOW E i CANIS 251 E INFO o seg sepatoncom gt Processing Node DAS INFO b sepatoncom gt Processing Nodal MANS ores initieiizetion for node completed bi ceq secaton com gt infiiaiization ______ SK hay eee Oy ea a J 7 i TET gt MAASIASI OST plugin version 17851 on media server 157 169 1531 may be incompatible shouid De 15612 Figure 1 19 Chassis Status Screen Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 20 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring the S1500 This section provides the procedures to configure your S Series Data Protection platform s preferences You must be logged into the Console Manager as administrator to perform configuration procedures The S Series Data Protection platform configuration includes e Setting up your network configuration e Creating virtual devices e Configuring delta differencing deduplication technology Setting Up Your Network Configuration The S Series system provides the ability to change your network configuration settings as well as synchronize with an external network time protocol NTP server Use this feature to change your host name
11. 11 Schedule a window of time to restart the NetBackup application After restarting NetBackup you can then configure and monitor your S Series platform with OST You are now ready to launch the HDSHPPS OST Plug in software from your Start button 4 10 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Installing the Linux Plug In Copy the plug in to the media server and install it as follows 1 Install the Linux RPM onto the host system 2 Follow this step to install the HDSHPPS OST Plug in for Linux sh i HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt x86 64 rpm bin 3 Schedule a window of time to restart the NetBackup application After restarting NetBackup you can then configure and monitor your S Series platform with OST Uninstalling the Linux Plug In Should you need to update your Linux RPM software enter the following rpm qa grep HDSHPPS HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt rpm e HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Installing the SUSE Linux Plug In Copy the plug in to the media server and install it as follows 1 Install the SUSE Linux RPM onto the host system 2 Follow this step to install the HDSHPPS OST Plug in for SUSE Linux sh i HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt x86 64 rpm bin 3 Schedule a window of time to restart the NetBackup application After restarting NetBackup you can then configure and monitor your S Series platform with OST Uninstalling the SUSE Linux Plug In Sh
12. Click Delivery Method Email or Download Enter the email address of a user to receive email reports and click Add The email address of the user will appear on the screen Enter the email address of any additional users and click Add To delete a user from the list of users click on the red x button next to the email address The users added on this screen are added as a group and deleted as a group only Select the type of report s from the Report Type listings The S Series system reports include System Capacity Cartridge to Backup Summary Backup Summary Policy Cartridge Summary OST AIR Replication History and Replication Job History NOTE Multiple system reports are sent as an email attachment in a single zip file 6 The Report type options System Capacity Cartridge to Backup Summary Backup Summary Policy Cartridge Summary and Replication Job History are available as an attached comma separated value CSV file Select the file format of the report CSV Sends report as an attachment in comma separated value CSV format Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual NOTE Reports sent as an attachment in a Comma Separated Value CSV format can be imported and read into most commercial spreadsheet packages and word processors 7 Specify the schedule of the report by selecting the desired value from the Schedule listings One Time only On demand Daily Reports can be se
13. Removing an Unconnected Host from the SAN List Host servers that appear in the SAN list on the Host Setup screen that are no longer connected to the SAN can be removed from this list If the host is still connected though its WWPN will continue To remove hosts no longer connected to the SAN from the list perform the following steps l Navigate to the Host Setup screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host Setup The Host Setup screen is displayed Figure 6 1 2 Click the checkbox beside each host to remove to select it Click Remove Hosts The screen refreshes with a confirmation message and that host no longer appears in the list Maintaining Your 1500 6 3 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Manually Adding Hosts to the List If you know the WWPN of a host not yet connected to the SAN you can manually add the host to the list as follows 1 Navigate to the Host Setup screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host Setup The Host Setup screen is displayed Figure 6 1 2 Using the State drop down menu choose the host access state as enabled or disabled 3 Enter the 16 character WWPN value for the host to add Enter a hostname alias for the host to add 5 Click Add The screen refreshes and the host information entered appears in the SAN list LUN Mapping The LUN Mapping mode provides user defined host access capability to the S Series system and allows you to map selected devic
14. roit Figure 4 39 Destination Storage Server Status Screen Source Disk Volume Pair At this point you have completed the initial configuration phase of the Destination Storage Server Now you need to link Source and Destination Disk Volumes together into what is known as Disk Volume Pairs Next you will configure the cross replication Disk Volume Pair for the Source Storage Server So now you need to switch from the Destination Storage Server over to the Source Storage Server 5 Go to the Source OST Storage Server and select the OST A I R replication listing in the navigation tree and click Create Disk Volume Pair from the Tasks list System gt Status gt Chassis gt OST gt A R Create Disk Volume Pair The screen displays the message There are no Source and Destination Disk Volume Pairs Tasha Conmigo Riphbabon Modes Cragle Disk Volume Pa There are he Seure and Destination Diek Volume Pairs Figure 4 40 No Source and Destination Disk Volume Pairs a Click Create Disk Volume Pair from the Tasks list System gt Status gt Chassis gt OST gt A 1 R Create Disk Volume Pair The Disk Volume Pair screen is displayed 4 28 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R Replication User Guide oO Create Dick Volume Pair Wineyard Capecod Rapicon Pair Marin Sect 9 Source Desk Vobume Eel e sever otage Pood a a Aen d Lomee paler 4 1 a Vine O t Vokirnef 1
15. 1500 User Manual e Striped e Multiplexed e Large gt 14 TB e Flat file and exhibiting deduplication speed or ratio issues Important Once you change the Deduplication Algorithm from CA2 to CA2 you cannot revert to the previous selection A change to CA2 Is a final change If you have policies that are rendering satisfactory deduplication ratios then you should probably not change the Deduplication Algorithm Also if you have scripted your databases using RMAN format statements then you Should continue to use CA2 unless you are considering removing the scripting too RMAN scripting provides a highly customizable framework for performing Oracle backups This flexibility however comes with a large number of possible Oracle backup configurations Delta differencing deduplication has been designed to provide effective deduplication across a significant number of these configurations The delta differencing deduplication algorithms are general enough to handle generic scripting cases while also taking advantage of those instances where the RMAN script provides Specific information concerning the files comprising the backup These algorithms are designed to work well in a wide range of RMAN configurations including data multiplexed by Oracle NOTE Do not confuse Oracle RMAN multiplexing with backup application multiplexing Hitachi recommendations regarding backup application multiplexing are in the VTL and Delta Differencing
16. 17 Select the physical cartridge type to emulate and click Next Step CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Figure 2 19 Cartridge Size and Number The Cartridge Parameters screen lists the open used and total number of slots defined for this library The maximum number of cartridges created in this library cannot exceed the number of open slots available This screen defaults the cartridge size to the standard capacity for the cartridge type selected If you have multiple storage pools you can also select the storage pool in which those cartridges will reside If oversubscription is not enabled this screen displays the maximum number of cartridges that can be created based on both physical storage Capacity remaining and number of available slots remaining in the library NOTE TheS Series system requires a certain amount of storage overhead for each cartridge you create for cartridge content information It automatically subtracts this amount from the available capacity 18 Specify the number of cartridges to create and the cartridge size Configuring the 1500 2 22 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The amount of storage required by these values is displayed If the storage required exceeds what is available the overage appears in red You can change either the number of cartridges the cartridge size or both to correct the overage condition or allow the overage NOTE The Console Manager permits an overage only when the oversub
17. Figure 6 6 Host View Screen 2 Select the host to map devices from the Host drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that host and all devices currently mapped to it 3 Choose the devices you want to map to the host from the Device drop down menu near the bottom of the screen For an individual device click the device name If you want to select multiple devices press the Ctrl key and click each device name 4 Click Map The screen refreshes displaying all devices mapped to that host 5 Repeat these steps to specify additional devices Maintaining Your 1500 6 9 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Do the following before performing any backup restore operations with that server Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Mapping Devices on a Node 6 10 In multi node systems devices are defined on different nodes You can filter the devices shown on this screen to only display devices residing on a specific node Follow these steps to map one or more devices on a specific node to a host l Navigate to the Host View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host View The Host View screen is displayed Figure 6 6 Select the host to map devices from the Host drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that host and al
18. Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual F FireSafe 6 12 For optimal Console Manager viewing 1 8 Force Unload Cartridge s C 1 description C 1 force unload all cartridges C 3 solution C 1 Force Unload Task C 1 Fragment Size NetBackup maximum size 6 45 G Global LAN WAN Replication Settings 3 13 Graceful shutdown at 98 capacity 2 33 Guest Login 1 9 H High Latency Environment 6 46 Host Access Management 6 2 disabling a host 6 3 enable hosts 6 3 manually add hosts 6 4 modify an existing hostname 6 2 providing a hostname alias 6 2 remove an unconnected host 6 3 Host Access Mode 6 2 all devices 6 2 user defined 6 2 HPP service console 1 4x IBM Tivoli Storage Manager TSM 3 40 vaulting to tape 3 42 Import Export Ports 2 19 2 27 Incompatible Fibre Channel Port Settings C 6 description C 6 solution C 6 Initialization Background 5 14 J Job History 5 44 export all data 5 45 job history table and performance graph 5 45 K Keep Mount Point KEEPMP 6 47 Key Metrics best practices 6 52 L LAN WAN Replication Library Operations 3 21 LAN WAN Replication Target Operations 3 27 availability window 3 29 I ndex 4 clear managing Source VTL 3 31 delete a Replication Target 3 31 editing LAN WAN replication target 3 27 placing the replication target offline 3 32 placing the replication target online 3 33 renaming the host system 3 32 slot maps 3 28 Libraries 5 21 5 24 Libraries View 5 24 Library 5 22 L
19. Hitachi license file is not transferable from system to system You can also use this feature to update your current system license when adding more storage a new library type or tape device type to emulate or software Installation of any Hitachi software license requires a system restart for the license to become active Make sure to stop any in progress backups and restores before installing a license as they would be disrupted by the system restart Follow these steps to install or update your system license 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen by clicking the System tab and selecting Chassis on the left pane Chassis br sep3 sepaton com nse i al Ail raui E od H ge Coody Dedupfioston t DET cae SEXERAL MAINTERARGE T EIKE J Frorss slim Hojss ng Hia Of 5203 Sepenor oom tial Licemme LUN Mapping Libraries j Horsgs Pons OVER SUE REPT _ br Sep3 sepaton com shied cartridges status Woi wren storage cagacky is sc 3 Fu NETWORK BETTINGE enn ie teveel 6666666 6 6 hot i a y c m it aL ER PL TES Figure 1 5 Chassis Status Screen 2 Click Install License in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The Install License wizard is displayed 3 Click Browse and locate the license file saved to your computer Click Next Step to complete the installation process The Console Manager validates the license file contents prior to its installation The updated license information is now available to your S Series s
20. NOTE If these settings conflict with previously set windows an error message Is displayed 15 You can either edit or delete any of the Current Availability Windows if required 16 Click Submit to create the Mirror Copy Pool The screen refreshes and the Mirror Copy Pool summary is displayed SUMMARY FOR MIRROR COPY POOLS O The mirror copy pool Mirror Copy Pool 4 was successfully created Figure 3 10 Mirror Copy Pool Summary Screen If the pool was successfully created the Mirror Copy Pools screen is displayed along with the message The Mirror Copy Pool mirror copy pool name was successfully created If the pool was not created the Mirror Copy Pool screen refreshes and provides an error message Clicking on the Mirror Copy Pool name on the navigation tree displays the Mirror Copy Pool details Mirror Copy Pool Digas Figure 3 11 Mirror Copy Pool Details Screen Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 19 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Source System Cartridge Replication Status 3 20 On the source system you can check the replication status of each cartridge on the source S Series system by viewing Slots in a LAN WAN Replication Library or by viewing a library in Source Cartridges This lists all the cartridges that are being replicated to that target S Series system To view the summary for Slots associated with this target click Slots in the navigation tree The
21. Power Line Flicker EN60950 1 1EC60950 1 Product Safety EN50581 RoHS EN62474 RoHS Regulatory Compliance Notices Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual EN62321 ROHS Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Acoustics noise Germany Maschinenlarminformations Verordnung 3 GPSGV der hochste Schalldruckpegel betragt 70 dB A oder weniger gemass EN ISO 7779 ERRE AHA Japan elk JIZ A ARRESTI TORE tAE mi AAE A FOCEMBVEF COIBSITISERADBUIEWRERBT SEG BRSENS CEDHVET VCCI A Class A emission statement Korea o0 AFIE H78 A E MATA S7 7 2A E HAF EE ASAE ol SS SeH Het Of 7399 8A ASE AS Sye SHC Applicant At LG Hitachi Ltd LG S CHA F Manufacturer HI 2 At HITACHI LTD Origin MA 25 Japan Y2 BMI compliance Taiwan La A CELJE EARN MEERA EHA A EERI DARE EIERN T CR 210 CR 220 i g T oTe a Hy ARATE TEENER PATI AES RIB FAL RMIT WEBER OMA TRAST TAI Regulatory Compliance Notices E 3 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Laser compliance notice This product may be provided with an optical storage device that is CD or DVD drive and or fiber optic transceiver Each of these devices contains a laser that is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product EU RoHS The European Union EU RoHS Directive the restriction of th
22. RJ 45 KSZ8051 PHY 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 1 RJ 45 P LAN Supported a 484 W x 743 D x 87 0 H mm 20 2 kg Maximum 32 7 kg 55 dB or less in accordance with ISO 7779 10 Power 100 VAC 200 VAC 50 60 Hz suppl Capacity 800 W Type of electrical outlet Grounded two pole electrical outlet Number of AC cables 1 Standard 2 When redundancy is enabled Redundant power suppl Supported 1 Standard 1 Optional hot plug supported A 14 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Notes 1 The following features are supported Intel Hyper Threading Technology except Xeon processor E5 2403 Intel Virtualization Technology Intel 64 NX Execute Disable Bit Enhanced Intel SpeedStep Technology Intel Trusted Execution Technology Intel Turbo Boost Technology except Xeon processor E5 2403 Wide range registered DIMM DDR3 1600 SDRAM and Low voltage registered DIMM cannot be mounted together Actual resolutions colors vary depending on the monitor used or the limitation of the OS 1 GB equals 10 bytes and 1 TB equals 10t bytes when referring to HDD capacity You can assign capacity larger than 2 TB 2199 GB for the logical drive set as disk array but do not assign capacity larger than 2 TB for the logical drive the OS is installed to Otherwise the OS cannot create a partition anymore Use the RAID management utility or the RAID utility to
23. Somewhat smaller Note that operational errors can consume landing space If you perform a test backup of a new policy then abandon that policy the first backup Is sitting in the landing zone waiting for another instance of the same policy to trigger deduplication You should expire and relabel cartridges that contain orphan policies Another source of orphan policies is retired or renamed clients Since delta differencing deduplication uses both the policy name and client name to optimize deduplication you should be rigorous about expiring and relabeling cartridges associated with clients that are no longer used Use cartridges that are smaller than the sum of your incremental backup jobs so the cartridges will be full by the end of the week and will then be able to have space reclaimed If you only perform full backups then the sum of your full backups should be less than the size of your cartridges You Should use as few cartridges as possible The minimum cartridge size is 10 GB Hitachi recommends that you size cartridges no smaller than 50 GB and no larger than 300 GB with a recommended default size of between 50 GB and 100 GB A smaller backup set environment might size cartridges at 50 GB while a very large backup set environment might size cartridges at 200 GB A backup set is full cumulative or incremental not a combination as that would be different backup sets You should use as few storage pools as possible wit
24. Storage Pool The name of the storage pool Total Physical Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the Capacity system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool Reserved for The space required for system overhead and metadata System Storage Pool 1 or the FireSafe can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to delta differencing deduplication technology metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity in the pool available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained in the pool and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the pool used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available in the pool for Capacity additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the pool The storage pool name in the Storage Pool Capacity table is a link to display information about the storage pool Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Viewing Additional Information About a Storage Pool To view additional capacity information for a particular storage pool click the Storage Pool name field on the Storage Pools screen Figure 5 20 The Storage Pool x view is displayed Figure 5 21 This sc
25. Target Details screen is displayed Figure 3 19 3 Click Delete in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the LAN WAN Replication Target A success dialog appears on the screen and the replication target is no longer displayed in the navigation tree Task O Ghia LAN AN Aepcatien Langai O Gobel LAN Al Regichton laga selni OATES SUMMARY FOR ALL LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGETS O The LAM I WN Repieaton target Target was successfully deleted f oo 8 g GOO Figure 3 23 Delete LAN WAN Replication Target Success Screen Clearing the Managing Source System You may want to clear the connection between a source library and its LAN WAN replication target in order to use the target with a different source library The target library will still maintain all of its default settings in the change To clear the managing source system On the Target system 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed 2 Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Figure 3 19 3 Click Clear Managing Source VTL in the Tasks bar NOTE Clearing the managing VTL opens the replication target to be managed by another source Therefore this should only be performed when the source S Series system has changed a hostname
26. a to Use the Operating Software solely on the HDS Equipment with which it is shipped to enable the Equipment to function and b to Use the Programs solely for Your internal business needs subject to the restrictions specified on any Equipment used in connection with the Programs For capacity based Programs You will Use the Programs up to the specified capacity purchased on the relevant equipment network device or CPU allowed If You wish to exceed capacity You must pay HDS any additional license fees first You obtain no title or ownership in any Software nor do You obtain any right to sublicense the Software The Software may be used only as provided in either machine readable object code form or machine compressed form and the related documentation may be used only in printed or electronic form 2 Third Part ftware Third Party Software may be embedded in HDS Software and sublicensed directly to You Other Third Party Software is provided to You subject to Third Party EULAs available from HDS at Your request You will have no recourse against HDS unless HDS is the stated licensor and then only to the extent provided in such license You will be responsible to do whatever is necessary or required by the third party licensor for the licenses and related terms to take effect e g online registration Unless stated otherwise in these Software License Terms or in the third party license or provided under a maintenance contract HDS wi
27. amount of storage used and the overall amount of storage capacity that is still available The Space Savings from Deduplication graph provides information about the storage savings achieved with data that has been deduplicated The Logical data Is the size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application The Used data represents the physical storage capacity whether fully or partially deduplicated and includes the effect of hardware compression if enabled Additionally the Notifications screen provides informational citations such as the following ren mi Ph E Ki wlat JE 34 0 dgan nw e a 3 18 INFO Sr se07 Seeeiorloom Prosar Model mp INFO br sep7 sepeior com gt Processing Hodel 418 amp initialization for nodes completed br sep senaton com gt inftaiization H ak O8T plugin version 17357 on media server 132 160 15 31 may be incompatina should be 13644 bf seg sepaion com gt ca 14405 initialization tor node completed DI sep sepci oam gt infilalization Figure 1 7 System Startup Notifications Confirming Storage Presence By default one storage pool is created out of all available storage when the system Is first installed To create cartridges and perform backups with your system the S Series system must have at least one storage pool with storage LUNs associated with it and enough storage space to store data Confirming Storage Pools 1 13 The
28. domain name NTP settings and time zone settings You can also change the IP address gateway address net mask primary and secondary DNS servers for your processing node or set up DHCP WARNING Most network configuration changes require a restart of the S Series platform which occurs automatically when the changes are applied Make sure that no backup operations are in progress prior to making network changes Follow these steps to change your network settings 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Click Network Settings in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The Network Settings wizard is displayed Configuring the 1500 2 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring a Static P Address for Your System 1 Under Node Network Settings make sure the checkbox Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is not selected If selected the IP address Gateway address Net Mask and Primary and Secondary DNS server addresses are assigned automatically Node Network Settings Use DHCP IP Address Gateway Address Net Mask Primary DNS Secondary DNS SRE Noded 92166890 ass 286 2480 fise te843 9216816 FIGURE 2 1 Network Settings Wizard Node Network Settings NOTE If tape image replication is licensed on your S Series system make sure that the checkbox Use DHCP is not selected Enter the IP address of your Processing Node Enter the Gateway IP address of your Processing Node Enter th
29. from the Local Library list The available libraries are displayed along with the available slot ranges on the selected library See Creating Virtual Devices on page 5 1to create a new library with tape drives and cartridges Enter a Start Slot and an End Slot for the Mirror Copy Pool from within the available ranges If the slot entered does not exist in the available range an error message is displayed Enter the number of Maximum Simultaneous Transfers permitted Tape image replication allows you to limit the replication activity on the target by setting the number of maximum simultaneous replication data transfers Default is 8 Select the Maximum TCP IP Bandwidth for the replication target Select a Compress Data Transfer option Enter a unique Password for this replication target Reenter the password for verification Replication jobs can only begin during the availability window When the availability window ends any replication jobs currently in progress will continue until they complete No replication jobs can begin until the next availability window opens Availability Window Parameters can be set daily 24 hours weekly and monthly The target is available to receive data as defined in the availability window settings Click Add Availability Windows The summary of the parameters entered in the previous screen is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 15 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500
30. gt OST gt A I R Create Disk Volume Pair b Enter a Replication Pair Name the Destination Storage Server IP address and click Go Now enter the User Name and Password that you had provided on the Destination Storage Server on the Destination processing node and click Create 5 Configure OST A I R replication on both NetBackup media servers following the appropriate configuration instructions at these links NetBackup 7 5 Refer to the section Configuring Replication UNI X Linux http www symantec com docs DOC5157 Windows http www symantec com docs DOC5159 NetBackup 7 1 Refer to the section Duplicating Images To a Remote Master Server Domain UNI X Linux http www symantec com docs DO0C3650 Windows http www symantec com docs DO0C3653 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 21 Replication User Guide Creating an OST Storage Server The following procedures assume that you have the appropriate OST Plug ins in place on both NetBackup media servers For additional information refer to Installing the Plug Ins on page 4 1 Make sure that you log in and provide credentials to both the Source Storage Server and the Destination Storage Server before you attempt to assign a disk volume pair to each Similarly you must also create a parallel configuration here as exists in your NetBackup environment see above for NetBackup Configuration reference information This procedure essentially recr
31. gt Update Profile Your Information First Name Last Name Job Title Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 City State Zipcode Country Phone Phone Ext Fax Mobile Job Role Department prange assword F Michael Ruga Principal Technical Documentation 400 Nickerson Rd Marlborough MA 01752 USA 208 490 7985 Please Select Please Select Update Profile Figure 6 47 Update Profile Screen Enter your information on the Update Profile screen Click Update Profile to update your profile information 4 A message Successfully Updated is displayed on the Update Profile screen to confirm your action Changing a Password 1 Click your profile name on the Dashboard screen The Update Profile screen is displayed Figure 6 47 2 Click on the small keys icon on the top right corner of the Update Profile screen The Change Your Password screen Is displayed 6 58 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 3 Hitachi Data Systems Home gt Account Management gt Update Profile Change Your Password A PRESBYTERIAN g Current Password HHHH New Password Confirm Password Change Password l ae E Michael huge Update Profile Password 13 Usars Ondine m mt Figure 6 48 Change Your Password Screen 3 Enter the Current Password Enter New Password and confirm by re entering new password in the Confirm Password
32. http www 1lsi com downloads Public MegaRAID 20Common 20Files 9 00 01 Windows MSM zip Linux Client http www 1lsi com downloads Public MegaRAID 20Common 20Files 9 00 01 Linux MSM zip Solaris Client http www 1lsi com downloads Public MegaRAID 20Common 20Files 9 00 01 Solaris MSM zip 2 Open the downloaded zip file double click the MSM zip file then extract the contents to the appropriate folder 3 Click the DISK1 folder and then double click on setup exe The installation wizard is launched Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 The InstallShield R Wizard will install MegaRGID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties i Cancel Figure 5 4 Installation Wizard 4 Click Next and the software License Agreement is displayed Monitoring Your S1500 5 8 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual ie MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard License Agreement Please read the Following license agreement carefully STOP A BEFORE YOU INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE E Carefully read this Software License Agreement Installing or using this Software indicates that you agree to abide by this Software License Agreement If you do not agree with it promptly return the Software and we will refund the purchase price Softwar
33. means the ninety day period following delivery of the Software You or Your end user of the Software End User License Agreement G 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual End User License Agreement Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 1500 Platform Public LAN Port Assignments This appendix provides a list of ports used on the public LAN Many other ports are used on the private LAN that are not documented in these tables The port numbers described include those used by e Tape image replication between sites e The Site Survey troubleshooting tool e The core S Series platform and the user interface e OST traffic for the master server and the I O server The Site Survey troubleshooting tool might be used by Hitachi Customer Support to measure link speed The tool uses the following port Port Number TCP UDP Description 5678 5679 TCP Link bandwidth test configurable S1500 Platform Public LAN Port Assignments H 1 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual The core S Series platform and user interface use the following ports on the oublic LAN commas Number TCP UDP Description SSH Remote administration o SMTP Email notifications If configured DNS Domain Name System If SMTP is configured DHCP If dynamic addresses are used for processing nodes UDP DHCP If dynamic addresses are used for processing nodes 80 TCP JHTTP User interface 0 HTTP User H
34. 1500 User Manual Enabling Writes The Enable Writes link will appear on the Storage Pool Status screen when the storage space Is made available and total storage consumed in a storage pool is below 98 percent and greater than 90 percent full The Enable Writes link allows you to manually enable all write operations to the storage pool NOTE The S Series system will enable writes automatically if the storage pool capacity drops below 90 percent full Hitachi recommends that you free up enough storage to enable writes automatically Follow the steps below to Enable Writes 1 Navigatetothe Storage Pool Statusscreen System gt Storage Pools gt Storage Pool n 2 Click Enable Writes in the Task bar StoragePool 1 GENERAL DISK ARRAY Cartridge Report mi Usable Capacity 14 95 TB Disk Array 0 a Us E E SRE Hod StoragePool 1 Maximum number of cartridges per Storage LUN 8000 E i SRE Node 0 Status Number of Storage LUNs 2 SRE Ports ant Cina 29 COON Hardwa ession m Degraded E LUN Mapping ar oper Host Setup J ae Failed Gg Libraries Ae Missi E Qa Storage Pools 9 Storage Pool 1 j Storage LUNs aj Cartridges FIGURE 2 39 Chassis Status Screen with Enable Writes link The S Series system enables write operation to the storage pool and a notification is displayed on the Notification screen Configuring delta differencing deduplication technology This section allows you to set specif
35. 3 Return to LUN mapping by clicking the desired view in the navigation tree or the Map LUNs task in the Tasks bar Clearing All Host Mapping Perform the following steps to unmap one or more devices from a host If you want to remove all hosts mapped to one or more devices follow the steps in Clearing All Host Mapping on page 8 instead 1 Navigate to the Host View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host View The Host View screen is displayed Figure 6 6 2 Select the host to map devices from the Host drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that host and all devices currently mapped to It 3 If desired filter the view to show only devices defined on a specific processing node 4 Click the checkbox beside each device to be removed from this host map 5 Click Unmap The screen refreshes updating the Mapped LUN Value of all devices Repeat these steps to remove additional devices Do the following before performing any backup restore operations with that server e Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Maintaining Your 1500 6 11 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Disabling LUN Mapping Disabling LUN mapping involves changing the global host access mode from User Defined to All Devices This change when executed cau
36. 3 34 Changing Local Library a 3 36 Editing the LAN WAN Policy 00000005 3 36 Managing Replication Configuration 4 3 37 Viewing Configuration Summary 04 3 37 Editing Cartridge Summary Configuration 3 38 Editing Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration aa oa ed kore eee eee ne we ea 3 38 Editing Job Reporting Configuration 3 39 Editing GUI configuration 2 2 00 eee ee 3 40 Tape Image Replication Best Practices 3 40 Vaulting To Tape aaa a 3 41 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Contents 3 Application Specific Recommendations 3 42 Storage Tiering and Tape saaa eee ee 3 42 4 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes Installing the Plug Ins 4 1 Go to the OST Plug in Downloads screen System gt Chassis gt OST gt OST Plug in Downloads 4 2 Installing the Solaris Package cee ee 4 3 Uninstalling the Solaris Package cee 4 4 Installing the Windows Plug In 0 00 eee 4 4 Installing the Linux Plug In 0 0 eee ee 4 11 Uninstalling the Linux Plug In 0 0 0 0 eee 4 11 Installing the SUSE Linux Plug In 0 00 eee 4 11 Uninstalling the SUSE Linux Plug In 4 11 Installing the AIX Plug In noaua aaa 4 12 Uninstalling the AIX Plug In aaa 4 12 Installing the Symantec Appliance Plug In 4 12 Configuring Storage
37. 3532 eee BM Ultrium LTO 1 cee IBM Ultrium LTO 2 Sg IBM Uitrium LTO J age BM Ulrum LTO 4 Se Suantum DLT 7000 Sgt Quantum OL T 8000 Quantum SuperDLT Quantum SuperDLT P 3 E oon Er mee Sony AIT 2 See Sony AITA See StorageTek 9640 See StorageTek TIMO Figure 2 23 Tape Drive Emulations The tape drive parameters that you specify define one or more tape drives of the same type under the control of the same processing node that Is accessible through the same Fibre Channel host port 3 From the listings select the processing node on which to configure the tape drive 4 Select the physical tape drive type you want to emulate and click Next Step Only those tape drive types that you have licensed are active for selection The Tape Drive Parameters screen is displayed TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS Port Mapping 0 E 1 2 E 3 Select the Fibre Channel port number to which the tape drive is mapped Number of Tape Drives 1 ir All devices LUN Mapping Masking mode is enabled The tape drive s is accessible to all hosts Help Cancel By C OCR BG CRE ai Figure 2 24 Tape Drive Parameters Configuring the 1500 2 24 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 5 Specify the desired values for the tape drive s you are creating a From the listings select the Fibre Channel host port on which to configure the tape drive s If a Single Port is in effect choose either host port O or host port 1 If Dual Port mapping is in effect for this
38. 6 26 TB 13 44 TB AA 10 Total 20 00 TB 292 63 GB 19 71 TB 2761TB 626TB 13 44 TB AA Figure D 1 Sample System Capacity Report ao oo Hoo ee ee The System Capacity report values are described in detail as follows Storage Pool The name of the storage pool Name Total Physical Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the Capacity system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool minus the space reserved for formatting overhead Reserved for The space required for system overhead and metadata System Storage Pool 1 or the FireSafe can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to delta differencing deduplication technology metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available for additional backup Capacity data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity Cartridge to Backup Summary Report The Cartridge to Backup Summary report provides detailed information about the backup sets on an S Series system This information includes the barcode of the cartridge backup name
39. 66 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Compute Rack 220S The Hitachi S Series system gives remote offices and branch offices of large enterprises the power of disk based data protection for less than the cost of tape The S Series system is available in a 2U disk drive enclosure housing up to 12 drives that are fitted in a horizontal orientation The S Series system is equipped with high density 4 TB drives The S Series system is also equipped with compression to deliver two to three times its physically capacity without requiring more disk space This appendix describes the physical characteristics the LEDs and the S Series system specifications Hitachi does not recommend installing the S Series systems outside of a rack However if installed outside of a rack the S Series system should be kept on a well supported flat surface in horizontal fashion without any other system or weight stacked on top of the S Series Make sure there Is sufficient space and no obstruction tn the front and back of the system for free air flow at the right temperature Hitachi strongly recommends that S Series systems be installed inside a rack to ensure normal system operation The S Series system ships standard with two US PDU power cords to connect to a rack If the system needs to be powered using a 110V receptacle NEMA 15 the NEMA power cord must be orde
40. 7h i31250 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126152691 170 11 ds3 7h i1 31014 ds3 7h i31014 P 6 11 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126141092 170 12 ds3 7h i1 31516 ds3 7h i31516 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126144427 170 13 ds3 7h i1 2875_ ds3 7h i2875 PC 6 13 2011 CA2 Full Waiting NBU Oracle F 0 21 47505254 12 31801862 1 7 14 ds3 7h i1 31988 ds3 7h i31988 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126316863 170 15 ds3 7h i1 2153_ ds3 7h i2153 PC 6 14 2011 CA2 Full Waiting NBU Oracle F 0 21 47505254 12 31721378 1 7 16 ds3 7h i1 32226 ds3 7h i32226 P 6 11 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126143769 170 17 ds3 7h i1 31250 ds3 7h i31250 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe NBU Oracle F 100 21 47505254 0 126149736 170 18 ds3 7h i1 31014 ds3 7h i31014 P 6 12 2011 CA2 Full Waiting NBU Oracle F 0 21 47505254 12 31760345 1 7 19 ds3 7h i1 31516 ds3 7h i31516 P 6 12 2011 CA2 Full Waiting NBU Oracle F 0 21 47505254 12 31728906 1 7 20 ds3 7h i1 2637_ ds3 7h i2637 PC 6 13 2011 CA2 Full Delta dii NBU Oracle F 25 21 47505254 12 31750927 1 7 Figure D 3 Sample Backup Summary Report The Backup Summary report values are described in detail as follows Backup Name Client Policy The client name The name of the backup set The name of the policy used for the backup S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 U
41. AIR Replication History OST Optimized Duplication History and Tape Image Replication Job History Email reports are attached to an email as a Zip file You will need to configure your mail server before adding the users to receive email reports See Setting Up a Mail Server on page 9 The S Series system reports include System Capacity Cartridge to Backup Summary Backup Summary Policy Cartridge Summary and Replication Job History report NOTE Multiple system reports are sent as an email attachment in a single Zip file 2 9 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual These S Series system reports are described in Table 2 1 System Capacity Report Cartridge to Backup Summary Report Backup Summary Report Policy Cartridge Summary Report OST AIR Replication History Report OST Optimized Duplication Report Tape Image Replication Job History Report TABLE 2 1 Report Types Lists space utilization information such as total physical capacity capacity reserved for the system usable capacity used capacity available capacity logical data system ratio and the percentage of storage space savings Lists detailed information about the backup sets on an S Series system This information includes barcode of the cartridge backup name client policy used the time when the backup started delta differencing algorithm used for the backup set type of backup deduplication
42. Anei SinmjeP an i FHTER GEESTINSTION ST RAGE SERVER Slehage Sere iF 402 153 TLAS rs SELECT REPLICATION FROFERTIES Figure 4 41 Disk Volume Pair Screen b Name the Replication Pair Vineyard Capecod c Select the radio button for the Source Disk Volume Provide the IP Address for the Destination Storage Server 192 168 11 49 e Click Go A Destination Storage Server dialog is displayed requesting login credentials All fields are required Username root PasswWOrd seseseseeeennae Submit Cancel f Enter the Destination Storage Server login credentials and click Submit The Destination Disk Volume Pair screen is displayed Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R 4 29 Replication User Guide 4 30 Create Disk Volume Pair Replication Pair Name to Select 1 Vine01 Volume0 1 Vine01 StoragePo ol_1 E ENTER DESTINATI Storage Server IP Select Vineyard Capecod Source Disk Volume Storage Server Storage Pool ON STORAGE SERVER ENTS Destination Disk Volume Storage Server Storage Pool 1 Cape01 Volume01 StoragePool_1 SELECT REPLICATION PROPERTIES W Online Compression 0 Epmd Collapie E Chassis vineyard sange enm gt miiy D See Celia Stoo A est lt a MUA me OS Plug an F ae inet Figure 4 42 Destination Disk Volume Pair Screen g Select the Destination Disk Volume Cape01 Volume01
43. By drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show only the devices associated with the library residing on that particular node Click the checkbox beside the device to map a host or hosts In the host selection drop down click the host to map If you want to select multiple hosts press the Ctrl key and click each host to map Click Map The screen refreshes updating the of Mapped Hosts column and Hosts column with your selections Repeat these steps to specify the host mapping for additional devices For each media server that can access the S Series system do the following before performing any backup restore operations Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Maintaining Your 1500 6 7 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Viewing Detailed I nformation About a Specific Device eee re res iT eee a Perform the following steps to obtain more information about a device 1 Navigate to the Device View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Device View The Device View screen is displayed Figure 6 4 2 Click the device name to view more information about that device The Status screen of that device screen is displayed Figure 6 5 shows the status screen for TapeDrive 25 This tape drive has a single host mapped to it TapeDrive 25 GEKERAL ZAN
44. Cartridges AIN O Egan Colas amp Reres Tasks gt Cras Caii Ada Remoe Barcode Tompizies Chests for segd ospsion owi Fo g any ge Dedupiosion Cartridges All T ae DET 1 100 of 28a age Disk vodueres a H ge Process clay Hojas gy um terete Eeleot Earesde Library pe RIMOS ElementAddress LasiModied Aopss E D ip Lerares E awon 3 omoi a i ETE PEPE i a Cartridges oao To n J Feita e EE Updais je Disk Arrays F on en p Ee 7 Fenis ts Read aoe El DA 5 To Mo y Feita t aro Updeis z E ssa Move selected to a Ea Change s ledied Resnrwree i EJ Figure 6 9 Cartridge Details Screen 4 Editing cartridges involves performing one or more of the following operations e Moving Cartridges e Changing Cartridge Capacity e Changing Write Access e Deleting Cartridges with data erasure Maintaining Your S1500 6 13 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Moving Cartridges 1 To associate the cartridges with another library or the FireSafe select the cartridge by clicking the checkbox beside the cartridge you want to move If you want to select all the cartridges displayed on the screen click Select All at the bottom of the screen NOTE When you select all of the cartridges for example to move them to the FireSafe loading a large number of cartridges takes considerable time Wait until all of your cartridges have loaded before attempting to move all cartridges 2 Select the ne
45. Day Start Time and Window Duration under the Add Availability Window and click Add NOTE The window times are local if source and target S Series systems are in different time zones make sure the source and target windows overlap If the new availability window parameters conflicts with a previously scheduled window a message is displayed You can either edit the settings of the newly created availability window or delete any previously scheduled availability window To delete a previously scheduled availability window 1 On the Edit Availability Window screen click Delete against the Availability Window that you want to remove 2 Click Ok to delete the selected window or Cancel to cancel the delete operation A success dialog appears on the screen and the availability window is no longer displayed 3 30 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Deleting a Replication Target You may want to delete a Replication Target created on the target S Series system if it is no longer required NOTE Before deleting a replication target make sure that its corresponding replication library has been unmanaged from the source system Unmanage Library on page 3 21 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed 2 Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The
46. Deduplication Technology Best Practices Summary List on page 6 34 To minimize confusion Hitachi uses the term RMAN multiplexing to refer to Oracle s type of multiplexing Background The aim of this appendix is to point out the RMAN parameters that can have a Significant impact on deduplication performance and to provide guidance on how to best take advantage of delta differencing deduplication features when configuring Oracle RMAN Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual RMAN Configuration Settings Delta differencing deduplication is sensitive to the following Oracle RMAN configuration settings Table B 1 RMAN Configuration Settings FILESPERSET Specifies the maximum number of data files to be written Backup parameter into a backup set By default FILESPERSET is the smaller of 64 or the number of data files divided by the number of channels rounded up FILESPERSET smaller 64 or numDatafFiles numChannels MAXOPENFILES Determines the maximum number of data files RMAN can Channel parameter have open at a given time for a single backup set This i e tape drives Should be set to 1 to optimize deduplication ratios By default MAXOPENFILES is set to 8 The net result of this setting determines how many data files are simultaneously multiplexed by RMAN into each backup set Two important concepts are bound by FILESPERSET and MAX
47. Deleted Successfully Screen 4 18 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide OST A I R Replication Made Easy Replicate The Hitachi Protection Platform S Series is fully integrated with Symantec NetBackup OST and delivers industry leading performance massive single system scalability and the most powerful management tools in the industry to protect petabytes of data in a single system Hitachi Protection Platform and NetBackup OST Auto Image Replication A 1 R make replication and DR management simple automated and efficient Large enterprises may choose separate domains to replicate data between branch offices disaster recovery sites main data centers and other segments of the organization A I R leverages appliance based replication functionality under the control of NetBackup that is designed to work in multidomain environments to improve manageability and disaster protection in large enterprise data centers OST A I R replication enables event driven updates to remote catalogs That is a remote appliance signals that an image has arrived causing NetBackup to import the catalog automatically OST A I R replication also lets you manage multiple retentions for primary and replicated copies of backup images throughout your organization Massive Data Volumes Quickly and Easily Now you can move data as you need without wasting time importing catalogs or having tapes perform catalog r
48. Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Recommended Practices for Oracle RMAN You can choose how you configure your Oracle RMAN scripts depending on how much custom configuration you are able to do In all cases with NetBackup NetWorker and Data Protector delta differencing deduplication achieves better ratios if you disable multiplexing The following recommendations do not pertain to TSM backups Good Practice With this configuration delta differencing deduplication searches for matching backup sets for deduplication among all similar backups and will successfully deduplicate any matching backup sets it finds Better Practice Add the following line to your Oracle RMAN scripts to disable multiplexing and use scripted filenames FPILESPERSET 1 If FILESPERSET is greater than 1 for data files you will receive poor deduplication ratios Modify the script to include RMAN FORMAT for the first three fields of data file backup identifiers exactly as shown below FORMAT df d f lt other identifier gt For example with lt other_identifier gt it may look like FORMAT df d f s p t The parameters of the Format descriptor are explained as follows Table B 2 Format Descriptor Parameters Format Parameters f Absolute file number Backup set number Backup piece number Delta Di
49. Do not send any notifications d Specify the format of the reported information by selecting from the Alert Format listings Short Abbreviated message describing the notification Long Detailed message describing the notification e Specify the source of the notifications from the Event Source listing Configuring the 1500 2 6 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual All Send notifications from all the sources Processing Node Disk Arrays delta differencing deduplication technology and Replication Processing Node Send notifications from the processing node Disk Arrays Send notifications from Disk Arrays Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Send notifications from delta differencing deduplication technology Replication Send notifications from Replication NOTE The event sources delta differencing deduplication technology and Replication are only available when you have delta differencing deduplication technology and tape image replication licensed on your S Series system f Select the Configuration setting from the listings The S Series system can send an auto saved configuration file that is generated from the most current configuration whenever the VTL software detects configuration changes have occurred in the previous 24 hour time period midnight to midnight None Do not send an automatically saved configuration file All Send an automatically saved configuration file when it changes 4
50. Drive Status Screen 6 22 Tape Drive Status screen C 2 Tape Drives Create Tape Drive s 2 25 deleting 6 22 emulation types 2 20 2 28 parameter summary 2 21 2 25 2 29 port mapping 2 24 Task Bar 5 5 Tivoli Storage Manager TSM 3 40 Topology Parameter C 7 Troubleshooting replication not starting 5 47 TSM 3 40 collocation 6 47 concurrent mount points 6 47 mount retention 6 47 naming 6 42 relabelscratch 6 48 versioning 6 36 6 48 TSM Device Pathnames 6 47 U UNIX Device Configuration 6 51 Unmanage Library 3 21 Updating software file download 3 39 6 28 URL 1 8 Used Data data used 1 13 5 3 User Preferences Link 2 5 V Vaulting to Tape 3 41 NetBackup 3 42 storage tiering and tape 3 42 vaulting to tape IBM Tivoli Storage Manager 3 42 Versioning TSM 6 36 6 48 View Backup Reports 5 32 View Backups 5 33 Viewing Backup Reports 5 32 Viewing System Health 5 30 Virtual Device IDs 2 21 2 29 Volume Pools Symantec 6 45 I ndex 7 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual VTL and delta differencing deduplication configuration 6 43 VTL Operations add remove barcode templates 2 25 create cartridges 2 27 create library 2 18 create tape drives 2 24 delete cartridges 6 15 deleting a library 6 20 deleting a tape drive 6 22 oversubscription 2 16 view cartridges 6 13 W Waiting for Next Backup 5 32 Windows Device Configuration 6 50 Windows Server best practices 6 44 World Wide Port Name 6 2 Write Protectin
51. Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE psd EE The following mark on Products indicates that these Products are to be collected separately and to be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national regulations For further information regarding return collection recycle or disposal please contact your sales company where you purchased the Products Note The above regulation marking applies only to countries within the European Union EU and Norway Regulatory Compliance Notices E 7 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual International compliance V Complied Out of scope of the regulation Standard Marking Classification Country CB 500 CR 210 Reaion CR 220 1 Safety U S A Ni 4 7 T 2 FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A Limit EMC N N This Class A digital apparatus complies with canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rigue de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired E 8 Regulatory Compliance Notices Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Safety Canada CSA C22 2 No 60950 1 ICES 003 Class A Limit EMC J q This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Ce
52. Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Network interface connectors 1 2 3 4 The status LEDs on the connector are explained as follows a a o Figure A 7 Network interface connectors status LED Table A 8 Network interface connectors status LED indicate poms Eis E Green On A link with a hub has been established activity LED ae Blink aia ates nc ee AE ET is being transmitted or received Off IA link with a A link with a hub has not been established has not been established A 1000BASE T link with a hub has been established Green on A 100BASE TX link with a hub has been Green On established Amber Blink A 1O00BASE T link with a hub is being Link LED established A 100BASE TX or 10BASE T link with a hub is Green Blink i being established A 10BASE T link with a hub has been established or link with a hub has not been established The Activity LED shows either case AC power is still supplied even if the power of the system unit is turned off but this LED will be turned off because only link by 10BASE T can be established ae Onboard LAN controllers network interfaces displayed by the Tip device manager are as follows Onboard LAN1 PCI bus 6 device 0 function 0 Onboard LAN2 PCI bus 6 device 0 function 1 Onboard LAN3 PCI bus 6 device O function 2 Onboard LAN4 PCI bus 6 device O function 3 The number of the network adapter which is the network interface c
53. IDENTITY m p i o 2 2 E F m a gt E amp Set g re E DO F 2s Oo g a i Status SE i es Sa J brary 2 ETH LTO ag brary 23 REPATON E2100 Dg Litrery_22 REATO E2100 G brary 23 EEPATON t2100 Hosts mapped to TapsOriva 25 irin Figure 6 5 Tape Drive Status Screen with Mapped Host 3 Return to LUN mapping by clicking the desired view in the navigation tree or the Map LUNs task in the Tasks bar Clearing All Host Mapping Perform the following steps to clear all host mapping to one or more devices If you want to remove all devices mapped to a single host follow the steps in Clearing All Host Mapping on page 8 instead 1 Navigate to the Device View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Device View The Device View screen is displayed Figure 6 4 2 Select the library to clear the host mapping from the Library drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that library and all tape drives associated with that library 3 If desired filter the view to show only devices defined on a specific processing node Click the checkbox beside the device whose host map is to be cleared 5 Click Unmap The screen refreshes updating the of Mapped Hosts column and Hosts column with your selections Repeat these steps to clear the host mapping for additional devices 7 For each media server that can access the S Series system do the following before performing a
54. Only the library types that you have licensed for your S Series system are active for selection Select the physical library type you want to emulate and click Next Step The Library Parameters screen is displayed The parameters shown in the screen are the default values defined for the selected library type You can change the default values to match your environment physical system and license These values define the maximum number of Slots Ports and Devices that can be associated with this library The S Series system allows you to change these values once the library is created Select the Fibre Channel host port on which to map the library Choose either host port 0 or host port 1 Enter the maximum number of cartridge Slots Import Export Ports and Tape Drives for the library emulation and click Next Step NOTE Specifying fewer Slots than a physical library of the type you selected can result in the failure of your backup application to see or access all cartridges associated with the library 7 By default all hosts connected to the S Series system have access to all virtual devices Click Create Library to acknowledge this message and continue The new library now exists and a summary of its emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual GENERAL PROPERTIES Figure 2 28 Library Parameter Summary Choose one of the following option
55. Portal 6 55 account management 6 59 case search 6 62 change password 6 58 customer support 6 60 dashboard 6 57 information 6 56 knowledge management 6 63 logout link 6 59 open new case 6 60 product analytics 6 64 product dashboard 6 65 profile information 6 57 DeltaView Portal Information 6 56 destination disk volume A I R 4 27 destination disk volume pair A I R 4 31 destination storage server A I R 4 25 Destroy Library 6 20 Destroy Tape Drive 6 22 Device Pathnames TSM 6 47 Disable Hosts 6 3 Disabling a Host 6 3 Disabling LUN Mapping 6 12 Disabling Oversubscription 2 17 Disk 5 25 5 26 disk volume pair A I R 4 22 4 35 Disk Volumes View 5 25 Edit Accounts 2 4 Edit Accounts link 2 4 Edit Cartridges changing cartridge capacity 6 15 changing write access 6 15 Edit Email Report Settings 2 11 2 12 Edit Email Server Settings Screen 2 9 Edit Email Server Settings Task 2 9 Edit Email Settings 2 8 Editing Cartridges 6 12 changing access mode 6 15 changing capacity 6 15 Editing Libraries 6 18 maximum drives 6 19 maximum ports 6 19 maximum slots 6 19 Email Alert Types 2 6 2 8 Email Server adding 2 9 deleting 2 9 Enable Hosts 6 3 Enable Writes 2 37 Enabling Oversubscription 2 17 Erase Cartridges 2 34 EULA 1 9 Accepting the EULA 1 9 Event Notification 5 6 Event Source 2 6 Existing Libraries adding tape drives 2 24 Exporting Replication Data 5 45 Extent Size 1 15 External NTP Server Synchronization 2 3 I ndex 3
56. Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Cartridge Sizing backup jobs 6 38 sizing cartridges 6 37 6 38 Cartridge Slots 2 19 2 27 Cartridge Storage Requirements 2 16 Cartridge Summary Screen 2 16 Cartridge Types 2 22 2 30 Cartridges 5 27 allocating and filling 6 39 editing 6 12 move cartridges 6 14 parameters to edit 6 13 cartridges data erasure move or delete 6 40 Cartridges View 5 27 Cartridge to Backup Summary Report 2 10 D 2 description D 3 Sample cartridge to backup summary report D 2 Change Password 2 4 Change Policy State 2 39 by data type 2 39 Change System Parameters 2 5 Changing Cartridge Capacity 6 15 Changing Deduplication Algorithm 2 40 Changing Notification Type 2 8 Changing the Report Settings 2 12 Chassis Status Screen 2 1 7 5 4 Collocation TSM 6 47 Concurrent Mount Points TSM 6 47 Configuration download configuration files 6 23 Linux devices 6 51 restore configuration 6 23 6 24 save config 6 23 UNIX devices 6 51 configuration optimum 6 43 VTL and delta differencing deduplication 6 43 Configuration Job Reporting 5 43 Configuration Screen 2 39 Configure Alert Notifications 2 6 Configure delta differencing deduplication unknown data types 2 37 Configure Email Notifications alert formats 2 6 configuration 2 7 type of alerts 2 6 Configure Email Report Settings adding users 2 11 changing email report notifications 2 12 deleting users 2 12 Configure S2100 Platform set network configuration 2 1 I
57. ReStanting ne VIL wn44 4 tee ea eee ae Bee ees 6 28 Restarting the Console Manager and GUI 6 29 Restarting the Processing Node 6 30 Shutting Down the Processing Node 6 31 Restarting Replication Services 00 eee eee 6 32 S Series VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Best Pr OCCO cachet a e tte gece a or Be aa ete aera 6 33 VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Best Practices Summary List 0 6 34 Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Capacity Planning and SIZING 3 43 saa eaaa 2 ork da eee Ss 6 37 Delta Differencing Deduplication Cartridge MAaNAGCINGIN gia And data ede ade bh ema dl aces 6 37 System SIZING eaen e a a ei alk a 6 37 Operational Considerations nanosa aaa a 6 39 Maximum Path LengthS aaau aa 6 39 Allocating and Filling Cartridges 6 39 Allocating Your S Series System Storage Properly 6 40 Moving or Deleting Cartridges and Data Erasure 6 40 NOETICAEONS eiea Aedes Gob Ga ee Soh ac heed 6 40 USING SltOlade FOO Sere Seas oh ad he toe ce a Be 6 41 Backup Job Naming Considerations 6 42 Performance and Tuning Optimization 6 43 Optimum VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Configuration 00000 eee 6 43 Network Transmission Load Guidelines 6 43 Oracle RMAN Script Integration 0000 ee eee 6 44 Windows Server Best Practices 00000 Gs 6 44 Preve
58. Series system to accommodate the new data ingress requirements You should perform a quarterly review for each delta differencing deduplication site Things to consider include A performance review of e Data ingested e Storage consumed e Deduplication ratios Quarterly plans for e Data growth e Addition of new clients e Changes in infrastructure network and backup policy changes e New data types e Outages Maintaining Your 1500 6 53 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring and Using the HPP Support Portal 6 54 Hitachi provides you with a personalized online self service interface with Hitachi Customer Support using the HPP support portal The HPP support portal provides an interactive customer experience by leveraging a host of case management and self help tools The portal provides real time visibility throughout the life cycle of your Support case so that you know the latest status and action plan at all times The portal provides an online account management features allowing you to quickly and easily provide updates to your company s profile including active contacts and important notes for Hitachi to be aware of such as after hours contacts the escalation process and parts delivery instructions to name a few As a part of the case management tool the HPP support portal provides a set of Product Analytics screens to display the overall performance of your system These screen include a g
59. Servers 0 0 ee eee 4 13 Adding a Disk Volume to the Storage Server 4 15 Editing Credentials 0 0 cee eee eee 4 16 Editing the Node Configuration 4 17 Delete Disk Volume 02 000 eee ee eee 4 17 OST A I R Replication Made Easy 5 4 19 Replicate Massive Data Volumes Quickly and Easily 4 19 Hitachi Protection Platform and OST A I R Replication Benefits ee ees 4 20 Summary of OST A I R Replication Configuration 4 21 Creating an OST Storage Server 0 00s 4 22 Granular Restore naaa aaa aa ee 4 33 NetBackup Accelerator 0 es 4 33 OST Secure Erasure 1 aaa 4 33 OST Deduplication Control a saa eaaa a eee 4 34 OST Identifying the Backup Agent 0005 4 34 Terminology List ouaa aaa a ees 4 35 5 Monitoring Your S1500 cc ececeeccseeeceeeeeeeeeseeees 5 1 General Console Manager Information 5 2 Dashboard Screen saaana ee 5 2 Administrator TaskS oaaae a ee es 5 3 System Notifications saaa aaa 5 3 Chassis Status Screen 1 ee 5 4 The LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager 000 0 eee 5 7 Hardware and Software Requirements 5 7 Installing the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager Software 5 8 Logging Into the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager MSM 5 12 Contents 4 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual MSM Dashboard View 000 cee eee 5 14 MSM Physical View 0 0
60. Slots Screen 3 Click Restart Broken Mirror in the Tasks bar The Restart Broken Mirror wizard is displayed Slats Hot amines Barcode Canndpe Stairs Ls Lary Copy Pool Last Lined Suber Cancel Figure 3 17 Restart Broken Mirror Step 1 Select the cartridge you want to replicate 5 Click Submit The screen refreshes and the Summary for Slots screen is displayed The current state of this cartridge is changed to Mirror Scheduled 3 26 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Tass G Renae Meda Copyhow Shon Gedupiceied toy Resimi broken Mine G Advanced Search Rees SUMMARY FOR SLOTS AUS ipapa 1 ie 25 of dema leaned OOi1214567T39 E ode Cartage Statue O Loca Liprany zop Pon Lyti Mirronei Baro amp i ae F timor Copy Pod amp o DIH Figure 3 18 Mirror Scheduled Status This cartridge will be replicated with the replication window settings created previously for this cartridge LAN WAN Replication Target Operations The Replication feature allows you to perform several target manipulation tasks to manage replication on your S Series systems Editing LAN WAN Replication Target You can edit the LAN WAN Replication Target if required This allows you to change the Slot Maps and the Availability Window details of a Replication Target To edit LAN WAN Replication Target On the Target system 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image
61. Storage Manager 9 00 0100 Host View Server Details This page displays all the servers that were discovered Choose a server and click on Login to start managing that server You will be prompted for entering host credentials while logging in Use Configure Host to configure the hosts that you want to view IP Address 192 168 8 90 Configure Host Remote servers Host IP Address Operating System Health ds3 qa sepaton com 192 168 8 90 Linux Optimal Figure 5 14 LSI Host View 3 Click the IP Address of the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager host you want to view The User Name and Password screen is displayed 5 13 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Enter User Name amp Password fi Lsis Server 192 168 5 90 Use your Operating System s login username and password to login the MSM server User Name m smonitor i Login Mode Full Access w Figure 5 15 LSI MSM Server Login Screen 4 Enter the User Name and Password as follows User Name smonitor Password storage The LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager MSM is for viewing the status of your backend arrays and disks only You are not provided full access to the configuration environment as this is unnecessary when using the S Series because it provides information on your storage pools libraries cartridges and LUNS As such select Login Mode View Only then click Login The LSI MSM Server Dashboard screen is displayed F
62. You are using more copies of the Software than permitted under Your applicable licenses HDS will charge You additional usage fees 8 Limited Warranty Subject to this Section 8 HDS warrants to You that during the Warranty Period the Software will function in accordance with the Published Specifications To make a valid warranty claim You must submit a claim to HDS under the procedures set out at http www hds com pdf warranty_and_basic_maintenenance_online_terms pdf EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED IN THESE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT ARE EXCLUDED TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW HDS DOES NOT WARRANT THAT ANY SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE 9 Q0wnership and Licenses HDS and its licensors own all copyright trade marks designs patents circuit layout rights know how trade secrets trade business or company names End User License Agreement Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual domain names and related registration rights and all other intellectual property rights in the Software including any modifications Hitachi IP Hitachi IP is protected by U S and other copyright laws and the laws protecting trade secret other intellectual property rights and confidential informati
63. aa es C 1 DeSCriIPtiONn ees C 1 OON se ence Pe ew eae eee ek ee eee ee C 1 Force Unload a Single Cartridge C 2 Force Unload All Cartridges in Use inaLibrary C 3 Data Path Failure ee C 4 DESCHIDUOW e ep wie eo eee oe ee hae ee he eee es C 4 SOIUUON eundavneoued E eouee se eeu hoes ee wae os C 5 Incompatible Fibre Channel Port Settings C 6 DeSCriPtion 2 es C 6 SOON a e ererek kE eee REE Ped ee ee C 6 D 1500 Platform Reports ccccccccseseeeveeeseeevavaeens D 1 System Capacity Report ansaa aaa es D 1 Cartridge to Backup Summary Report D 2 Backup Summary Report naaa aaa D 4 Policy Cartridge Summary Report saanunna eaaa D 6 OST ALR HISTO sac oes eee ee oe eee eed hae D 7 OST Optimized Duplication History Report D 11 Tape Image Replication Job History Report D 12 E Regulatory Compliance Notices E 1 F SNMP V2 Event MIB F 1 The SEPATON Trap MIB in Text Format F 1 H 1500 Platform Public LAN Port Assignments H 1 Contents 3 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Preface As part of its effort to continuously enhance the performance and capabilities of its products Hitachi Data Systems HDS from time to time releases new revisions of its hardware and software Therefore some functions and features described in this document may not be supported by all models and versions of the S1500 product family prese
64. and Credentials screen displays the health status of the OST Storage Server and also displays the Master Node the I O Nodes and Disk Volumes Editing Credentials Follow these steps to edit the Storage Server authentication credentials 1 Select Edit Credentials from the Tasks list The Edit OST Storage Credentials screen is displayed Edit OsT Storage Server Attributes Warning Changing credentials will disrupt backup and restore jobs currently in progress Media servers using this storage server must update their credentials accordingly OST STORAGE SERVER ATTRIBUTES zme E OST STORAGE SERVER CREDENTIALS Tener hate ser Name canoni ET Figure 4 19 Edit OST Storage Credentials Screen 2 Modify the following Storage Server Credentials e OST over Fibre Channel e Existing Password 3 Click Save 4 16 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Editing the Node Configuration Follow these steps to edit the node configuration 1 Select Edit Node Configuration from the Tasks list 2 Edit the OST Master Server or the OST I O nodes as appropriate oO Edit Storage Server Nodes SELECT OST MASTER NODE SELECT OST 1 0 NODES Select an SRE Node as the OST Master Node Select one or more SRE Nodes as the OST I O Nodes Available Available SRE Node 1 CI SRE Node 1 iv SRE Node 0 In Use SRE Node 0 In Use SRE Node 1 No Public IP Assigned NA No Public IP Assigned C
65. and the error condition in text format and sends it to the management station If email alerts are also configured it sends similar error information to the designated email addresses The Hitachi SNMP trap outputs a single variable with the OID of 1 3 6 1 4 1 8082 7 1 This variable is a string with five parameters This string has the following format ChassisId lt S Series system serial number gt Management URL http lt fully qualified name of S Series system gt Event Severity lt INFO WARNING ERROR gt Fault Message lt component message gt Fault Component lt breadcrumb indicating element level of reporting source gt Installing the MIB in Your Management Application The Download SNMP MIB on the Notifications screen allows you to download the Hitachi MIB See Downloading the SNMP MIB on page 2 15 You can view the SNMP MIB in Appendix J SNMP V2 Event MIB The contents of this string are built from the S Series event that initiated generation of the trap The five parameters contained in this string are Chassis ID The serial number of the S Series system This value is defined when the S Series software is initially installed Management URL The fully qualified name of the S Series system This value is defined when the S Series software is initially installed Event Severity The severity of the S Series event that has generated the trap This value can be ALL Acomponent or eleme
66. can create additional drives easily in the S Series system and allocate them to Storage Nodes as necessary sufficient backup streams can be concurrently written without requiring multiplexing Deduplication runs at reduced efficiency when NetWorker multiplexes data To disable multiplexing do one of the following e Default pool Set the NetWorker device target sessions for any system tape drives that will be used by the Default pool to 1 or e All other pools Set the pool parallelism parameter to 1 which enforces one stream per system tape drive when writing to a pool configured with this parameter NOTE Hitachi recommends using a nondefault pool with the S Series system and using the pool parallelism setting since NetWorker autochanger reconfigurations may delete and recreate devices and reset the target sessions parameter to the default of 4 Hitachi also recommends enabling auto ejection by setting the idle device timeout parameter in the NetWorker autochanger Delta differencing deduplication technology does not deduplicate tapes until they are ejected Delta differencing deduplication technology is optimized for at least 256K size blocks tape records Hitachi recommends setting the tape drives to use a 256K block size Otherwise NetWorker uses a block size based on the device type used for example LTO 2 is set by EMC to 64K assuming that the operating system is configured for variable block size mode
67. configured will be replicated e Data will not be replicated if it is written to the source system before the target is created and tape image replication is initiated so plan your environment accordingly e If there is a standby backup server at the DR site the backup database recovery plan should be tested monthly This allows you to validate that the replication of the database backup volume is working correctly and the overall recovery process will work in a DR scenario or DR test Refer to the backup application user documentation for details Vaulting To Tape The S Series system is designed to provide an optimum environment for efficient vaulting of data to tape immediately after a backup Recommendation Why If you do not use tape image replication to send data to your Disaster Recovery DR site you need to create tapes as soon as possible and get them off site to ensure that the information is recoverable in the event of damage to your data center Hitachi recommends that you use your backup application to copy the latest backup to tape before the next generation of a backup is sent to the system If you use tape image replication to send data from one or more sites to a central site for archiving to tape then the following recommendations also apply to the latest backup on the tape image replication target The latest backup is stored in its original undeduplicated format while previous generations of backups are
68. data An image can be either a complete data set or data set fragment An individual image can be either replicated within a single Disk Volume or across multiple Disk Volumes and multiple Storage Servers Each logical backup set will have minimum of three images i e header image fragment image and true image restore image Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 35 Replication User Guide Monitoring Your S1500 This section describes the S Series Data Protection platform s Console Manager LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager client Capacity Manager and Delta differencing deduplication technology Summary screens The Console Manager screens associated with the deduplication feature present deduplication status performance and capacity information The LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager client allows you to view the S Series backend storage status The Hitachi Capacity Manager Is a capacity monitoring tool that constantly monitors your S Series Data Protection platform storage utilization The Capacity Manager provides a centralized graphical view of the storage capacity utilization by devices in your S Series platform The graphical representation of data allows easy in depth capacity monitoring by providing views of the overall system capacity storage pools libraries and cartridges The Capacity Manager screens also provide a disk volume view if you have the Hitachi OpenStorage OST plug in installed on your S Series pl
69. deletes the selected tape drive and has no effect on the other tape drives or cartridges associated with its library NOTE This operation can not take place if a cartridge is loaded in the tape drive That is the cartridge is actively being used by the backup application or was left in the tape drive by the backup application In this case refer to Force Unload Cartridge s on page 1 To destroy a tape drive follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Tape Drive Status screen by clicking on the name of tape drive you want to delete on the Library Status screen Figure 3 The Tape Drive Status screen is displayed TapeDrive 27 0 Eyad Coline Retresn Chassis br ssp1 sapma com E3 LST Se Loy H ge Dedupiosion TapeDrive 27 Status Deyme C irar 2 ETE Lie e Librar _23 IEFATOH E303 C brar 2 SERATO EHA D erer 22 pEEFATON 22103 E j Borage Poms j Borage LUNS airg al Cartridges T Dk Arrays Hosts mapped to TapsDrive 27 Figure 6 22 Tape Drive Status Screen 2 Click Destroy Tape Drive in the Tasks bar The Destroy Tape Drive wizard is displayed Destroy Tape Drive Wizard step 1 of 2 O Destroying Tape Drive 27 will leave gaps in the LUN ordering Select Restart VTL in System Maintenance to fill the gaps after destroying the device Hsp E KE o Figure 6 23 Destroy Tape Drive Wizard 3 To continue deleting the tape drive click Yes To exit without deleting the
70. devices to or from the selection on the right You can select multiple devices by using Ctri click The locations you select appear under the selected locations list 10 Name this view and click Create View The name you entered is added to the list of existing views Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 39 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 11 You can also update or delete an existing view by selecting it from the list of existing views Click Update View to update any existing view or click Delete View to delete the existing views Editing GUI configuration Tape image replication allows you to customize the view for Slot Summary Cartridge Summary table Job tables and GUI pages To edit the GUI configuration l 2 oS ae Click Replication gt Configuration Either click the Edit GUI Configuration link in the Tasks bar or navigate to the GUI Configuration link in the navigation tree The GUI Configuration screen is displayed Enter the Default Number of Rows in the Slot Cartridge Table Enter the Default Number of Rows in Job table Enter the Refresh Time for GUI pages in minutes Click Submit to confirm the changes Tape I mage Replication Best Practices The tape image replication best practices describe how tape image replication facilitates disaster recovery DR in general and where applicable provides specific guidance for users of Symantec Veritas NetBackup IBM Tivoli Stor
71. dialog box contains the devices that the report will include Use the arrow buttons to move devices to or from the right box You can select multiple devices by using Ctrl click The locations you select appear under the selected locations list 5 Enter the name of this view and click Create View 6 You can update or delete an existing view by selecting it from the list of existing views Click Update View or click Delete View 5 43 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual J ob History The Job History feature allows you to view detailed historical information about replication jobs for both the source and target systems To view replication job history of the source or the target system 1 Click Replication gt Job Reporting gt Job History Job History Lethe GEspen Ai Daa GlEsper Deeplayed fata JO8 HISTOR SPLOT LOCA Te TA SY J00 PS Loge Cweqedies Awali L cc tien Seteed bt aiken aa iiia T 1 Tro Sop bec tiee bacim hy n wr Ca PIi ered foto glean te 0 at Bette fom Gi2345 67 8 siwi Hini ae Daa Tiara er Total Pror ea uie Ti mrte kigi Tagai Jop EE ie via 5 an ama iar Gareds Tiere Tie ME Thine poets Tim tact iae AB Location ECE ET Moke seer Anan Chk LL F etahennen Figure 5 39 Job History Screen 2 You can view Job History of location categories The left dialog box shows the devices that fall into the location category selected or the list of locations th
72. displayed Configuring the 1500 2 28 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 2 29 TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS Port Mapping 0 N 1 0203 Select the Fibre Channel port number to which the tape drive is mapped Number of Tape Drives 1 ar All devices LUN Mapping Masking mode is enabled The tape drive s is accessible to all hosts Help Cancel Bie Bee Figure 2 30 Tape Drive Parameters 11 Specify the desired values for the tape drive s a Select the Fibre Channel host port on which you want to configure the tape drive s for the Port Mapping selection b Choose either host port O or host port 1 c Enter the number of tape drives to create 12 Click Create Tape Drive to continue The new tape drives now exist and a summary of the emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed 1 Tape Drive s created successfully GENERAL SAN IDENTITY Name Vendor Product Inquiry String Revision Node Virtual Device Port LUN Compression ID ID Map Number TapeDrive HP HP Ultrium R500 0 2 0 2 Enabled 2 LTO4 4 SCSI Help Cance clock G Figure 2 31 Tape Drive Parameter Summary If the tape drive is dual ported the Port Map lists ports 0 and 1 The tape drive s LUN value on both ports is also shown here NOTE Devices created on the processing node have 4 digit virtual device IDs The first digit of the ID is the processing node number followed by the device s virtual device ID on that node For example a tape drive with a vi
73. error state or backups aborted from the backup application etc NOTE All backups in the Waiting for Next Backup state display a dedupe ratio that includes hardware compression 5 You can also click Select All checkbox at the top of the screen if you want to select all agents backup types and states 6 If desired choose the number of backups per page to view at a time from the Number of backups per page drop down menu The default is 100 backups per screen page Other values are 10 50 500 and 1024 If you have more backups than the number selected the backup view allows you to continue to next and previous pages to see the additional backups 7 Click View Backups The screen refreshes and lists the backups that match the criteria you selected WCs 1 1 1 Last Page Next 100 ou oL Figure 5 32 Backups List Screen The Backups List screen lists the backup sets discovered by delta differencing deduplication by state backup name the policy used the time at which the backup session completed backup type and the deduplication ratio obtained The deduplication ratio is dynamic until the state of the backup set is Dedupe Complete NOTE The backup sets that have not been successfully processed by the metadata collection process may not be correctly reported on the Console Manager The backup state icon graphically displays the current state of the backup set for more information on backup
74. field 4 Click Change Password to change your current password Site Navigation Links The left pane of the Dashboard screen provides you with links to access different HPP support portal screens These links are accessible from all screens Power Search Bar The Power Search Bar is located at the top of the DeltaView Dashboard screen and allows you to search all indexed repositories in DeltaView including Support cases knowledge base articles product documentation and detailed product information Maintaining Your 1500 6 59 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Logout Link Clicking on the Logout link at the top of the Dashboard page exists you from the HPP support portal and displays the Login screen Account Management Click on the Account Management link on the left pane of the Dashboard screen to access the Account Management screen Hitachi Data Systems Your Company Profile HITACHI Inspire the Next Home gt Account Management gt Account Detail THE anna Abbott Laboratories La UNAS ae ee OF UTAH Address i LOD Abbott Park Road Status ACTIVE Address 2 Master Agreement 2 Address 3 Fin NO PHOTO Locetian Abbott Park Ilinois Website Modified 417 14 1g Phone 547 937 6100 Account Type Customer Alters i Registration Errail FIP Root Path abbott laboratoris Site Locations lt _ _ _ _ ___ _ List of Sites SITE NAME LOCATION SECU
75. gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Libraries The Libraries view is displayed Libraries All beet Figure 5 24 Libraries Screen The Libraries screen displays the list of libraries and the FireSafe capacity utilization in your S Series system The Libraries Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 9 Libraries Capacity Table Libraries Capacity Table Library The name of the Library or FireSafe Allocated Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the Capacity product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data in the Library currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used in the Library for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available in the Library for Capacity additional backup data This is the total Allocated Capacity minus the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the Library Monitoring Your S1500 5 24 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual The library name in the Libraries Capacity table is a link to display capacity information about the library or the FireSafe Clicking on the library name or FireSafe will display the Library Capacity view Figure 5 22 See Viewing Additional Disk Volume Information on page 27 for detailed library capacity utilization D
76. h Enable the Replication Properties Online and Compression and provide a Deduplication Timeout Online allows you to enable the processing node for replication or temporarily disable it Compression is a combination of hardware and software compression The Deduplication Timeout is the time after which the processing node will transmit the data to the Destination system You can set this timeout to zero 0 hours to transmit the data to the Destination system immediately Default is 48 hours If the data is transmitted wholesale nondeduplicated for example due to the timeout it can still deduplicate on the Destination system i Click Create The Disk Volume Pair Created Successfully screen is displayed Reliesh Tasks Configwe Arplicalion Nodes O Creale Disk Yolume Pai O Delcio Disk Volume Pair amp Fc Gisk Volume Pair Disk Volume Pair created Successtully There are po Destination Disk Volume Pairs Name Source Disk Volume Destination Disk Volume Source Sormge Sever Destinalion Borage Semer Compression 1 Vineyard Cac Vine tuumani ape t Wouren 102 156 11 48 182 160 11 5 Cheer ier a a Vine Valued E ie SRL Nodes F le SRE Meee Be le SRE Horde f H gj LU Mapping Da Libraries bi gpl Storage Pools al Storage LUNs Jj Cartridges ie Disk Arraya r Syatom Dala md Time AFANA 1747 os ERT Figure 4 43 Disk Volume Pair Created Successfully Screen Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes
77. have a large amount of data written on them and are in the scratch pool should be erased first e Nondeduplicated cartridges that have no dependent cartridges or few dependent cartridges should be erased next Nondeduplicated cartridges require dependent cartridges to be erased also 3 After you have identified the cartridges that can be erased follow the Erase Cartridge procedure as documented by your backup application NOTE This following procedures are intended to be performed by storage backup system administrators Refer to your backup application documentation for instructions on how to do this Use the backup application to expire and relabel the cartridges Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual TSM e Relabel the cartridges NetWorker e Relabel the cartridges Data Protector e Right click on a cartridge and select Recycle e Once the cartridge is recycled or if the retention period has expired right click on the cartridge and select Format This rewrites the header and wipes out the data on the cartridge Otherwise you must vault the cartridges off to tape NOTE The S Series system will enable writes on the storage pool automatically if the backend storage drops below 90 percent full Hitachi recommends you free up enough backend storage to enable writes automatically Reclaiming Space The Reclaim Space link will appear on the Storage Pool Status screen when
78. indicates that you must choose either a or b underline Indicates the default value Example a b Convention for storage capacity values Physical storage capacity values for example disk drive capacity are calculated based on the following values 1 KB Physical capacity unit Value 1 000 bytes 1 MB 1 GB 1 TB 1 000 KB or 1 0002 bytes 1 000 MB or 1 000 bytes 1 000 GB or 1 000 bytes 1 PB 1 EB 1 000 TB or 1 000 bytes 1 000 PB or 1 000 bytes Logical storage capacity values for example logical device capacity are calculated based on the following values Preface Logical Capacity Value unit 1 block 512 bytes 1 KB 1 024 210 bytes 1 MB 1 024 KB or 10242 bytes 1 GB 1 024 MB or 1024 bytes 1 TB 1 024 GB or 1024 bytes 1 PB 1 024 TB or 1024 bytes 1 EB 1 024 PB or 1024 bytes 11 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 The Hitachi S Series S1500 Data Protection platform provides a simple cost efficient way to eliminate the risk and financial impact of data loss in remote and branch offices The S Series platform extends the Hitachi enterprise class backup restore and deduplication features for efficient storage of nightly backups in remote and branch offices of large enterprises The system emulates Fibre Channel tape drives and simultaneously supports disk to disk backups using the Symantec Ope
79. information on the Cartridge to Backup Summary report When the storage pool capacity utilization rises to the user defined threshold level the following scenarios will occur 2 33 1 The storage pool is greater than the user defined threshold level but less than 98 percent full The default value of the capacity threshold level for notification purposes is 90 percent full The Console Manager allows you to change this threshold level When the storage utilization for a storage pool rises above the user defined threshold level the Console Manager notifies you via email and alert messages Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The following list defines the behavior of the S Series system when the Capacity consumption of a storage pool is greater than the user defined threshold level Warning notifications are displayed on the Console Manager If email alerts are configured emails are sent to the specified users If SNMP traps are configured alerts are sent to the management stations The Reclaim Space link is displayed on the Storage Pool Status screen NOTE Hitachi recommends that you free up extra storage space at this point You can perform the following tasks at this point Erase Cartridges Reclaim Space Add Storage The backend storage pool capacity is 98 percent full When the storage pool level is 98 percent consumed all attempts to write data are rejected by the S Series sy
80. installed Delta differencing deduplication summary screen The Delta differencing deduplication Summary screen displays the general information about the Delta differencing deduplication configuration This screen also presents a graphical view of the overall system storage space Savings achieved with data that has been deduplicated From the navigation tree in the side bar select Deduplication to display the Delta Differencing Deduplication Summary screen 0 DeltaStor Expand Collapse Refresh B Chassis QADR02 sepaton com Q gt Capacity i DeltaStor N Backup Report asl Bein gt Configuration t bib Space Savings from Deduplication ge SRE Nodes Aj LUN Mapping y Libraries 4 igi Storage Pools Storage LUNs Aj Cartridges Disk Arrays DeltaStor Summary Deduplicatior Events and pata space suas agi pee Error Notifical a Storage Savings elp 3 4 NOTIFICATIONS FOR DELTASTOR 10 11 10 07 50 08 DeltaStor database maintenance complete QADRO2 sepaton com gt ca 10 11 10 07 50 05 Performing DeltaStor database maintenance QADRO2 sepaton com gt ca Figure 5 30 Delta Differencing Deduplication Summary Screen This Delta Differencing Deduplication Summary screen has the following main areas e Space savings from deduplication e Deduplication event and error notifications Monitori
81. is active you can filter so that each host can see only those devices that you select See LUN Mapping on page 4 The S Series system autodiscovers all media servers attached to its host ports The Console Manager presents a list of all the servers found identifying each by its world wide port name WWPN The WWPN is a 64 bit name that uniquely identifies the device on a Fibre Channel port in a SAN This name Is assigned by the manufacturer and cannot be changed To facilitate LUN mapping and server identification an alias can be specified for each host server There are several host access management activities available e Specify a hostname alias for easier host identification e Disable one or more host servers from accessing the virtual devices e Enable a previously disabled host server e Manually add host servers to the SAN list e Remove unconnected host servers from the SAN list Providing a Hostname Alias To identify the media servers by a more easily recognizable name rather than WWPN perform the following steps 1 Navigate to the Host Setup screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host Setup The Host Setup screen is displayed Host Setup Disk vod fedecd Hisis World Wide Processing Porn Neme sont EPEN P YE Sp ea eS eeee eeeres g T Figure 6 1 Host Setup Screen Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 2 Enter a name for a host in the Hostname
82. is displayed Chassis fe ode 4 gt Caper E eben ther A amp 0s5 a dB sar 5 Lut om O anes oe Dg Library 9 ATEC 10k Gp brey ATL P C Utrary_ amp NOM JOLA Tape Figure C 2 Device Summary Screen 3 Select the tape drive with the stuck cartridge The Tape Drive Status screen is displayed Library_ 24 O Egad Colmes Refresh Tasks Ceas Cairidge O Create Tae Drie Edi lira Destroy Loran O Force Uniad All Chassis or sep2 sepeioncom E me apei Dewi hoe Barini amp Processing Kode id Processing PoriMap Cariridgs Loaded ge Deciupiosiion ge DET eT IT emote e bias Library 24 STK_L7O SGSMTEOZ O T ge Pronin Hodas t LUN Mappir oe a SL F 4 a O TapDivs 25 HPLC Seara 0 T iig Libraries E g Morage Pools 7 Sara Tere Ta peor wa TEH ra LO ee Le 1 a Borage LUNs Rj Cartridges E a Arrays Figure C 3 Tape Drive Status with Cartridge in Port 4 Click Force Unload in the Tasks bar The Force Unload confirmation message is displayed Troubleshooting C 2 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Help E EH cone Figure C 4 Force Unload Confirmation 5 Click Yes to unload the cartridge and return it to its library slot Otherwise click No or Cancel to exit the Force Unload wizard If the cartridge was successfully unloaded a confirmation message is displayed If the cartridge could not be moved a different message appears stating that Force unload of
83. job The number of bytes after compression that were transferred for the duplication job This is the actual number of data bytes less overhead copied on the wire A list of info codes REPLTIMEOUT indicates that all or part of a duplication job exceeded the duplication timeout value and parts may have been forced to go wholesale LOCALCOPY appears for any duplicated copy where the source and destinations are on the same S Series Local copies always go wholesale no deduplication instructions are used and no compression is used even if the source disk volume is configured otherwise A reason string that gives additional information on a jobs state for aborted or suspended jobs for example Unable to connect to destination storage server S1500 Platform Reports D 9 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The OST A I R History Report and the OST Optimized Duplication History Report State field descriptions are described as follows Created A job has been created but is waiting for the first opportunity to run Running A job is currently running Suspended A job has been suspended for some reason and is scheduled to run again Complete An individual job is complete but is waiting for other jobs in the Same set to complete Multiple duplication jobs are grouped into a duplication set and are treated as a single entity Once all the jobs in the set are complete those jobs will move to the done state Suspended J
84. library and drives This Support includes a Hitachi S Series and drives configured as IBM TotalStorage Ultrium 1s or STK T9940B drives NetBackup does not support systems emulating other devices The tape drives must conform to a limited set as noted in the Symantec NetBackup Hardware Compatibility List HCL e The virtual library must be configured with the unique VTL inquiry String as listed Using the inquiry string to emulate a real library model IS not supported even if the real device is supported with NetBackup e Only the virtual tape drive emulations listed with each virtual library are Supported Other virtual tape drive emulations are not supported even if the real device being emulated is supported with NetBackup NetBackup Best Practices for Replicating in a High Latency Environment 6 46 A very large data center may use Symantec NetBackup to direct backup data to tape libraries at remote data centers to immediately migrate critical data offsite The remote data centers may be connected by DWDM connections of up to 60 Kilometers in length NOTE The distance of the DWDM link introduces latency overhead into the SCSI command stream This latency will impact the amount of SCSI I O commands that can be transferred between the SAN Media servers and the tape library For example this latency has been measured to decrease Single stream data transfer performance by up to 60 percent over a 60 Kilometer distance compared to havin
85. navigation tree to see the individual Replication Libraries configured on the source system Click the library in the navigation tree to display its components i e Slots and Mirror Copy Pool Click the Mirror Copy Pool in the navigation tree under the Library you want to replicate Click Create Mirror Copy Pool in the Tasks bar The Create Mirror Copy Pool wizard is displayed The available slot ranges in this library are displayed The slot range represents the slots on the replication target not the source virtual library Specify the following a Enter the Start Slot and End Slot for the Mirror Copy Pool from within the available slot range b Select the library on the source system from the local library drop down field where your replicated virtual cartridges will be placed c Select the Storage pool from the drop down field where your replicated virtual cartridges will be stored d For LAN WAN Mirror Copy Pools select whether your replication is deduplicated or nondeduplicated e The option Use Tape Transfer is recommended only during Tape Seeding Click Next The Create Mirror Copy Pool ts displayed Enter the Priority of the Mirror Copy Pool relative to other Mirror Copy Pools high medium low The Deduplication Timeout option allows you to schedule an automatic nondeduplicated replication in case a backup was not replicated for a specified number of hours To enable this option click the op
86. notifications enabled the system will report via email when the S Series system Is again ready for use Restarting the Console Manager and GUI Some Console Manager operations require that the Console Manager interface be restarted in order for changes to become known Or the Console Manager display may not be behaving properly necessitating a restart of the user interface This action will require that you log into your system again To restart the Console Manager 1 Click Restart Console Manager and GUI in the Tasks bar The Restart Console Manage and GUI screen is displayed Restart Console Manager and GUI doce 23 cepaton com O WARNING Restarts the management module Will break all browser connections Figure 6 37 Restart Console Manager and GUI 2 Click Restart to stop the Console Manager services If you do not want to top your Console Manager session click Cancel to exit without performing any action The login screen redisplays with a message that it cannot communicate with the chassis as it is restarting its console services Wait a few minutes and refresh the browser window Log in again when communication is restored This does not affect VTL operations Maintaining Your 1500 6 29 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Restarting the Processing Node There may be situations where it is necessary to shutdown and restart the processing nodes and not just the VTL Perform this task only under the directi
87. ob was complete but has been suspended and is scheduled to Complete run again This happens when the last job in the set has completed its duplication but is going to retry some of the final steps in the duplication job for example the job had some issue doing a final validation of the duplicated images on the destination system and will run the job again All jobs in the image set are complete and this set is now done replicating This is a final state The job aborted due to some fatal error or was canceled by the user This is generally not a final state The S Series expects NetBackup to retry the job later and this job will transition to Abort Retried While the S Series expects the job to be run however sometimes a job may stay in the abort state Abort Retried A previously aborted job that was later retried Another job is Submitted for the subsequent retry This is a final state D 10 S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual OST Optimized Duplication History Report NOTE The OST Optimized Duplication History Report provides Hitachi OST Duplication specific information and is only available when OST Optimized Duplication is licensed on your system The OST Optimized Duplication History Report lists Optimized Duplication information for tracking duplication jobs and determining the efficiency of transfers This report lists the OST Optimized Duplication information for all duplications from
88. or IP address and needs to re manage the replication target with the new hostname or IP address or the S Series system is being reconstructed and needs to manage the replication target again Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 31 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 4 Click OK to confirm or Cancel to cancel the operation A success dialog appears on the screen and the source system status is changed to unmanaged NOTE Clearing the connection leaves both the source and destination libraries intact This is different from unmanaging a library where the source library is deleted Renaming the Host System If the host S Series system name has changed after performing the Clear Manage Source System action Clearing the Managing Source System on page 3 31 you still need to re manage the target system as follows On the Source system 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries gt target library name 2 Click Re Manage LAN WAN Replication Target Enter the host name that you want to manage in the Target VTL host name IP address field You will be required to enter the Target password so you will need to have that available 4 Click Submit Placing the Replication Target Offline S Series system s Replication feature allows you to temporarily stop using the replication target if required by placing the Replication Target in an offline mode To place t
89. policies and and they are then you should have scripted your rendering satisfactory continue to use CA2 databases deduplication ratios unless you are considering removing the scripting too not using scripted begin using scripted this is a Better filenames filenames Practice policy not using scripted continue not using Delta differencing filenames scripted filenames deduplication will search for matching backup sets for deduplication B 6 Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Sample RMAN Scripts with Enhanced Script Practices Following is a sample Oracle RMAN script with the Hitachi recommended script practices The key parameters to change are in bold The most Important change is to specify FILESPERSET 1 on the data files to prevent multiplexing These script changes are for the data file df the archive log al and the control file ctl FILESPERSET is not as critical for the archive logs or the control files because they generally do not contain deduplication potential The FORMAT clauses lt other_identifiers gt are additional fields you can include The main concern is that backup applications require the names of all backup streams to be unique Here you are providing the appropriate format strings to create a unique backup set name Also you should include enough information in the backup stream to be able to
90. processing node both ports are preselected for you b Enter the number of tape drives to create 6 Click Create Tape Drive to continue The new tape drives now exist and a summary of the emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed 1 Tape Drive s created successfully GENERAL SAN IDENTITY Name Vendor Product Inquiry String Revision Node Virtual Device Port LUN Compression ID ID Map Number TapeDrive HP HP Ultrium R500 0 2 0 2 Enabled 2 LTO4 4 SCSI Help cance CECE Figure 2 25 Tape Drive Parameter Summary 7 Choose one of the following options a Click Create more Tape Drive s to define additional tape drives to associate with the new library The Create Tape Drive s screen is displayed Figure 2 23 b Click Finish to add the new tape drive to the S Series system and exit the Create Tape Drive wizard c Click Cancel to exit the Create Tape Drive wizard NOTE If the User Defined Host Access mode is enabled you must map these devices to hosts on the SAN See LUN Mapping on page 6 4 for more information Adding and Removing Barcode Templates 2 25 You can create or delete cartridge barcode templates at any time The S Series system uses the template you select to label and number the cartridges when it creates them You can delete a template when it is no longer needed NOTE Do not create cartridge barcodes with spaces The Console Manager reports an error if a space is used for Digit Leng
91. reconfigure the network connected to the management interface If you find the communication is unstable turn off the system unit shut down the AC power by for example disconnecting the AC cable wait 30 seconds or more and then reconnect AC power and turn on the system unit A 12 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Hitachi Compute Rack 220S Specifications This section provides the Hitachi CR220S specifications Table A 10 Hitachi CR220S specifications Items 0 Specifications S O Rack type 2U SAS SATA RAID 3 5 inch 2 5 inch CPU Supported CPU clock speed Intel Xeon processor 1 E5 2470 2 30 GHz E5 2440 2 40 GHz E5 2420 1 90 GHz E5 2403 1 80 GHz E5 2430L 2 GHz Number of processors Minimum 1 8 Maximum 2 16 Number of cores Xeon Processor E5 2470 Minimum 1 6 Maximum 2 12 Xeon Processor E5 2440 E5 2420 E5 2430L Minimum 1 4 Maximum 2 8 Xeon Processor E5 2403 32 KB 32 KB per core L2 L2 cache 256 KB per core L3 cache 20 MB Xeon Processor E5 2470 15 MB Xeon Processor E5 2440 E5 2420 E5 2430L 10 MB Xeon Processor E5 2403 Intel C600 QuickPath Interconnect QPI speed 8 00 GT s Xeon Processor E5 2470 7 20 GT s Xeon Processor E5 2440 E5 2420 E5 2430L 6 40 GT s Xeon Processor E5 2403 M a i n Supported DIMM 2 2048 MB 4096 MB 8192 MB 16384 MB memory Low voltage regist
92. replication jobs and create reports for historical replication jobs Figure 5 36 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Cartridge Status Screen The Cartridge Status screen is displayed when you click on the Tape Image Replication tab Tasks SEdit Configuration Refresh SUMMARY OF ALL CARTRIDGES MANAGED BY REPLICATION ECHO COPY POOL SUMMARY iot migrated in Copy Pools notification limit Mirror Failed Corrective action needed In Use Deduplicating Pending Paused Waiting for policy window Mirror Active 1 Mirror Complete Waiting for first backup Initializing TARGET COPY POOL SUMMARY Mirror Active 4 Mirror Complete Figure 5 33 Cartridge Status Screen The Cartridge Status screen displays the number of cartridges managed by replication under each copy pool on the source and the target system This includes the cartridges in the echo copy pool and the target copy pool and their respective state The Cartridge Status screen allows you to Edit Configuration and Refresh the Cartridge Summary screen Configuring the Cartridge Summary Screen Display To configure the cartridge summary settings 1 Click Edit Configuration task on the Cartridge Status screen The Configure Cartridge Summary screen is displayed 2 Enter the Time to check for cartridges not migrated in Copy Pools notification limit Select the check box Send notification if cartridges are not migrated in Copy P
93. states see Table 5 13 The space reclamation task occurs after the creation of the holding cartridge The space reclamation task removes the redundant data from the S Series system freeing the disk extents for other purposes To do this 5 33 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual the holding cartridge assumes the barcode slot position and properties of the nondeduplicated cartridge Next the task frees the disk extents moving them back into the free pool for use by other data processes requiring storage NOTE The final deduplication ratio for a backup set Is not displayed until the deduplication process has completed and the disk space has been reclaimed Deduplication backup types include those in the following table TABLE 5 14 Deduplication Backup Types Displayed Based on Selected Filter Backup Application Incremental NetBackup User Differential Cumulative Incremental EMC NetWorker Full User Cumulative Incremental TSM N A Incremental Selective NetBackup e Full backups will deduplicate against other full backups e Differential incremental backups will deduplicate against full backups e Cumulative incremental backups will deduplicate against full backups and other cumulative incremental backups if no newer full backups exist but they will not deduplicate against differential incremental backups e User incremental backups will deduplicate against other user incr
94. status data type total physical capacity of the cartridge space reserved for system usable capacity logical data used capacity available capacity deduplication ratio and more The Backup Summary report lists detailed information about the backup sets on an S Series system This information includes backup name client policy used the time when the backup started delta differencing algorithm used for the backup set type of backup deduplication status data type logical size physical size and more The Policy Cartridge Summary report lists cartridge information for each backup set This report lists the backup summary information for each backup and its corresponding cartridges Policy Cartridge Summary report is an extension of the Backup Summary report and provides detailed backup information of each cartridge associated with a particular backup set Additionally the Policy Cartridge Summary report also lists all the cartridges that were used in each backup session The cartridge details include name of the cartridge under the column Type current deduplication state of the cartridge and the backup size before deduplication and after deduplication The OST A I R History report lists A I R information for tracking duplication jobs and determining the efficiency of transfers This report lists the OST A I R information for all duplications from the Source system The OST Optimized Duplication History Report lists Optimized D
95. sustain 300 MB s backup performance from a 4 Gb SAN The number of tape libraries and the port they are on does not matter since they have no measurable system load Try to load balance the allocation of tape drives and backups as evenly as possible across all Fibre Channel ports If there is more data being ingested into the VTL than the S Series system is capable of handling then there will be performance degradation issues Network Transmission Load Guidelines To minimize transmission errors follow standard recommended network transfer load guidelines If you are seeing a large number of transmission errors on the S Series system decrease the number of tape image replication maximum simultaneous transfers Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Replication Targets For a low latency network disabling network compression Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Replication Targets can decrease transfer time though it will increase the amount of data transferred It simply takes less time to transfer the data than to compress the data and then transfer it For a high latency network leave the network compression enabled Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Replication Targets for improved transfer rates Maintaining Your 1500 6 43 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Oracle RMAN Script I ntegration Hitachi S Series system scripting requirements for Oracle data files have been
96. systems support Symantec NetBackup OpenStorage OST on 10 Gb Ethernet concurrently with Fibre Channel tape emulation e Keeps pace with data growth The S Series systems with storage pooling for multitenancy environments provide an accurate measurement and forecasting of capacity and processing needs for budgeting S Series Overview The Hitachi Protection Platform S Series provides enterprise class backup restore and deduplication for efficient storage of backups The system emulates Fibre Channel tape drives and simultaneously supports disk to disk backups using Symantec OpenStorage OST protocol over TCP IP Data may be replicated over IP networks to disaster recovery centers to eliminate the transport of data via tape Storage capacity and processing power can be expanded modularly S Series Data Protection Platform Overview The key topics in this chapter are Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Virtual Tape Library The S Series Data Protection platform s Virtual Tape Library VTL emulates a physical tape library During ingest the data is written to disk and not tape so there is significant improvement in backup and restore performance The S Series Data Protection platform with its integrated hardware and software approach offers significant improvement over tape based backup and restore systems The S Series platform has several features associated with its
97. tape drive click No or Cancel buttons and return to the Tape Drive Status screen 4 Click Finish to exit the wizard 6 22 Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual WARNING Destroying a tape drive will create a gap in the LUN numbering of the devices in the S Series system You will need to restart the VTL and renumber your devices from the media server in order to remove the gap see Restarting the VTL on page 6 To renumber the devices you will need to e Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files For each media server that can access the S Series system before performing any backup restore operations Saving Configuration Settings The S Series Console Manager enables you to save the system configuration information to an external file for both the S Series system and device emulation configurations If necessary you can return your system to its last saved configuration using the Restore Configuration task You can also configure your system to auto save your configuration NOTE The cartridges are unaffected by the save and restore configuration operations To save configuration settings to a file 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Click Save Config in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The S Series system saves the system configuration and
98. the Save Configuration screen is displayed SAVE CONFIGURATION mong ack nen Helene halia tr ida the in fection Eto kon the imt beiw to downed iD Turata e5 Download Configuration Files Figure 6 24 Save Configuration Window 3 Click Download Configuration Files link to download the configuration file and select Save A zip file appears in the File name field 4 Navigate to the desired folder change the filename if desired and click Save 5 Click Finish Maintaining Your 1500 6 23 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Restoring Configuration Settings Configuration settings that have been saved may be restored To restore configuration settings 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Click Restore Config in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The Restore Configuration wizard is displayed Restore Contig step 1 of 3 RESTORE CONFIGURATION Please upload config file fe g vtlconfig zip File location grees no fie selected tap cmon REE Figure 6 25 Restore Config Window 3 Click Browse select the configuration zip file that was previously saved and click Open 4 Click Next Step A message displays indicating that the file was uploaded successfully and that the system will reboot File uploaded successfully The system will reboot atter restoring the configuration Are you sure you want to continue Help cma Ey Figure 6 26 Configuration File Up
99. the Source system Figure D 4 shows a sample OST Optimized Duplication History report Refer to the OST A I R History Report and Optimized Duplication History Report field descriptions above for the Optimized Duplication History Report field descriptions as the two reports contain the same fields Report Ty be OST Optimized Duplication History Report Start Time Wed Sep 5 12 22 53 EDT 2012 Report Frequency One time only Hostname sepvtl2 sepaton com Chassis Serial Number 90904 Revision Tag VTL_6 3 0 37 Job ID Source Jol Source DestJob DestinaticTimeout Compress State Create Tin Wait sec Restarts Last Updai Logical By Unique By 283098 se sepatonnisrc_ ss dv_sepatonnt 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done BSSnssss 2 O HHHHHHHH 1 83E 09 1 83E 09 283192 se kibbutz _1 src_ss dv_kibbutz_1 192 168 1L HHHH compressidone BSanssss 0 O HHRSRHR 53575680 53575680 283193 se notapesl src_ssidv_notapesl 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done HHHH 6 O HHHH 3 07E 08 3 676408 284666 se notapesl src_ssidv_notapesl 192 168 L HHHH compressidone HHHH 11469 9 HHHH 2 93E 10 1 5E 10 283192 se kibbutz_1 src_ss dv_ kibbutz_1 192 168 1L HHHH compressidone SSnnssss 6 O HHHH 512 512 283098 se sepatonni sre _ssidv_sepatonnl 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done BSanssss 6 O HHHH 1024 1024 283099 se sepatonnlsre_ss idv_sepatonni 192 168 L HHHH compressidone SSnnssss 2 O HHHH 512 512 283193 se notapesl src_ssidv_notapes1 192 168 1 HHHH compressidone HHHH 0 O HHHH 512 512 283099 se s
100. to any other person or entity without HDS prior written consent You may however transfer the Operating Software to a third party transferee solely with the related HDS Equipment but You must ensure that the transferee agrees to the terms of these Software License Terms and other relevant license terms The Operating Software is provided to the transferee on an as is basis with no extension of any existing warranty or support arrangements When the transfer is complete You must remove and destroy all copies of the Operating Software in Your possession or under Your control You must also permanently remove all Software from any media upon which it is stored prior to disposing of the media 6 Location of Software If the Equipment upon which You are authorized to Use the Software becomes temporarily inoperable You may load and Use the Software on another of Your computer systems located at the same premises until the original Equipment becomes operable Otherwise You must always get HDS prior written consent before changing the Equipment on which the Software is to be Used or its location 7 Verification Rights HDS or its independent auditor may upon reasonable notice to You examine and audit Your records and systems to ensure compliance with applicable software licenses The audit will be performed during normal business hours in a manner which does not unduly interfere with Your business operations If the audit shows that
101. to delete A window appears asking you to confirm the deletion 3 Click Yes to delete the template or No to cancel the delete operation The screen refreshes when the deletion operation completes Configuring the 1500 2 26 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Creating Cartridges 2 27 The Console Manager provides a Create Library wizard that takes you through the steps to create a single new library the virtual tape drive s and the associated empty cartridges Follow these steps to add a virtual library and its tape drives and cartridges to your system l 3 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis or Libraries Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries Click Create Library in the Tasks bar The first step of the Create Library wizard is displayed LIBRARY PARAMETERS i ar Scalar 1000 c ing ADIC Scalar 10k j a ADM Scalar 2d ci ig HP Autoloader 18 i Eg HP ESL E Series Log HP MSL6000 Series i is IBM 258422 IBM S6S4L 32 IBM 3584 42 D Cy IEM J504L52 Eg Quantum ATL Ph Lagi Guantum ATL Pood p ip Quantum ATL Paood Z Eg Suantum A TL PTO 3 E SEPATONM 52100 ia StorageTek Liso Eg StorageTek L0G Help tance MEEN Figure 2 27 Select Library Emulation Type From the processing node listings select the processing node on which to configure the library NOTE The Hitachi processing node x option is present if you have a multinode S Series system only 4 6
102. to meet and attempt to resolve any dispute regarding these Software License Terms in good faith If they are unable to resolve the dispute within 30 days either of us may resort to alternate dispute resolution such as arbitration or otherwise seek recourse from the courts Either party may seek injunctive or other urgent equitable relief at any time 16 Governing Law These Software License Terms will be governed by California law with venue and exclusive jurisdiction in the appropriate courts in Santa Clara County California To the extent allowed the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International sale of goods and its implementing legislation will not apply to these Software License Terms 17 Miscellaneous Neither of us will be responsible for any failure to meet any of our obligations except payment obligations due to matters beyond our reasonable control provided reasonable efforts have been made to perform them You must not assign or otherwise transfer any of Your rights under these Software License Terms without HDS prior written agreement Notices made under these Software License Terms must be in writing to a senior executive Notices will be deemed given where they are hand delivered when a duly authorized employee or representative of the recipient gives written acknowledgement of receipt for email communication at the time the communication enters into the information system of the recipient for posting three
103. two steps address tapes that are currently empty and not scratched 1 These tapes must be checked out of the library as follows remove no 2 The tapes must then be relabeled as follows and then checked into the library status scratch The following step allows virtual tapes with no data on them to be returned to the TSM scratch pool automatically 1 To enable automatic relabeling enter the following command Update library lt library_name gt relabelscratch yes Versioning TSM allows you to define a policy that specifies how many versions of a file to keep Hitachi recommends you Keep at least two versions of a file Backupset Backup 6 48 There is a special type of TSM backup called a backupset backup This particular backup is put into an Unknown classification and is expected to deduplicate against other backups of this type Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual NetWorker and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology This section provides information on some NetWorker options and how they might affect delta differencing deduplication ratios and results Minimize the Number of Pools The best practice is to minimize the number of pools in use You should create a separate pool for each projected retention period e Daily except for the last day of the month e One Month e One Year Maximizing Deduplication Effectiveness You should disable multiplexing Since you
104. use modification or distribution and generally licensed under the GNU GPL Lesser General Public License Apache or other open source software license Published Specifications the published Software specifications existing at the time You ordered Software from HDS End User License Agreement Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Software the object code format of i programming firmware embedded in the Equipment to enable it to perform its basic functions Operating Software and ii software programs supplied by us Programs and iii any updates related documentation and specifications Software may include Third Party Software and or Open Source Software Third Party EULAs separate licenses directly between You and the third party licensor which terms may be shrink wrapped or click through and related documentation which may be provided to You in connection with delivery of the Software Third Party Related OSS any Open Source Software licensed to provided with or otherwise contained in the Third Party Software Third Party Software any software licensed to HDS by any party other than Hitachi Ltd for direct or indirect distribution to end users For clarification purposes if any Third Party Software not sublicensed through these terms contains Open Source Software You must refer back to that applicable license for those terms Use to use Software in live production for processing data Warranty Period
105. values Tape Drives Performance Monitoring Table Processing Node The Processing Node number that the tape drive is associated with FC Port The Fibre Channel Port number that is assigned to this tape drive Read The amount of data that was read by this tape drive Written The amount of data that was written by this tape drive Current The amount of data transmitted over this Fibre Channel Throughput initiator port Monitoring Your S1500 5 28 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Monitoring Tape Drives Performance Navigate to the Libraries link on the navigation tree System gt Chassis gt Libraries and click Monitor Tape Drives Performance in the Tasks bar The Tape Drives Performance Monitoring screen is displayed Figure 5 29 This information has been generated for this cartridge only TAPE DRIVES PERFORMANCE STATISTICS SRENode Tape Drive Port Serial Number Element Library Read Written ae 0 TapeDrive_28 3 G694133028 256 35 3 07 KB 6 74 GB 92 80 MB s 0 TapeDrive_31 2 G694133031 100 30 0 KB 0 KB KB apeDrive_1024 2 14133124 100 24 0 KB 0 KB KB apeDrive_102 14 12 101 24 0 KB 0 KB KB apeDrive_102 0 14 12 257 25 0 KB 0 KB KB TapeDrive_1027 1 14 127 2 2 KB 0 KB KB TapeDrive_1028 0 9694133128 100 26 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s TapeDrive_1029 1 G694133129 101 26 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s Figure 5 29 Tape Drives Performance Monitoring The Tape
106. visually identify where the stream came from NOTE Enhanced formatting for archive logs and control files is not required but the format string must not start with df The sample below includes these concepts RUN ALLOCATE ALLOCATE ALLOCATE ALLOCATE BACKUP CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL SBACKUP TYPE SKIP INACCESSIBLE FILESPERSET 1 recommended format FORMAT df d s p t DATABASE sql alter system archive log current 1 ch00 TYPE SBT TAPE chol TYPE SBT TAPE cho2 TYPE SBT TAPE cho3 TYPE SBT TAPE RELEASE CHANNEL ch0o0 RELEASE CHANNEL ch01 RELEASE CHANNEL ch02 RELEASE CHANNEL ch03 backup all archive logs ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch00 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch01 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch02 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch03 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch04 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch05 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch06 TYPE SBT TAPE BACKUP FORMAT al d th s p t ARCHIVELOG ALL DELETE INPUT RELEASE CHANNEL ch00O RELEASE CHANNEL ch01 RELEASE CHANNEL ch02 RELEASE CHANNEL ch03 RELEASE CHANNEL ch04 RELEASE CHANNEL ch05 RELEASE CHANNEL ch06 H Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual e Note During the process of backing up the database RMAN also backs up the control file This version of the control file does not contain the information about th
107. 0 eee eee ee es 5 16 MSM Logical View 0 0c eee ee ee es 5 16 Accessing the Capacity Manager 00 eee 5 17 System Capacity View 0 ee 5 18 Viewing Additional Information About a Storage Pool 5 20 Viewing Additional Information About a Library or Disk Volume noua ee 5 21 Viewing Additional Information About a Cartridge 5 23 Libraries View es 5 24 Disk Volumes View 1 0 5 25 Viewing Additional Disk Volume Information 5 26 Cartridges VIOW noaua aa ee 5 27 Monitoring Processing Nodes Performance 5 28 Monitoring Tape Drives Performance 5 5 29 Delta differencing deduplication Summary Screen and Backup Report 4004 ean de ah 4 koa eh ee 5 30 Delta differencing deduplication summary screen 5 30 Viewing Backup Reports 00ers 5 32 Replication Monitoring and Reporting 5 35 Cartridge Status Screen nananana a 5 36 Replicating Wholesale Cartridges 5 40 Job History Table and Performance Graph 5 45 Maintaining Your S1500 cccceccseececeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 1 General Host Access Management 0000s 6 2 Providing a Hostname Alias 00 0 eee 6 2 Disabling a Host on the SAN 0000G 6 3 Enabling a Previously Disabled Host 6 3 Removing an Unconnected Host from the SAN List 6 3 Manually Adding Hosts to the List 6 4 LUN Mapping 1 ees 6 4 Enabl
108. 0 User Manual Missing The S Series system cannot communicate with a component it expects to be present An Apply Settings button is displayed when there are editable fields within the Status pane The editable fields show the current setting for a parameter Some fields require that a value be typed A red or yellow alert bar can highlight a particular parameter This bar appears only when that particular element within the component has failed red is operating outside its normal range yellow or is actively performing a lengthy operation such as initializing Event Notification A small notifications pane at the bottom of the screen reports any errors or events detected for that component Some errors also have an associated View Details link that provides more detail on the potential sources of that error The notifications can be in one of three states WARNING A component or element s operating condition has degraded INFO A component or element s operating condition has improved to good OK ERROR A component or element within a component has failed WARNING Hitachi recommends you do not perform the recommended actions that are displayed from these links but instead open a Customer Support case by visiting the HPP support portal located at https deltaview sepaton com or call 1 866 657 8400 Navigation Tree The navigation tree is the left pane of the System window The navigation tree has Expa
109. 0 User Manual This allows delta differencing deduplication to build meaningful relationships between two different backup instances The delta differencing technique then processes this data to identify and eliminate duplicate data within the VTL filesystem Also the following two features are disabled by default and must remain disabled for effective deduplication ratios RMAN compressed backups RMAN encryption Finding the Best Matches Oracle RMAN will write multiple data files to a single backup set following the constraints defined by the FILESPERSET configuration value as described above Because multiple data files can be written to each backup set with the appropriate use of FILESPERSET delta differencing deduplication can successfully deduplicate Oracle databases with many more than 30 datafiles Consistent Backup Streams When backing up multiple data files into each backup set delta differencing deduplication depends on consistent data file to backup set assignments Data file to backup set assignments are generally consistent unless the database Is being reconfigured e g data files are being added or removed Oracle RMAN Multiplexing Previously deduplication of RMAN multiplexed data was unsupported Delta differencing deduplication has been enhanced to support RMAN multiplexed data You should understand that deduplication speeds can be negatively impacted by the amount of RMAN multiplexing in each backup set
110. 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports to provide backup and restore speeds of up to 1500 MB sec S Series systems are also designed to load balance backup and restore functions automatically thus providing continuous maximum performance without taxing your network Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 2 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Equipped with Deduplication Technology Delta differencing deduplication technology is a feature of Hitachi that makes powerful deduplication available to your backup environment Delta differencing deduplication ts fully integrated with the Hitachi S Series systems providing deduplication technology that dramatically reduces Capacity usage without slowing backup or restore performance The Delta differencing deduplication technology licensed feature has self management functions that automatically manage data availability as deduplication reduces data volume When used with tape image replication the bandwidth required to replicate data over a WAN can be reduced to as much as 97 percent Flexibility and Control The following features of S Series systems leverage flexibility and control of your backup and restore environment e Large number of virtual devices The Hitachi S Series systems can configure up to 192 virtual devices either a virtual library or virtual tape drive and up to 64 000 virtual tape cartridges per system e Advanced network connectivity options The S Series
111. 31 513 GB Online YP Slot 9 SATA 931 513 GB Online Device ID 0x79 Backend SAS Address 1 0x0 Slot 10 SATA 931 513 GB Online Slot 11 SATA 931 513 GB Online BBU Device Port Count 8 Backend SAS Address 2 0x0 Host Interface Backend SAS Address 3 0x0 Host Port Count Backend SAS Address 4 0x0 FRU Backend SAS Address 5 0x0 Alarm Present Backend SAS Address 6 0x0 Alarm Enabled Backend 545 Address 7 0x0 Cache Flush Interval Correctable ErrorCount 0 Figure 5 17 MSM Physical View The MSM Physical View shows the hierarchy of physical devices in the system and a general view of the device features The properties for each item appear in the right screen panel MSM Logical View Click the Logical tab to display the MSM Logical View of the backend storage and devices Welcome MegaGuest view Only Log Off Dashboard Physical Logical Properties LSI MegaRAID 55 9280 4i4e Bus 9 Dev 0 z Drive Group 0 RAID 6 Host Name ds3 qa sepaton com 69 Virtual Drive s i Virtual Drive 0 9 092 TB Optimal IP Address 192 168 8 90 a hy Drives Enclosure HS1235TATS 32 Slot 0 SAT Operating System Linux Enclosure HS1235TATX 32 Slot 1 SAT Enclosure H51235TATX 32 Slot 2 SAT O5 Version 2 6 32 4 0 Enclosure HS1235TATX 32 Slot 3 SAT GP Enclosure HS1235TATS 32 Slot 4 SAT 05 Architecture i386 Enclosure HS1235TATX 32 Slot 5 SAT
112. 4 Removing a Host from the SNMP Setup List 2 15 Downloading the SNMP MIB 0000005 2 15 Clearing Hardware Compression Faults 2 15 OVEFSUDSCHIDING s edad diaper dob bore eee Ga eS 2 16 Configuring the Storage Capacity Alert Parameter 2 17 Creating Virtual Devices 0 0 a aa a a 2 18 Creating aLibrary 0 0c ee 2 18 Creating Tape Drives auaa aaa es 2 24 Adding and Removing Barcode Templates 2 25 Adding a Barcode Template 005 2 26 Deleting a Barcode Template 2 26 Creating Cande Seya a 4 ae a web a Ree a 2 27 Oversubscription and delta differencing deduplication technology cee ne 2 33 Graceful Shutdown at 98 Storage Pool Capacity 2 33 Cartridge to Backup Summary Report 2 35 Configuring delta differencing deduplication technology 2 37 Renaming Unknown Data Types 2 37 Changing Policy State 1 ee ee 2 39 Changing Deduplication Algorithm 2 40 Configuring the Delta Differencing Method 2 40 Contents 2 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 1 Overview and Features of Tape Image Replication 3 1 Key Features of Tape Image Replication 3 1 Implementing Hitachi Replication 00 0a 3 2 Replication Use Models 000 eens 3 4 Understanding Replication Concepts 3 6 LAN WAN Rep
113. 4 19 09 41 50 Controller ID 0 Fan speed changed on enclosure PortO 3 1 Fan amp Figure 5 16 MSM Dashboard Screen The bottom of the screen displays the event log entries for the server or for the client software New event log entries are displayed during the session Each entry has an ID an error level indicating the severity of the event the timestamp and date and a brief description of the event Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual MSM Physical View Click the MSM Physical tab to display the Physical View of the backend storage and devices The Physical View ts displayed Figure 5 17 a ETOT Dashboard Physical Logical F ds3 qa sepaton com 4 Properties Bm ALSI MegaRAID 5A5 9280 4i4e Bus 9 Dev 0 fy H51235TATX 32 Connector Port 0 3 General Firmware Properties Slot 0 SATA 931 513 GB Online F Shot 1 SATA 931 513 GB Online Product Name LSI MegaRAID 58S 9280 4i e Firmware Package Version 12 12 0 0036 Slot 2 SATA 931 513 GB Online Slot 3 SATA 931 513 GB Online Serial No Sv01700913 Firmware Version 2 120 13 1094 Slot 4 SATA 931 513 GB Online Slot 5 SATA 931 513 GB Online vendor ID 0x1000 Firmware Build Time Dec 032010 12 24 22 Slot 6 SATA 931 513 GB Online P Slot 7 SATA 931 513 GB Online SubVendor ID Ox 1000 Backend SAS Address 0 OxS0050CC10BC0843F Slot 8 SATA 9
114. 9456 19456 D A am n a om oda arma een eed mmm om daara TOT TOO 2 HHH mm mn ere ei idle ll HHH a Mm HHHHHHHH 414724 414724 Figure D 6 Sample OST Optimized Duplication History Report S1500 Platform Reports D 11 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Tape I mage Replication J ob History Report NOTE The Tape Image Replication Job History report provides Hitachi Tape Image Replication specific information to you and is only available when Tape Image Replication replication is licensed on your system The Tape Image Replication J ob History report provides a list of all the existing replication jobs and their detailed information The Tape Image Replication Job History report includes the barcode of the cartridge replicated start time of replication end time of replication size in MB total data transfer time in seconds source location of the cartridge target location job node replication completion status source cartridge start record source cartridge start offset source cartridge end record source cartridge end offset replication data size in bytes and replication metadata size in bytes Figure D 7 illustrates the contents of a sample Tape Image Replication J ob History report 232 044 Tr ALK 14477 AMIRE 4221 72802 3 ses C7 na aes j 2899 4995 Att anda TO A LHA AAS WD ORS SUEIO Sigo iii SUL00 1331 13403 3 gt ere Jorary 203 d a sas ALL NOVEL JUICES G le 239 1402232300 Report The Tape Image Replica
115. AN Replication Library and the corresponding IP and password to link the source library and replication target library together in a replication pair Once the source and target are linked the target slots and Mirror Copy Pool on the target S Series system is displayed on the source system NOTE The Slots in the Target LAN WAN replication library at this stage will display the status as Unmanaged because they are not associated with a Mirror Copy Pool To manage a LAN WAN replication target Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Libraries 2 Click Manage LAN WAN Replication Library in the Tasks bar The Manage LAN WAN Replication Library wizard is displayed 3 Enter the name or IP address of the target system containing the LAN WAN replication target you just created and click Submit 4 The targets on the selected S Series system are displayed Select the desired LAN WAN replication target to manage 5 Enter the password you created for that target Click Submit 7 The LAN WAN Replication Library Summary screen is displayed The replication library is now available in the navigation tree The replication library on the target system is displayed on the source system Clicking the library name in the navigation tree displays the destination library deta
116. ANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL choo chol ch02 ch03 ch04 ch05 ch06 H Note During the process of backing up the database the control file This version of the control file does not contain the information about the current backup because nocatalog has been specified To include the information about the current backup the control file should be backed up as the last step of the RMAN section This step would not be necessary if we were using a recovery catalog RMAN also backs up ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch00 TYPE SBT TAPE BACKUP CURRENT CONTROLFILE RELEASE CHANNEL choo NetBackup SQL Server I ntegration For large databases where there Is more than one file group and more than one data file per file group for optimal deduplication Hitachi recommends that you use a file level backup to create one backup image per database data file This disables interleaving of the data files into the backup image which is how many data files are written to a particular file within the backup Image Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual In the case of a database level backup having multiple data files the files involved are read in parallel and asynchronously The blocks written to the backup image are likely to be in a slightly different order each time and this reduces the ability for delta differencing deduplication to effecti
117. Administrator Tasks Located at the top of the browser window above the Console Manager tabs IS a link to log out of the S Series Console Manager Closing the browser window also closes the Console Manager session System Notifications Click Notifications tab to view the System Notifications screen 18 INFO b ep snm gt Processing Nodet BNNs 2413 Initialization for node completed br sep2 senctom com gt infitiization BNBtS 24k al OST plugin version 17851 on media server 192 163 15 7 may be incompatible should be 13644 i se segalo cam gt ca E1815 217405 initialization tor model completed h se sepalo com gt inftalization Figure 5 2 System Notifications Screen The System Notifications screen displays any events or errors that have occurred for all S Series components Each error event listed reports the date and time detected the severity of the error event and the component experiencing the error event Some errors and events also have a View Details link that when clicked illustrates the location of that component or element as well as possible causes of the error and or recommended actions to take WARNING Hitachi recommends you do not perform the recommended actions that are displayed from these links but instead open a Customer Support case by visiting the HPP support portal located at https deltaview sepaton com or call 1 866 657 8400 Once a component has be restored to a healthy state the Noti
118. Ap Lm Marran Symantec Son Appliances HDSHPPS O3T_7 3 0 15644_O57_sues 64 tar gz ie Libraries Dj ibrar 24 27H L700 DJ bray 23 EFAN EHS D brary s REPATON E2100 DJ Obrany 2 SEFTON EAS Ip Biorags Pools al Borage LUHsS Cerikiges Ho ask Arrays Figure 4 1 OST Plug In Downloads 2 Double click the appropriate OST Plug in listings for your NetBackup media server environment The OST Plug in Installation Save this File pop up is displayed Figure 4 2 DST Plugin Downloads O Eye amp Colle Reres os for your E By Cassis pr sspt reprim com Fl i Cecily Ho w Decision ee DET ge DET AR replikator HOSHPP 3 0 37 7301 V ee 2 FE AMOS eae RHELS E RHELG E Camos 54 Cems eth 6i HDSHPPS 037 7 30 183S pen HO SHPP 3 0 37 720 1344 30ans Windows Windows Sener 2008 A2 amp 2012 AMOS p up is Misr Se DET Pipi Deowriioeds cy zy 108 11 SER Sa Disi volumes FARCH Ipp X AIM 6 1 STi PPC Ta f F i Pronessing Woes AI AKG 1 HO 3SHPP 3 0 3T TAFE PPC rpm HOSHPR OST 1 KBE E4 rpm SUSE ban t aj LUH Mapping i D Libraries DE brary 24 ETH LTEN DJ Library 25 REPATON 22100 Dj Library 2E LEFATOH 15 D ibrary 2 REPATON 210 H gl Horsgs Pools j Morage LUNs aj Cartridges H ge Dsi Arrays i Opening HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 18644 Windaws 2008 R2 AMD64 exe You have chosen to open E HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 18644
119. Click Finish bo exit the wizard Cancel Figure 5 11 InstallShield Wizard Completed Screen 10 Click Finish You are now ready to launch and use the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager software which you can do from your Desktop MegaRAID Storage Figure 5 12 Desktop Icon Logging I nto the LSI MegaRAI D SAS Manager MSM Monitoring the backend storage is not mandatory but having the software installed on your system allows Hitachi Customer Support personnel to actively triage fault situations via WebEx sessions 1 Double click the MegaRAID Storage Manager icon on your desktop The initial MegaRAID SAS Manager software screen is displayed Figure 5 13 Monitoring Your S1500 5 12 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual MegaRAID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 Host View Server Details This page displays all the servers that were discovered Choose a server and click on Login to start managing that server You will be prompted for entering host credentials while logging in Use Configure Host to configure the hosts that you want to view IP Address 1 92 168 8 90 Stop Discovery Remote servers Host IP Address Operating System Health Discovery is in progress Figure 5 13 Initial MegaRAID SAS Manager Screen 2 Enter the IP address of your S Series server then click Discover Host Any LSI hosts discovered on the network will appear in the Remote Servers list as shown in Figure 5 14 MegaRAID
120. Config Link 6 23 Save Configuration 6 23 Save Configuration wizard 6 23 Saving Configuration Settings 6 23 Screen Resolution 1 8 Screens cartridge details 6 13 chassis status 2 1 7 edit email server settings 2 9 library summary 6 20 notifications setup 2 6 tape drive status 6 22 Script Integration Oracle RMAN 6 44 Secure Connection Alert 1 8 Seeding Data for Replication 3 11 LAN seeding 3 11 WAN seeding 3 12 Selecting Barcode Template 2 21 2 30 Set Network Configuration 2 1 configure your system for DHCP 2 2 domain name 2 2 external NTP server 2 3 host name 2 2 set 10 GbE NIC network 2 3 static IP 2 2 time zone 2 3 Set User Preference 2 5 Slot Maps 3 28 3 34 editing slot maps 3 34 Slots 3 8 Slow Replications troubleshooting 5 46 SNMP Notifications adding a host 2 14 removing a host 2 15 source disk volume A I R 4 28 source storage server A 1 R 4 23 source VTL cartridge replication status 3 20 Spanning Cartridges cartridge spanning 6 37 used capacity 6 37 Specifying Number of Library Slots and Ports 2 19 2 27 Specifying Size and Number of Cartridges 2 22 2 31 SQL Server with Multiple Streams B 13 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual S Series power sequence C 1 Status and Parameter Entry 5 5 Storage 5 19 5 20 Storage Capacity 2 16 Storage Capacity Alert 2 17 Storage LUNs 1 15 mounted 1 16 Storage LUNs Details Screen 1 16 Storage Pool 1 13 Storage Pool Status 1 13 Storage Pool View 5 18 Storag
121. Configuration Tape image replication allows you to customize the Replication Job Status view and create history reports for the source and the target systems The replication job status view allows you to monitor the progress of active replication jobs with percentage complete indicators to monitor the actual replication transfer and create reports for historical replication jobs To edit job reporting configuration 1 Click Replication gt Configuration 2 Either click the Edit Job Reporting Configuration link in the Tasks bar or navigate to the Job Reporting link in the navigation tree The J ob Reporting screen is displayed 3 Under Current Status enter the default refresh time for the Current Status screen display 1 to 15 minutes 4 Under Job History enter the default duration to display graphs 1 to 90 days 5 Enter the reporting data retention period 1 to 90 days Enter the default duration of the CSV format export file 1 to 90 days 7 Assign a default name for the CSV format export file This name is used for all the CSV exported files 8 Click Submit to exit without selecting the locations for custom view Otherwise continue with the next step 9 Select one of the locations for Custom View The selection on the left shows the source and target systems that fall into the location category selected The selection on the right contains the devices that the report will include Use the arrow buttons to move
122. DS HPP S OST plugins for NetBackup This document will guide you through same of the key steps inthe install process 1 Plugin Install Directory The plugins needs to be installed onthe system where NetBackup is installed Typically these plugins are installed in C Program Files Advanced Installer lt Back Cancel Figure 4 6 Hitachi OST Plugins Read Me File 5 After reviewing the read me file click Next The Select Installation Folder screen is displayed Figure 4 7 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Select Installation Folder This is the Folder where HOS HPP 5 OST plugins will be installed aoe To install in this Folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder c Program Files Veritas NetBackup binost plugins Browse Advanced Installer lt Back Cancel Figure 4 7 Select Installation Folder Screen 6 The HDSHPPS OST Plugins Ready to Install screen is displayed Figure 4 8 Ready to Install The Setup Wizard is ready to begin the HDS HPP 5 OST plugins installation Aine Click Install to begin the installation IF you wank to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Advanced Installer lt Back Install Cancel Figure 4 8 HDSHPPS OST Plugins Ready To I nstall Screen Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A
123. Dg Libraries DVER PUE SCRIPTION 6 6 o Wt ater Ponts br sep3 sepaton com Framed z ma oe aes uy BorsgePool 1 status Me o al Borage LNs 6 4d Curirtigss 6 ie Disk Arrays 6 ye Disk Array NAVIGATION i lt iCitswsi tS CC OFS OF Seo INFO or geo3 ge0storcom gt Proceeeing Node _ EVENT NOTIFICATIONS STATUS AND Alerts PARAMETER ENTRY Figure 5 3 Chassis Status Screen The Chassis Status screen shows the overall health of the S Series system its identity in your backup environment and its network configuration settings It also provides links to several commonly performed system administrative tasks Monitoring Your 1500 5 4 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Task Bar The Console Manager obtains the information for this screen from the S Series system itself The oversubscription parameters for the storage pools in the S Series system can be set from this screen The Notifications pane lists recent errors or events that have occurred at the system level Each error and event listed reports the date and time detected the severity of the error or event and the component experiencing the error or event The S Series Console Manager screens for component status and parameter entry are composed of four major regions e Task Bar e Status and Parameter Entry e Event Notifications Alerts e Navigation Tree The regions are resizable so you can enlarge or reduce an
124. Drives Performance Monitoring table lists the following values Tape Drives Performance Monitoring Table Processing Node The Processing Node number that the tape drives is associated with Tape Drive The Tape Drive name that is assigned to this tape drive Port The Port numbers that are connected to this tape drive Serial Number The Serial Number of this tape drive Element The Element represents the location in the library at which this tape drive resides Library The Library LUN number that contains this tape drive The amount of data that was read by this tape drive for the cartridge currently loaded into this drive Written The amount of data that was written by this tape drive for the cartridge currently loaded into this drive Current The amount of data transmitted over this Fibre Channel Throughput initiator port 5 29 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Delta differencing deduplication Summary Screen and Backup Report The S Series Console Manager screens associated with the deduplication feature present deduplication performance and capacity information using the Delta differencing deduplication Summary screen and Backup Report screen In addition this information can be emailed to the specified users in the form of a Comma Separated Value CVS file The Delta differencing deduplication Backup report and screens are only available when the deduplication license is successfully
125. E CoPITO1 Pending Customer NTT UK Bongers Team WTL Alert Mirror F 3 7 54 AM D rr CSH Researching Multrlare Mar Poesy Ochos System Crashed 2 3 55 PM E O CS30702 Monitorning Geko Freden Lebrun Purcell Dek Waring Message 3 5 PM a fe CSS0700 Pending Customer Rabobank Lane brn Support Australia WTL Alert Duplicat 3 031 15 LE H C5306939 Pending Customer UBOC Monterey Lynch Mirdhe Tape s have not bee 2 05 31715 2 I CSI0658 Pending Customer DES Monto Letrun Caspar Create mew delaview 3 9 51 AM F H C5306935 Pending Customer Nordea Bank Dan Wyatt Bergsbr m WTL Alert OST plug 3 G 22 AM 2 H CSJ3eS7 Escalated to OEM DESI Hometo Lebrun Casper Bad Disk in Hitachi 3 2 05 FM Z fe CSG Pending Customer Nordea Bank Dan Burrill Bergetrim 14012 Lost connect 3 B 00 AM 3 I C5306951 Researching Telef nica 02 Bongars Support WTL Alest AF tap 3 10 58 AM 3 fe Cosas Pending Customer UBOC Monterey Lebrun Operation WTL Alert Backend 3 yay 15 Figure 6 52 Case Search Screen Maintaining Your 1500 6 63 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 2 The Case Search screen provides a number of filter options to search an existing case The list of search results is displayed on the screen based on your selection Enter one of more filter options to display an existing support case Number Case number Site The site name for which the case was created Owner The nam
126. E canes Figure 4 16 OST Disk Volume Creation Screen Enter a Name for the OST Disk Volume Select a Storage Pool Select the Optimized Duplication Timeout and Enable Data Transfer Compression if desired 4 Click Add Disk Volume The OST Disk Volume Creation Configure Disk Volumes screen is displayed Figure 4 17 DST Storage Serer Creation Wizard Step 5 of 5 Configure more Disk volumes Disk Volume DY has bean successtuly added to StorapsPoo 1 Diss Volume 5 cory ured ir GST Sora J Sener CCi Disk Volumes horapa Pk Dana aasa Annainn Dei vatima Figure 4 17 OST Disk Volume Creation Configure Disk Volumes Screen 5 Click Done or Add Another Disk Volume The OST Status and Credentials screen is displayed Figure 4 18 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 15 Replication User Guide GO Eyad Collapse Remesi Tasks O En CST Sorage Sener Annies Deke OST Borage Sener Add Die Volume Bg Chassis or sept sepsion oom ie paty DORPURATION OF 0 ET Moe ge Decupdioetion ae aT Master Hiris ge DET AR repihaton e087 Plugin Downloads PO Hoist T ie 5 Processing Node 0 a Picea ig Hodes A t a LUH Mapping Degrees E Gg Litrartes Fj gil Borage Pools ea aj Horage LUH Mig gj Cariri Tj a sk Arrays Credentials DSH VOLIME S Liser Name gt acrmiiniistraior ry OFT OVER AERE CHAHHEL Figure 4 18 OST Status and Credentials Screen The OST Status
127. E switch the MAINTENANCE LEDs will change the code to display as follows gt Pressing of SERVICE switch number press _ count Power consumption Figure A 4 Manipulating the MAI NTENANCE LEDs When you intend to press a SERVICE switch be careful not to press the POWER switch The system will be shut down if the POWER switch is pressed s When an AC cable is connected and the system unit gets supplied Tp with AC power both SERVICE LEDs on the front side and on the rear side of the system unit blink for about 60 seconds During this period the MAINTENANCE LEDs are turned off The system unit doesn t start unless the SERVICE LEDs finish blinking So you will have to wait the system to start until the LEDs finish blinking if you press the POWER switch while the SERVICE LEDs are still blinking S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 7 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual FUNCTION switch Tip Do not press the FUNCTION switch and the SERVICE switch at the Same time NMI is issued and the system will be forcibly shut down If you press the FUNCTION switch continuously for 10 seconds or more while the management interface is not connected to LAN the system unit gets into the BMC maintenance mode and the ERROR LED will blink BMC maintenance mode is used during maintenance work Avoid this operation When into this mode you can release the system unit from the BMC maintenanc
128. HITACHI Inspire the Next Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual FASTEIND LINKS Hitachi Data Systems MK 95HPP006 00 2008 2015 Hitachi Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying and recording or stored in a database or retrieval system for any purpose without the express written permission of Hitachi Ltd and Hitachi Data Systems Corporation hereinafter referred to as Hitachi Hitachi Ltd and Hitachi Data Systems reserve the right to make changes to this document at any time without notice and assume no responsibility for its use Hitachi Ltd and Hitachi Data Systems products and services can only be ordered under the terms and conditions of Hitachi Data Systems applicable agreements All of the features described in this document may not be currently available Refer to the most recent product announcement or contact your local Hitachi Data Systems sales office for information on feature and product availability Notice Hitachi Data Systems products and services can be ordered only under the terms and conditions of Hitachi Data Systems applicable agreements The use of Hitachi Data Systems products is governed by the terms of your agreements with Hitachi Data Systems By using this software you agree that you are responsible for a Acquiring the relevant consents as may b
129. I R 4 7 Replication User Guide 7 Click Install The Microsoft Visual C 2010 x64 Redistributable Setup License screen is displayed Figure 4 9 Welcome to Microsoft Yisual C 2010 64 Redistributable Setup Please accept the license terms to continue MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT YISUAL C 2010 RUNTIME LIBRARIES M_I have read and accept the license terms Yes send information about my setup experiences to Microsoft Corporation For more information read the Data Collection Policy Install Cancel Figure 4 9 Microsoft Visual C 2010 x64 Redistributable Setup License 8 Click have read and accept the license terms then click Install The Installation Is Complete screen is displayed Figure 4 10 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Installation Is Complete Microsoft Visual C 2010 x64 Redistributable has been installed You can check For more recent versions of this package on the Microsoft Visual Studic website Figure 4 10 Installation Is Complete Screen 9 Click Finish The HDSHPPS OST Plugins Setup Completion screen is displayed Figure 4 11 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A R Replication User Guide Completing the HDS HPP S OST plugins Setup Wizard Click the Finish button to exit the Setup Wizard Back Gancel Figure 4 11 HDSHPPS OST Plugins Setup Completion Screen 10 Click Finish
130. INLINE6 261 8 Denotes a column with estimated values 9 Backup Name Client Policy Job Started Alg 10 ds3 7h i1 3125C ds3 7h i 31250 P Status Data Type Complete Logical Size GB Physical Size GB Dedupe Ratic Savings I Dedupe CNBU Oracle 100 21 47505254 0 126152691 170 21 349 99 18 34929357 0 126151715 145 5 Type 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full 11 YY0298 Completed YY0299 Completed 3 125758976 0 000000976 3202621 9 13 ds3 7h i1 31014 ds3 7h i31014 P 6111 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe C NBU Oracle 100 21 47505254 0 126141092 170 21 349 99 14 YY0180 Completed 8 875101184 0 000001294 6858656 2 15 YY0179 Completed 12 59995136 0 126139798 99 9 16 ds3 7h i1 3151 ds3 7h i31516 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe C NBU Oracle 100 21 47505254 0 126144427 170 21 349 99 17 YY0418 Completed 15 9603753 0 126143271 126 5 18 YY0419 Completed 5 514677248 0 000001156 4770482 19 ds3 7h i1 2875_ds3 7h i2875 PO 6 13 2011 CA2 Full Waiting fc NBU Oracle 0 21 47505254 12 31801862 1 7 9 157 42 20 YY0763 Unprocessed 21 47505254 NIA 21 ds3 7h i1 3198 ds3 7h i31988 P 6 10 2011 CA2 Ma Full Dedupe C NBU Oracle 100 21 47505254 0 126316863 170 21 349 99 22 YY0673 Completed 16 4612864 0 000288448 57068 5 23 YY0672 Completed 5 013766144 0 126028415 39 8 Figure D 4 Sample Policy Cartridge Summary Report The Policy Cartridge Summary report lists the backup name client policy used the time when the backup started the delta differen
131. Maintenance to fill the gaps after destroying the device Figure 6 21 Destroy Library Step 1 4 To continue deleting the library click Yes To exit without deleting the library click the No or Cancel buttons and return to the Chassis screen 5 Click Finish to exit the wizard The operation is complete when the navigation tree refreshes with the library no longer listed All tape drives associated with that library are also deleted as part of this operation NOTE To access the data on cartridges that were associated with that library you must move those cartridges from the FireSafe to another library See Editing Cartridges on page 12 for information on how to make these changes WARNING Destroying a library will create a gap in the LUN numbering of the devices in the S Series system You will need to restart the VTL and renumber your devices from the media server in order to remove the gap see Restarting the VTL on page 6 To renumber your devices you will need to e Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files For each media server that can access the S Series system before performing any backup restore operations Maintaining Your 1500 6 21 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Destroying a Tape Drive You can delete a tape drive using the Destroy Tape Drive task This operation
132. Manual Notifications Taske 0 Mumam Seto kall Sener eho 0 Repon Bea SNMP Seo 0 Gowiked SNMP Mi F MOTIFICATION 5 rl 71815 215518 G INFO or sen senstoncom gt Processing Node F JASS 214427 E INFO or sentsenston com gt Processing Noded ial C4815 2118 amp Inthiizaton tor noted compisted or sen secstionoonm gt infialization F GHAS Zihi a OST pugin vesion 17851 on media carver 19216315H may be incompatible shouid be 1444 W sep2sepaionoom gt ca F OBN81S 210s E tserbon tor node compisisd o se senaton com gt miaz Figure 1 18 Notifications Screen 9 Review the Notifications listings to see the actions that have been performed The red No license file found listing is causing the current state of degradation 10 Click and delete the No license file found listing After approximately five minutes the degraded condition clears itself and you are ready to use your S Series system services Figure 1 19 Chassis br sep 2 csepaton com D Epa Colaps Retes Tasks Crese Lory Clear All Fauks E ge Cupet ge Dette DiTerencing Deduniiastion Piirab Ti ge DBT CENERAL MAINTENANCE TEHE ge Disk volumes MGETSTE OF SEce se m install License ete iy P F Sige Processing Nodes fs Serial Sh Edk Accounts Warz ki rT T jj LUN Mapping aaa Ye naan User Preterences E Gg Libraries s OVER PUS PCHIFTION Sofware Lipase El il ttorage Pools br sep2 sepaton com Frabied i saeco
133. Maximum The MAXSETSIZE should be equal to or greater than the largest file Backup Set that is being backed up to avoid fragmenting the file into multiple Size backup sets Relabelscratch TSM V5 5 2 has a feature that allows scratch tapes to be automatically relabeled This eliminates the need for the TSM administrator to manually relabel scratch cartridges to reclaim space Versioning Keep at least two versions of a file NetWorker Options Block Size The S Series system is optimized for at least 256 KB size blocks tape records Otherwise NetWorker uses a recommended block size based on the device type for example LTO 2 is set by EMC to 64 KB assuming that the operating system is configured for variable block size mode Refer to the EMC NetWorker documentation for additional information Target Hitachi recommends using a nondefault pool with the S Series Sessions system and using the pool parallelism setting since NetWorker autochanger reconfigurations may delete and recreate devices and reset the target sessions parameter to the default of 4 Client Names The client names must match for deduplication to take place The Saveset is alSo used although it is based on comparing common paths so datal folderl would be compared to datal 6 36 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Capacity Planning and Sizing This section provides informatio
134. Moving cartridges to the FireSafe causes the S Series platform to mark those cartridges as vaulted making them unavailable for use by a backup application Creating a Library The Console Manager provides a Create Library wizard that takes you through the steps to create a single new library the virtual tape drive s and the associated empty cartridges Follow these steps to add a virtual library and its tape drives and cartridges to your system 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis or Libraries Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries 2 Click Create Library in the Tasks bar The first step of the Create Library wizard is displayed LIBRARY PARAMETERS i Scalar 1000 C E AIC Scalar 10k Logi ADM Scalar 2d is HP Autoloader 12 Log HP ESL E Series ug HP MSLE000 Serios D Dy IBM P5R4L22 IBM S6S4L32 F a IBM J584L42 Log IBM F584 52 Log Quantum a TL Pith Lagi Guantum ATL Pood Quantum ATL Facto gy GQuantum ATL Proti iy SEPATON 527100 a a uanium 2 ip uantum i 2 Log 3 Log StorageTek Lied Gy StorageTek L700 Help Camcal Nmd Siop Figure 2 12 Select Library Emulation Type 3 From the processing node listings select the processing node on which to configure the library NOTE The Hitachi processing node x option is present if you have a multinode S Series system only Configuring the 1500 2 18 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 4 Only the library ty
135. Ns in your system 1 Navigate to the Storage LUNs screen System gt Chassis gt Storage LUNs The Storage LUNs screen is displayed It shows various ways you can view storage LUNs that are associated with your S Series platform This includes all storage LUNs existing in your system storage LUNs for a specific storage pool and storage LUNs per disk array is BE Storage LUNs O Fos Colinse Fetes Chassis Fors septic ee CSL H gee upian LUH Eistus Daproty Fault Desorption Weordd Wide Linique LUH E H ee DET D Pa T E Ee a Disk Volumes i E J555 GE piana H ma recs sing Hodes 7 SEE aj UUN Mepping E os P F G braies pl Hiorsgs Fools aj BorageFool 1 Horsgs LUH Csisiis Fer kods aj tiorsge LUH a Hades A d Cartridges ee Ds Arrays LUH Etetus Pratsrred Fetis Hon Fre erred Feii o MCRD a raisin he o Figure 1 9 Storage LUNs 2 Click View button beside the storage pool The Storage LUNs Detail screen is displayed 1 15 Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual G Eyad Cobre amp Reres Chassis or sa08_ sepsin oom Borage LUH Cisis ie Coy a upisan LUH 2 Eistus Cason Fault Desorption World Wide Linkgue LUH O ge OT o Storage Pool 1 1761 GS a pigar denean s D mE o i zirag Pogi 3553 GE i pikne n ee Preeee sie Heart garage Poo tig i pinea shire PAA Storage Pool 5865 GE BOQH0SS 1 053005320000000 H G Litberai
136. OPENFILES e The number of backup sets is equal to the number of data files divided by FILESPERSET rounded up number of backup sets number of data files FILESPERSET e The degree of RMAN multiplexing in a backup set is the smaller of FILESPERSET or MAXOPENFILES degree of multiplexing smaller of FILESPERSET or MAXOPENFILES For example suppose you want to back up a database with 175 equally sized data files using 8 tape drives channels with MAXOPENFILES 3 RMAN uses the default FILESPERSET value smaller of 64 or 175 8 22 to minimize the number of backup sets As a result RMAN backs up the database into 8 backup sets 1 per channel each backup set containing 22 data files and being 3 way multiplexed by RMAN The MAXSETSIZE command should be equal to or greater than the largest file that is being backed up to avoid fragmenting the file into multiple backup sets By default a single backup set is created The MAXSETSIZE setting should be left at the default setting which is no entry The following commands are required to make sure that the control files and spfile backups are not included in data file backup These are the default settings and they must be kept at the default settings CONFIGURE CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP ON CONFIGURE CONTROLFILE AUTOBACKUP FORMAT FOR DEVICE TYPE SBT TAPE TO SEF Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server B 3 Hitachi Protection Platform S150
137. PATON S2100 TRAP MIB SEPATON S2100 TRAP MIB Copyright c 2011 by SEPATON Inc All rights reserved SNMP V2 Event MIB F 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SEPATON S2100 TRAP MIB DEFINITIONS BEGIN IMPORTS MODULE IDENTITY OBJECT TYPE NOTIFICATION TYPE TimeTicks FROM SNMPv2 SMI DisplayString DateAndTime FROM SNMPv2 TC enterprises FROM SNMPv2 SMI Counter32 FROM SNMPv2 SMI1 sepaton OBJECT IDENTIFIER enterprises 8082 sepatonProducts OBJECT IDENTIFIER sepaton 1 SepatonProductsTrapMIB MODULE IDENTITY LAST UPDATED 2009092500002 ORGANIZATION SEPATON Inc CONTACT INFO SEPATON Inc USA 1 508 490 7900 www sepaton com email svc_alerts vtl sepatoncrm com DESCRIPTION This MIB module is designed for use with s2100 VTL for formating SNMP traps REVISION 2009092500007 SNMP V2 Event MIB Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual DESCRIPTION Tnitial version of this MIB module sepatonProducts 1 s2100 OBJECT IDENTIFIER SepatonProductsTrapMIB 1 sepatonAlarmObject OBJECT IDENTIFIER sepatontTraps OBJECT IDENTIFIER sepatonChassisId OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 1024 MAX ACCESS not accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION The chassis Id of the 2100 platform sepatonAlarmObject 1 sepatonTrapSource OBJECT TYPE SYN
138. QL scripting best practices for use with the S Series system These best practices are associated with the CA2 delta differencing deduplication algorithm They do not reflect best practices when handling the recently developed advanced multistream database deduplication delta differencing deduplication algorithm Multistream database deduplication is represented by the S Series Console Manager with the algorithm term CA2 Multistream database deduplication improves the deduplication circumstances so that there is no longer a trade off between high performance and cost With multistream database deduplication you do not need to compromise backup speed by limiting data streams or multiplexing to achieve high deduplication ratios Multistream database deduplication allows you to deduplicate up to 16 simultaneous streams and allows for multiplexing database backup and restores Multistream database deduplication supports deduplication of very large databases for example 40 TB incremental backups Furthermore multistream database deduplication provides byte level differential deduplication in 8 KB blocks with no negative Impact on performance and capacity CA2 is designed to deal with databases that are large multiplexed multistriped or contain backup data that exhibits Similar behavior So you should upgrade to CA2 if your databases are Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server B 1 Hitachi Protection Platform
139. RITY CASE CONTACT lal Abbott Laborstones Abbott Park Abbott Park Illinois Urnassifisd amp Pi Products lt 4 _ _ List of Registered Products SERIAL HUMBER MODEL SERIES WERS ION HOSTHAME LOCATION s rt a a amp i ef xa n SPTN 15013 Hitech Protection Platform S Series 2500 7 3 HPP AP1A000L crneabbott com Abbott Park Mince F ig Michael Rugo i SPTN 15014 S Series 2500 7 3 HPPAP140011 onesbbott com Abbott Park Mlinots a Update Profile Password 13 Users Online L Account Notes CREATED EXPIRES CATEGORY SUMMARY Contacts lt __ List of Contacts NAME PHONE EMAIL LOCATION LAST LOGIN amp Anderson Tim 224 665 5667 timothy nderonGabbott com Abbott Park Mince NO HISTORY Pi amp Lavelle Miche 224 667 1195 Michael Tf lsvelle sbbott com Abbott Park Ilinois NO HISTORY od Figure 6 49 Account Management Screen The Account Management screen is divided in 4 main sections e Company Profile e Site List e Registered Product List e Contact List Customer Support Click Customer Support to create and manage Hitachi support cases 6 60 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Hitachi Data Systems Secara Mala Inasraliang AG Home gt Customer Support SUPPORT CASE MANAGEMENT INVENTORY amp LOGISTICS FRU Parts List Master Product List Strategic Stocking Locations RMA Search RMA Part Search Outstanding AMA s Incoming Retu
140. RNING System will reboot Any VTL operation i e backup restore etc in progress will not complete Figure 6 43 Maintenance Mode Warning Click Restart VTL to stop the Replication services Or click Cancel to exit without performing any action S Series VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Best Practices This section provides VTL and delta differencing deduplication technology best practices for installation and deployment of the VTL software and delta differencing deduplication technology It begins with a summary list of considerations details of the summary listings appear in subsequent subsections Maintaining Your 1500 6 33 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Best Practices Summary List Table 6 1 S Series Data Protection System Best Practices Hitachi recommends that you size cartridges no smaller than 50 GB and no larger than 300 GB with a recommended default size of 100 GB You should create cartridges that are large enough for the average backup set for your environment System and Cartridge Sizing Cartridges must be sized so that they are full for space reclamation and deduplication to work most effectively The most recent backup of each policy is maintained in a nondeduplicated form to maximize ingestion and recovery speed These optimized backups take space in the so called landing zone The worst case landing zone requirement for eac
141. RSmoke 1 19 2011 21 15 CA3 Full gams01 seqamsOi se DRSmoke_ 1 19 2011 21 12 CA3 Full E F G H J 2 00 GB Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files 2 00 GB Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files 2 00 GB Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files 2 00 GB Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files 2 00 GB Dedupe C NBU UNIX Files 1 98 GB 1 98 GB 1 98 GB 1 99 GB 1 98 GB 67 11 MB 33 55 MB 67 11 MB 33 55 MB 67 11 MB 20 03 MB 20 00 MB 20 12 MB 20 38 MB 20 33 MB Data Type Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio 1 ReferenceGroupX Process Code 30 155 qams01 s DATA bb 245 gamsO01 s DATA bb 59 245 gams01 s DATA bb 30 229 gams01 s DATA bb 245 qams01 s DATA bb 59 229 qams01 s DATA bb 125 gams01 s DATA bb 30 125 qams01 s DATA bb ll 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Figure D 2 Sample Cartridge to Backup Summary Report Policy Job Started Available Capacity Ratio Reference GroupX Process Code The name of the policy used for the backup backup data The S Series Data Protection platform time when the deduplication process was started Alg The delta differencing algorithm used for the backupset Type The type of backup full or incremental The deduplication ratio achieved for the backup set The Cartridge to Backup Summary report values are described in detail as follows Cartridge The ba
142. Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed 2 Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Targeti Tasks BEJI Dite ia Hanaga orca VTL Often LALL Gre iem found Pic End stot ite Clary ian Time Windews Dur ater Figure 3 19 Target Details Screen 3 Click Edit in the Tasks bar The Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings screen is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 27 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Slot Maps 3 28 asks GCiat Sitaps ict Avaiateity Windows EDIT LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGET CONFIGURATION Sutra ane to Figure 3 20 Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings Screen The LAN WAN replication target name is displayed along with the slot range and the availability window settings for this Target 4 This screen allows you to change the following settings Maximum Simultaneous Transfers Maximum number of the concurrent jobs set for that Replication Target Maximum TCP IP Bandwidth Maximum MB s transfer rate for the active LAN WAN Replication transfer i e Unlimited User Defined Compress Data Transfer Compression data settings i e Global Setting Yes No Password Password for this replication target NOTE Changing the password for the Replication Target will require you to Remanage the LAN WAN replication library
143. S Series system writes backup data to the physical storage present in the system The physical storage is addressed through storage LUNs created when the arrays are formatted for the system The S Series system makes these storage LUNs available for user data through storage pools or storage domains 1 Navigate to the Storage Pools Notifications screen System gt Chassis gt Storage Pools Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The Storage Pools Notification screen shows the error and event notifications for the storage pools in the system 2 To view the status of all storage pools expand the Storage Pools selection in the navigation tree by clicking the Plus sign beside that label The storage pools available for viewing are displayed 3 Click on the Storage Pool 1 from the expanded listing to view the Storage Pool Status screen Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console HITACHI a Inspire the Next Storage Pool 1 Health Status GENERAL StoragePoo 1 Status Status Parameters Notifications Navigation Figure 1 8 Storage Pool Status Screen The Storage Pool Status is graphically displayed under the storage pool icon Verify that the storage pool in the system is operating normally and displays the status Good The Storage Pool Status screen displays general information about the storage capacity provided by the storage LUNs associated with that
144. ST WO Mode s Avaliable Avaliable T Processing Mode d PP Processing Node 0 m Usa Ho Pubic IP Address Assigned seer a t aig i ha beams Cancel Prev Step Create 037 siorap Server Figure 4 14 OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Configure Nodes Screen Select a Master OST Node 7 Select one or more OST I O Nodes Click Create OST Storage Server The Create Storage Server button briefly changes to Please Wait and then to Create Disk Volume s The OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Configure Disk Volume s screen is displayed Figure 4 15 o OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Step 3 of 5 Configure Disk Volume s Storage Server HR_VTL successfully created Storage Server Name HR_VTL Storage Server IP Address 192 168 22 35 Username mich SRE Node0 SRE Noded Create Disk Volume s Figure 4 15 The OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Configure Disk Volume s Screen 9 Click Create Disk Volume s The Add Disk Volume screen is displayed Figure 4 16 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Adding a Disk Volume to the Storage Server Follow these steps to add a disk volume to the OST Storage Server OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Step d of 5 Add Disk volume TSK VOLUME Te hame Te nae Hay SELECT 4 3TORACE POOL A SoragePool_1 SELECT OPTIMIZED DUPLICATION PROPERTIES Decuniication Timed 4 mors Ensile Data Transi Compression
145. System gt Chassis Oversubscription default is 90 percent full If enabled email notifications are sent to the specified users Additional notifications are sent when the storage pool utilization rises to 95 and then 98 percent full The S Series system will reject all attempts to write data on the cartridges in this storage pool from the backup application at 98 percent full capacity SO you must erase unnecessary cartridges to free storage in the storage pool or add storage beforehand This ensures that no data is lost when the storage capacity of a storage pool is full NOTE All read operations will remain unaffected The cartridges that do not belong to this storage pool will also remain unaffected You cannot hot add storage while delta differencing deduplication technology is deduplicating data The S Series Console Manager provides an option to reclaim space after extra storage space has been created by erasing expired cartridges in the storage pool The S Series system will enable writes automatically if the storage pool capacity is below 90 percent full However the system also provides an option to enable all write operations manually if the storage pool capacity is greater than 90 percent full and less than 98 percent full The S Series system provides a Cartridge to Backup Summary report to help you identify the cartridges that are consuming more space and can be expired to create free storage space Refer to Appendix F for
146. T code The Power On Self Test POST code of the system BIOS is displayed All codes have two digits and each digit is four bit data in binary The Upper digit is displayed with LEDs 1 to 4 and the Lower digit is displayed with LEDs 5 to 8 If the Power On Self Test is successful LEDs 1 3 5 6 and 7 are turned on and the POST code is AE in this case Lower bit Figure A 3 POST code indicate ese The MAINTENANCE LEDs display the data of the POST code and Tip the event code unless the AC power source is turned off When the power of the system unit is turned on the display gets cleared Power consumption A rough estimate of the current power consumption of the system unit Watts is displayed The number of MAINTENANCE LEDs that are on indicate the power consumption as follows Table A 5 Power consumption indicate MAINTENANCE LED All Off Less than 200 W Only 1 is On 200 W or more and less than 250 W 1 and 2 are On 250 W or more and less than 300 W 1 through 3 are On 300 W or more and less than 350 W 1 through 8 are On 550 W or more A 6 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Power consumption values cited are for reference only Tip SERVICE switch Press the SERVICE switch to control which MAINTENANCE LED is displayed Whether the ON OFF status of this switch does not affect the operation of the system Every time you press the SERVIC
147. TAX DisplayString SIZE 0 1024 MAX ACCESS not accessible SNMP V2 Event MIB s2100 1 i ee OO 27 STATUS current DESCRIPTION The URL of the 52100 platform sepatonAlarmObject 2 sepatonEventSeverity OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 15 MAX ACCESS not accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION The event severity sepatonAlarmObject 3 sepatonFaultMessage OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 1024 MAX ACCESS not accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION The fault description sepatonAlarmObject 4 sepatonFaultComponent OBJECT TYPE SYNTAX DisplayString SIZE 0 1024 MAX ACCESS not accessible STATUS current DESCRIPTION The fault component sepatonAlarmObject 5 SNMP V2 Event MIB Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 2100 Enterprise Specific Traps YNNN NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN NN N N N equipmentError NOTIFICATION TYPE OBJECTS sepatonChassisId sepatonTrapSource sepatonEventSeverity sepatonFaultMessage sepatonFaultComponent STATUS current DESCRIPTION Notification of an equipment error in the sepaton S2100 platform This shows which component had failed its operational status fault type and severity level and the time it occurred from the MIB II restart time Because many of the failures need to be described in detail for troubleshooting an alarm log is written with supplemental information The trap and log are correlated bas
148. TTP User interface 0 i NTP Network Time Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol UDP SNMP SNMP Trap SNMP trap messages SNMP trap SNMP Trap SNMP trap messages E L SSL or Secure HTTPS for the user interface The following ports are used by tape image replication between sites Port Number TCP UDP Description 5570 configurable Replication traffic to remote node data SSH Replication control messages to remote node TCP HTTP User HTTP User interface e A SSL or Secure HTTPS ADAE e Ree the user interface The following ports are used by OST for the master server and the I O server Port Number TCP UDP Description 5562 mall OST traffic from the master server Siete Ose traffic from the I O server SSH hillside control messages to remote node HTTP User HTTP User interface HTTPS SSL or Secure HTTPS a eee are the user interface ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol S1500 Platform Public LAN Port Assignments Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual A A I R Auto Image Replication 4 19 destination disk volume 4 27 destination disk volume pair 4 31 destination storage server 4 25 disk volume pair 4 22 4 35 source disk volume 4 28 source storage server 4 23 storage server creation 4 23 Accessing the Capacity Manager 5 17 Add Storage 2 33 Add Remove Barcode Templates 2 25 defining the barcode template 2 21 2 30 Adding an Email Server 2 9 Ad
149. Type Renamed Successfully To change the data type name again click the Edit link and rename the data type Configuring the S1500 2 38 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Changing Policy State The Change Policy State feature provides the ability to enable and disable deduplication of data types for each supported backup application Additionally you can enable or disable deduplication of data sets for a particular backup application policy or management class rather than for all backup sets of that data type Enabling deduplication of a data type or policy management class has no effect on already backed up data sets only future backups are impacted by this change By Data Type If the deduplication process is disabled for certain data types the deduplication process skips them To enable or disable deduplication by data type for the selected backup application 1 Navigate to the Deduplication screen System gt Chassis gt Deduplication 2 Either select the Configuration link in the Task bar or navigate to the Configuration link in the navigation tree The Configuration screen is d ELIT bi LIP ape iurati Sa OE Merten Last Pag font 1 d LUN F p E a Go L BO g bir pi gt G ud D duplibalhin Akp d Stg 4 iL ata Sao 1 CRLF CN Cl Ll FIGURE 2 43 Configuration Screen The Configuration screen allows you to continue to the next and previous pages to see the additional list of su
150. Unknown and the S Series will learn additional ones as they arrive Every backup set that OST writes to the S Series has a header image which is effectively a text file that contains the policy type that was configured in the NetBackup application The S Series leverages the header image to identify it this providing better reporting and troubleshooting capabilities On upgrade the S Series reads all the existing images to convert what Is already on the system so identification is performed on the source system during replication You should perform the upgrade on the source system first Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Terminology List This terminology list provides the typical OST term and its associated Symantec OST API term TABLE 4 1 OST and Symantec Terminology Associations Symantec OpenStorage Initiative and APIs Storage Server OST platform software running on the Hitachi Protection Platform S Series platform to service requests Disk Volume Logical Storage Unit OST terminology equivalent to NetBackup s disk volume Disk Volume is displayed Disk Volume Pair Links the Source and Destination Disk Volumes together as a pair Plug in Hitachi Protection Platform software implemented in an OpenStorage API which must be installed on a media server Platform Hitachi Protection Platform S Series is displayed by NetBackup as a Storage Server Image Subset of backup
151. User Manual j ii o Create LAN WAN Replication Target CREATE LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGET LAM WH Roplicasion Target H r ALES Wy ANEA i hal r it bey i ug i awe Fueryiny Y ia i eleta oo e Figure 3 8 Create LAN WAN Replication Target Step 2 NOTE The window times are local so if the source and target S Series systems are in different time zones make sure the source and target windows overlap 11 Select the Add Availability Window Settings 12 Click Add The window refreshes and the availability window you just added is moved to the Current Availability Windows section Repeat steps 11 and 12 for as many availability windows as you need 13 You can also edit or delete any of the Current Availability Windows if required 14 Click Submit to create the replication target The LAN WAN replication target summary is displayed The replication target is now available in the navigation tree Managing the Source Replication Library 3 16 Managing the Source Replication Library allows you to link the target S Series system with the source S Series system using the IP address or the host name of the target system After the target S Series system is connected to the source S Series system and the desired target is selected and authenticated the available targets are displayed on the source system under Destination Libraries as Replication Library On the Source S Series system use Manage LAN W
152. Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Restore Media Restore Media allows you to restore the backups over the LAN WAN from the target system back to the source system The restore over LAN WAN can be initiated from the source device in the Restore Media task in LAN WAN Destination Library Slots where you can then select which target cartridges you want to restore back to their matching cartridges on the source S Series system The LAN WAN restore is a non deduplicated copy so that the entire contents of the cartridge are read back over the LAN WAN The resulting restored cartridges on the source S Series system will never deduplicate against any other cartridges on the device Since Restore Media is a non deduplicated copy you would be limited by the bandwidth of the replication link in terms of how much data can be restored and so generally you would restore the cartridges containing the last full backup and any incremental backups after this point The cartridges are copied one at a time and are scheduled for an automatic restore on the source system To Restore Media On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Click the library to expand the navigation tree to see the Slots and Mirror Copy Pools associated with this library 3 Click Slots Tasks Ae
153. Volumes e Cartridges The Capacity Manager allows you to switch to different views using the navigation tree The disk volume view is only available if you have the Hitachi OpenStorage OST plug in installed on your S Series system If you do not have OpenStorage OST plug in installed the Disk Volumes link will not be displayed under Capacity in the navigation tree The Statistical Graph provides information for the component s overall storage utilization The Storage Details table provides a detailed storage utilization listing of the selected component 5 17 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual System Capacity View The System Capacity screen presents a summary of the system s overall storage capacity utilization The Statistical Graph on the System Capacity view displays the Logical Used and Available capacity in your S Series system The System Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 1 System Capacity Table Storage Pool View System Capacity Table Total Physical Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the Capacity system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool Reserved for The space required for system overhead and metadata System Storage Pool 1 or the FireSafe can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to delta differencing deduplication metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity avai
154. When all selections have been made click Add to add the user and respective alert settings to the list of added users The following screen is displayed Tats Mall Sener Seng 0 Reporte 0 SNMP See O Dowibad SNMP ME Notifications Setup Help cat asi thas ine FIGURE 2 5 Notifications Setup List of Added Users 5 The list of users to receive email alerts is displayed 6 Optional If you have already set up your mail server test each address by clicking on the checkbox beside that email address and then click Test Email If the email server is properly configured and the email address is valid a success message Is displayed NOTE You must configure an email server for users to be able to receive email alerts and reports from the S Series system See Setting Up a Mail Server on page 2 9 for additional information Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring Notifications for Hitachi Technical Support For the Hitachi Technical Support team to be able to view and evaluate alerts 24 7 you must follow these steps and enter the exact fields cited 1 Navigate to the Notifications Setup screen by clicking on the Notifications tab and selecting Notifications Setup in the Tasks bar 2 Click Add to configure email alerts for the Hitachi Technical Support team 3 For the Hitachi Technical Support team to receive event and error alerts specify the following a Enter the email addre
155. Windows 2008 R2 AMD64 exe which is Binary File 6 4 MB from https 192 168 13 176 Would you like to save this file gt Ee si hodic i gi She Porta i ed Harclerareg i Figure 4 2 OST Plug In Installation Save this File Pop Up1 3 Save the selected OST Plug in to a local system 4 Copy the Plug in file to your NetBackup media server 4 2 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Installing the Solaris Package Follow these steps to install the Hitachi Protection Platform OST Plug in for Solaris 1 Check to see if the Hitachi Protection Platform OST is installed and get the package name as follows pkginfo grep i HDSHPPS application HDSHPPS OST HDS HPP S OST plugin 2 Run the following commands to install the package 3 cp HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Solaris SPARC64 5 10 pkg tgz 4 gunzip HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Solaris SPARC64 5 10 pkg gz pkgadd d HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Solaris SPARC64 5 10 pkg The following packages are available 1 HDSHPPS OST HDS HPP S OST plugin lt version gt Select package s you wish to process or all to process all packages default all q lt enter gt End user license agreement displayed here Do you agree to the above license terms yes or no yes Executing checkinstall script Processing package information Processing system information 1 package path
156. a Deak Viduenes Splet Source Orsk Volume Storage Sen 1 a ENTER DESTINATION STORAGE STAVER r fc 128 it zaj 7 T SPLPCT HEPMLECATHA PROPERTIES Figure 4 45 Destination Disk Volume Pair Screen e Select the Destination Disk Volume f Enable the Replication Properties Online and Compression and provide a Deduplication Timeout Online allows you to enable the processing node for replication or temporarily disable it Compression is a combination of hardware and software compression The Deduplication Timeout is the time after which the processing node will transmit the data to the Source system You can set this timeout to zero 0 hours to transmit the data to the Source system immediately Default is 48 hours g Click Create The Disk Volume Pair Created Successfully screen is displayed Enaid Collapse Agtresh Tasks O Configure Rephcaton Modes Croale Disk Volume Pas Oelole Dist Dink Wium Pair enema Succes tally 3 E Chassis papred sangate ccmm H g Capac iry E Deio Mama SOurte hak Volume Deningion Disk Volume Toure HAA Saree Deslinaion Slog Saar Compression ae OST 1 aaia Aei 14 17 42 At 3 Ta A OST Magan Pirimia ed n Ga Capsit Volursetl Name Source Chak Volume Destination Disk Volume Source Storage Demer Destination Slorage Serve ae BE Herd ao veh AO Value 199 THR 11 4 12 165 11 ie SAE Heke A Hip SE Mee ff d LUH agp Figure 4 46 Disk Volume Pair Created Successfully Screen You h
157. after storing data to a sequential access storage pool any mount points held by the session will not be released Default is No Mount Retention Set the Mount Retention parameter to 5 which then ejects a cartridge after five minutes MOUNT RETENTION 5 The current TSM implementation no longer requires an eject event between backups to determine backup boundaries however delta differencing deduplication still requires a cartridge to be ejected for deduplication to Maintaining Your 1500 6 47 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual occur A setting of five minutes gives TSM a reasonable amount of time to reuse the same cartridge but after five minutes idle time the cartridge now becomes available for deduplication With delta differencing deduplication HDS recommends you set MOUNT RETENTION to five minutes but it is not required Default is 60 minutes Relabelscratch TSM V5 5 2 has a feature that allows scratch tapes to be automatically relabeled This eliminates the need for the TSM administrator to manually relabel scratch cartridges to reclaim space The following link provides a description of the new feature http www 01 ibm com support docview wss rs 1019 amp context SSSQWC amp context SSGSG7 amp gql relabel scra tch tapes amp u1ld swg21326655 amp loc en US amp cs utf 8 amp lang en When defining a virtual library for TSM the following two entries should be added to the library definitions The following
158. age Manager TSM EMC NetWorker and HP Data Protector 3 40 If disk storage units NetBackup disk storage pools TSM or advanced file types NetWorker are used and the data is required in a Disaster Recovery DR scenario the data should be migrated to the S Series system so that it can be replicated The NetBackup catalog TSM database or NetWorker client file index should back up to the S Series system and be replicated by tape image replication as described earlier TSM Device configuration and volume history files need to be transferred to a server that is accessible at the DR site When you create the cartridges on the target create them in the same order as on the source if using multiple bar code prefixes In most cases for new configurations and often for existing configurations this allows for the cartridge on the source and target to reside in the same virtual tape slot element NetBackup and TSM use this in the volume history file and NetWorker uses the slot element in the auto changer configuration Each creates a synchronized library inventory when the backup application starts reducing the need for a library audit inventory Size the WAN links and target system to ensure that all off site data can be replicated Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual e Only data written to the S Series system after the Tape Image Replication Mirror Copy Pool is
159. aia Decdupiostion H ie DET eo Disk volumes ge Processing Modes T aj LUH Mapping z g Libraries H qp Horsgs Pools j Horags LUNs R Cartridges H ge Desk Arrays Figure 6 17 Library Status Screen 3 Click Edit Library in the Tasks bar The Edit Library wizard is displayed LIBRARY PARAMETERS Enter the desired library parameter values Library Name Library_0 Maximum Slots 30 60000 2000 Maximum Ports 1 4000 24 Maximum Drives 2 1024 256 Help Cancel Figure 6 18 Edit Library Step 1 4 The S Series system allows you to change the following library parameters Maximum Slots Enter the maximum number of slots for the library For libraries used by tape image replication make sure that the maximum number of slots for the library is greater than or equal to the range of slots defined for replication Maximum Ports Enter the maximum number of ports for the library Maximum Drives Enter the maximum number of drives that can be associated with the library Click Next Step to confirm the change or Cancel to return to the Library Summary screen Maintaining Your S1500 6 19 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 5 Click Yes to confirm the change Click No or Cancel to return to the Library Summary screen 6 If you clicked Yes the library parameters are changed and a success message Is displayed GENERAL PROPERTIES Figure 6 19 Edit Library Step 3 7 C
160. al View Settings 1 8 Optimization performance and tuning 6 43 Oracle RMAN script integration 6 44 Oracle RMAN Scripting Best Practices B 1 consistent backup streams B 4 finding the best matches B 4 Oracle RMAN multiplexing B 4 RMAN configuration settings B 3 OST ports H 2 Oversubscription 2 16 2 22 2 31 set the storage capacity alert parameter 2 17 Oversubscription Parameters 5 4 P Partially Reclaimed 5 32 Pending Reclamation 5 32 Performance and Tuning optimization 6 43 Placing the Destination Library in an Offline and Online Status 3 22 Planning and Sizing sizing and planning 6 37 Policy 2 39 Port Mapping tape drives 2 24 ports OST H 2 replication H 2 prerequisites for using tape drive replication 3 9 Providing a Hostname Alias 6 2 R Reclaim Space 2 36 Refresh Task 5 6 Relabeling Cartridges used capacity 6 37 Relabelscratch TSM 6 48 Remove an Unconnected Host 6 3 Remove Hosts 6 3 Rename Hosts 6 3 Replication creating mirror copy pools 3 17 delays troubleshooting 5 46 rescheduled troubleshooting 5 46 I ndex 5 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual replication not starting troubleshooting 5 47 Replication Concepts active S2100 platform 3 6 availability window 3 9 destination or replication libraries 3 7 LAN WAN replication targets 3 7 mirror copy pool 3 8 passive S2100 platform 3 6 policy window 3 8 slots 3 8 source 3 6 source 2100 platform 3 6 target 3 7 target S2100 platform 3 6 Repli
161. al size of the backup set in GB deduplication ratio achieved amount of storage space saved after the deduplication process was initiated percentage of space reclaimed amount of data that was unprocessed by the deduplication process amount of time in seconds that the deduplication process required amount of data per unit of time that it took to deduplicate the data MB sec the name of the backup set that this backup set was compared against during deduplication GroupX which is the mount point that distinguishes this backup from others with the same policy and host and an internal Hitachi process code In some instances the report cites backup application catalogs which is a reference to the database For example a TSM catalog reference is referring to the TSM database The Backupset Summary reports are designed for individuals with diagnostic and troubleshooting responsibilities This will help you to get detailed information of each backup set Figure D 3 shows a sample Backup Summary report A B E D E F G H J K L 1 Report Type Backup Summary 2 Report Completed Time Tue Jun 14 11 32 28 EDT 2011 3 Report Frequency One time only 4 Hostname ds3 qa1 sepaton com 5 Chassis Serial Number 12345 6 Revision Tag MAINLINE6 261 7 8 Denotes a column with estimated values 9 Backup Name Client Policy Job Started Alg Type Status DataType Complete Logical Size GB Physical Size GB Dedupe Ratio 10 ds3 7h i1 31250 ds3
162. an be set daily 24 hours weekly and monthly The target is available to receive data as defined in the availability window settings The window times are local if source and target systems are on different time zones make sure that the availability and policy windows overlap Prerequisites for Using Tape I mage Replication The basic requirements for using tape image replication are e Bidirectional replication between most systems Is Supported Open a Customer Support case by visiting the HPP support portal located at https deltaview Sepaton com or call 1 866 657 8400 e Delta differencing deduplication technology and tape image replication system licenses Refer to the section Licensing Tape Image Replication on page 3 10 for licensing details e An operational TCP IP network with adequate capacity connecting the S Series systems e Open the following firewall ports at each site port 5570 default for data replication and port 22 SSH port for replication control messages to the remote node e Open the following Web browser ports port 80 HTTP and port 443 HTTPS e The target S Series system requires enough storage space to accommodate data transfers from the source S Series system Open a Customer Support case by visiting the HPP support portal located at https deltaview Sepaton com or call 1 866 657 8400 to assist you in sizing this effort e All processing nodes must have an IP address net mask pr
163. an the standard TapeO to be used such as Tape2147483646 or tape4801101 For Windows Tape Drive Persistence see http support microsoft com kb 873337 For IBM LTO driver based Tape Drive Persistence see the following document tp ftp software ibm com storage devdrvr Doc IBM_Tape_Driver_IUG pdf Use Windows Device Manager and or inquire p to check for persistent named device names If using IBM LTO drivers use non exclusive driver mode See EMC Knowledge Base esg92364 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Linux Device Configuration e Configure stinit def to enable variable block size This requires the st mt package to be installed and etc stinit def to be configured See the Linux man page for configuration details and examples Hitachi recommends setting stinit to load via an init file etc re local on Redhat for instance to ensure it is loaded properly e NetWorker supports Linux udef device naming See the EMC white paper Persistent Binding and udef Changes for EMC NetWorker document h5795 available on powerlink emc com for details UNI X Device Configuration e AIX Ensure that variable block mode is enabled AIX does not have a persistent naming option although the ODM database generally tracks device links properly across reboots e Solaris Ensure that the tape drive is supported in the Kernel This is most easily done by running strings kernel d
164. ancel Figure 4 20 OST Edit Storage Server Nodes Screen Figure 4 21 Modify the Master OST Node as appropriate The Edit OST Nodes Successfully screen is displayed Tasks Edit Credentials Edit Node Configuration Edit Disk Volume Configuration Delete Storage Sery OST Nodes updated successfully CONFIGURATION OF OST HODES Master Node SRE Node 192 168 22 45 HR VTL Status I O Nodes Degraded Critical Failed Missing a DISK VOLUMES Credentials 3 Otherwise select the Disk Volumes that you want to delete and click Delete Delete Disk Volume Follow these steps to remove a Disk Volume from the S Series platform 1 Select Delete Disk Volume from the Tasks list The Delete Disk Volume Wizard is displayed Figure 4 22 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 17 Replication User Guide Are you sure you want to delete Disk_Vol_2 Yes Binan Cancel Figure 4 22 Delete OST Disk Volume Wizard 1 2 Click Yes to delete the Disk Volume The Delete Disk Volume Please Wait screen is displayed Figure 4 23 Please wait while Storage_Server_2 is being deleted Mo Cancel Figure 4 23 Delete Storage Server Please Wait Screen After a few seconds the storage server is deleted and the Storage Server deleted successfully screen is displayed Figure 4 24 Storage Server deleted successfully Click Finish or wait for the change to appear in the tree Figure 4 24 Storage Server
165. and A I R Replication User Guide Destination Disk Volume Pair Next you will configure the cross replication Disk Volume Pair for the Destination Storage Server 6 Go to the Destination OST Storage Server and select the OST A I R replication listing in the navigation tree and click Create Disk Volume Pair from the Tasks list System gt Status gt Chassis gt OST gt A R Create Disk Volume Pair The Create Disk Volume Pair screen is displayed 0 Create Disk Volume Pair Select source Desk Volume oage Samar ofage Pood a Viner t Vodurtent4 Vine EtormyePonl_1 ENTER DESTINATION STORAGE SERVER Sioape Server iP oy TER 11 55 Select Destination Disk Volume Storage Server Storage Pool 1 Capel t viumeni Capeli SloragePool_1 SELECT REPLICATION PROPERTIES Onlie Figure 4 44 Create Disk Volume Pair Screen on Destination Processing Node a Name the Replication Pair Capecod Vineyard b Select the radio button for the Source Disk Volume c Provide the IP Address for a Destination Storage Server 192 168 11 55 A Destination Storage Server dialog is displayed requesting login credentials Authentication All fields are required Username bupport Password seseoe ct we d Enter the Destination Storage Server login credentials and click Submit Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 31 Replication User Guide Create Disk Volume Pair Bakici Brem
166. annel host port settings The Processing Ports screen is displayed Troubleshooting C 6 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Storage LUNs Emad Colapse Reres Taeks Fik Preterred Pains H Chassis or seg2 sepaion com Biy eatre i t w S Oe aM EE LP Ha AAAA LUH Eisius Preterted Fais Hon Preferred Feth Jamaa T aa ooo LUH Rindus Preerred Pains Hon Preterned Path Figure C 10 Processing Ports If the Fibre Channel host port is configured for the arbitrated loop mode TOPOLOGY Loop either specify a hard ALPA value in the range of 0 through 125 or 1 for a dynamically assigned ALPA for the Loop ID value If the Fibre Channel host port is not in the arbitrated loop mode the S Series system ignores this parameter value To configure the topology mode select the appropriate value from the Topology drop down menu AUTO port topology is automatically determined Loop arbitrated loop mode Fabric fabric mode To configure the port speed select the appropriate value from the Link Speed drop down menu AUTO automatically negotiate the speed 1 1 Gb second 2 2 Gb second 4 4 Gb second Click Apply Settings to save the changes Restart the VTL for the new port settings to take effect See Restarting the VTL on page 6 28 Troubleshooting Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 1500 Platform Reports The S Series system has powerful reporting ca
167. anual Seeding Initial Data on S Series Replication Systems Seeding is the process of creating your initial complete mirror of a set of backup data at the secondary site remote data center Seeding is a necessary starting point for any data recovery operation and the method by which you set up seeding initial data depends on how much time you have to get your tape image replication system operational It s important to note that replication applies only to backups created after tape image replication is activated licensed If you have been accumulating data on an S Series system with or without delta differencing deduplication technology for some time before upgrading to tape image replication only subsequent backups that is beginning with the next set of backups are replicated They are transmitted without deduplication because the target system has no backups to deduplicate against This is why it is important to determine how you are going to seed the target system to minimize the amount of data replicated during the initial replication Tape image replication requires the virtual tape cartridges and their metadata to be identical on both the source and the target S Series systems before replication can be used There are two ways to implement this e Copy the cartridges from the source to the target intact over the network e Copy the cartridges to physical tape move the physical tapes to the remote site and restore t
168. appliance This defines the following 1 Start and end Slot 2 Library on the source appliance from where the data is to be automatically replicated 3 Policy such as priority of replication and policy window details for synchronizing the source and the target appliance Figure 3 1 S Series System Setup for Replication Replication is an automated process that after the initial configuration requires no human intervention However you can manipulate replication policies for optimization of network bandwidth or to perform maintenance tasks Following are the steps required to set up the S Series system for replication Step 1 On the target S Series system create a library and cartridges to receive replication data On the source S Series system create a library that exactly matches the target library Step 2 Create a target with a unique name and password and assigning the library in Step 1 to it Define the start and the end slot in this library maximum number of simultaneous transfers and maximum TCP IP bandwidth to receive replication data Once you have created the target it appears in the tape image replication tab under LAN WAN Replication Targets Step 3 Next reference the replication target on the source system The source system identifies the target created in Step 2 using the IP address of the target system target name and target library Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 3 Hitachi P
169. application has completed using the cartridges and the system is now generating deduplication instructions Migration cannot occur at this time Pending The cartridges are ready to be mirrored but there are deduplication dependencies on other cartridges that have not yet completely mirrored The cartridges are ready to be mirrored and are waiting for resources to become available The mirror operation for the cartridges has been paused Waiting for The cartridges are not in a mirroring window policy window The mirroring operation for the cartridges is in progress Mirror Complete No mirroring activity is in progress Waiting for first The cartridges have been marked for deduplicated replication backup and are waiting for the first backup data Initializing This cartridges are initializing Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual The following table provides information about various target copy pool States Table 5 16 Target Copy Pool States Target Copy Pool State Description Mirror Complete No mirroring activity is in progress Mirror Active Data transfer mirror or restore and or unpack is in progress Each echo copy pool and target copy pool states are the hot link to view the list of cartridges that are currently in that state Click on any of the echo copy pool state or target copy pool state to display the summary of cartridges in that state The Summary screens provide the li
170. are errors occur Press the POWER switch to turn the system unit on and off a e You can forcibly turn off the system unit if you press the power switch continuously for four seconds or more eo E ee in the SERVICE switch to turn the SERVICE LED on and Press this button to perform hard reset restart on the RESET switch system unit You can use a ballpoint pen to press the switch FUNCTION switch S O FUNCTION switch Not applicable Do not press this switch A 4 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual MAI NTENANCE LEDs MAINTENANCE LEDs can display the event code the POST code Or power consumption and you can select what to display on it by using the SERVICE switch A combination of ON OFF selections of MODEO LED MODE1 LED and the SERVICE LED determines what is currently displayed and what the MAINTENANCE LEDs indicate as follows Table A 3 What the MAINTENANCE LEDs Indicate SERVICE MODEO MODE1 Result Off Off Off Event code On Off On POST code Off On On Power consumption Event code The operation status of the system unit is displayed Under normal operation all LEDs are OFF If an error occurs the LED corresponding to the component where the error occurred is turned on Table A 4 Event codes LED ooo fe a ene C C ooo e S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 5 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual POS
171. ase select a setup type Complete Figure 5 8 Installation Setup Screen Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Select the Complete installation option then click Next The Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed 5 10 ie MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation Click Install to begin the installation Click Back ta review or change any of your installation settings Click Cancel to exit the utility Figure 5 9 Ready to Install Screen 9 Click Install fi MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard f Installing MegaRAID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 i i The program Features you selected are being installed i l Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs MegaRAID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 This may take several minutes Status Updating component registration Cancel Figure 5 10 Installation Screen The software is installed and upon completion the InstallShield Wizard Completed screen is displayed 5 11 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual i MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed Setup has Finished installing MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed MegaR AIC Storage Manager v9 00 0100
172. asure is disabled by default however once enabled all newly created cartridges are enabled for secure erasure on a disk volume basis When a secure erasure cartridge is deleted from the system it will go through the standard shredding algorithm This feature provides the ability to audit data destruction for OST data Additionally secure erasure meets the National Institute of Standards and Technology 800 88 standard for data destruction Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R 4 33 Replication User Guide OST Deduplication Control This feature allows for enabling and disabling deduplication for individual disk volumes which when disabled provide for a logical storage unit with no deduplication This feature is enabled by default on upgrade to V6 3 When disabled no information on new ingest Is passed to delta differencing deduplication technology The data can be used as source data for replication however there are no deduplication instructions Some customers consider deduplication as tampering with the data This feature allows those customers to segregate sensitive data into a logical storage unit with deduplication disabled OST Identifying the Backup Agent 4 34 The S Series identifies ingest as buapp OST buagent newbuapp for example Unix Files MS SQL Server etc The application agent pairs are learned so when you initialize a new OST system in the Console Manager you will only see one entry for OST
173. at exist in the selected view The right dialog box contains the devices that the report will include Use the arrow buttons to move devices to or from the right box You can select multiple devices by using Ctrl click 3 Enter the number of days for which you want to view the job history 4 Select the location type 5 Click Update Monitoring Your 1500 5 44 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Exporting All Data or Export Displayed Data To export the CSV data click Export All Data on the Tasks bar in the J ob History screen The Export Data screen is displayed To export the displayed J ob History data click Export Displayed Data on the J ob History screen Tasks bar A dialog box prompts you to open or save the zip file Select Open to view the export data or Save to save the file to your hard disk J ob History Table and Performance Graph Job History screen displays the Replication Job History table and Performance Graph g Ds ES DE e Te Se peA a eee ee ee eae a M ee Oe A A A A A Dia ad ia dhania Fahrin oi tahia it hhii Figure 5 40 Job History Table and Performance Graph The Job History table displays these details about a replication job NOTE The amount of used capacity on cartridges can be different between the source and target after performing remote replication This happens due to factors such as hardware and software compression or space reclamation The performance graph displayed in the repl
174. ate to the SNMP Setup screen by clicking on the Notifications tab and selecting SNMP Setup in the Tasks bar FIGURE 2 9 SNMP Setup Screen 2 3 4 Enter the hostname for the management station that processes traps from the S Series system Enter the community string value to be passed with the Management Station s set and get commands This is typically public Specify the source of the notifications from the Event Source listing All Send notifications from all the sources Processing Node Disk Arrays delta differencing deduplication technology and Replication Processing Node Send notifications from processing node Disk Arrays Send notifications from Disk Arrays Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Send notifications from delta differencing deduplication technology Replication Send notifications from Replication Configuring the S1500 2 14 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual NOTE The event source delta differencing deduplication technology and Replication are only available when you have delta differencing deduplication technology and tape image replication licensed on your S Series system 5 Select the SNMP trap version from the listings 1 For devices configured to use SNMP Version 1 2c For devices configured to use SNMP Version 2c 6 Select the Severity type from the listings All Send all alerts errors and warnings Errors Send only errors Warnings Send only war
175. atform The Delta differencing deduplication Summary and Backup Reports screens display the deduplication performance and capacity information of your S Series system NOTE The screens shown in this section may not appear identical to those for your S Series Console Manager as each S Series configuration displays your system s particular information Monitoring Your 1500 5 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual General Console Manager I nformation The Login screen appears when you launch the S Series system s Console Manager in a browser window Upon entry of a valid login and password the Console Manager displays the Dashboard screen There are two user types Administrator The administrator has full authority to set and change parameter values as appropriate on any of the screens The administrator can change the password value for either user type through the Edit Accounts screen User A user can only view the S Series Console Manager and generate a support ticket and support history in order to assist with the troubleshooting behavior A user cannot change any editable parameters on any of the screens Dashboard Screen The Dashboard6 screen is the primary S Series Console Manager display Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console HITACHI Inspire the Next Dashboard System Capacity last Logir ODIAS 15325 Conisot security s minisirsior F lesi login dade amd Gene ls incorrect Overall Hea
176. ation library it cannot communicate with the source An unmanaged destination library is a library that is not recognized by and using Replication This allows you to temporarily suspend replication jobs from the destination library defined on the source S Series system NOTE You can only select one library to unmanage at a time To unmanage additional libraries repeat the procedure for each library to unmanage To unmanage a library On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 21 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 2 Select the library that you want to unmanage from the navigation tree or from the list of libraries displayed on the LAN WAN Replication Library Summary screen 3 Click Unmanage Library in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click OK to confirm A success dialog appears and the screen refreshes The unmanaged library is no longer available in the navigation tree The unmanaged library can be managed again using the Manage LAN WAN Replication Library taSk on the Tasks bar Placing the Destination Library into an Offline and Online Status Tape image replication requires one or more dedicated destination libraries to be connected to the S Series system The S Series system s replication feature allows the source sys
177. ave completed the cross replication between the two processing nodes and now you must make parallel configuration changes to your NetBackup software that support the above environment 4 32 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R Replication User Guide Granular Restore Granular Restore Technology GRT enables users to restore single files or folders from a backup without restoring the entire backup These partial restores are significantly faster allowing customers to recover from accidental file deletions or virus infections more quickly Granular Restore for Exchange and SharePoint backups are supported on NetBackup 7 5 and later NetBackup Accelerator NetBackup 7 5 introduced a client side data reduction feature called NetBackup Accelerator that sends only changed data to the media server Accelerator requires a NetBackup Data Protection Optimization Option license Accelerator supports file level back ups on Windows UNIX and Linux systems On Windows systems it can leverage the NTFS change journal for faster identification of changed files To activate NetBackup OST Accelerator you must add the NetBackup mappings file to the default locations Windows C Program Files VERITAS You can obtain the mappings files from http www symantec com docs TECH188178 UNIX Linux usr openv You can obtain the mappings files from UNIX Linux http www symantec com docs TECH188177 OST Secure Erasure Secure er
178. ayed il OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Sepi oS Storage Server Home and Credentials CREATE OS STORAGE SERVER Serer Mame OST STORAGE SERVER CREDENTIALS Emilem Dale and Time DATAA 14113 EST Figure 4 27 Source Storage Server Name and Credentials Screen a Enter an OST Storage Server Name and the OST Storage Server Credentials including Username Password and Confirm Password Passwords must be at least 14 characters in length b Click Next Step The OST Configure Nodes for the Source Storage Server screen is displayed ost Storage Server Creation ad Siep 2 of S Configure Hodes SFLECT OST MASTER HONE SELECT OST HO MODFS Sled in SAF Node aw lhe GET Waster Made Gelid one ar mae SAF Nod Availabe SRE Avisilalile 7E Node 0 fH SRE Node i SRE Node 1 lz SHE Node 1 Im Lies No Pubic IF Assigned Mo Public IF assigned Cancel Prev step Create Storage Server System Dale and Tien OR 17 4113 EST Figure 4 28 OST Configure Nodes for the Source Storage Server Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R 4 23 Replication User Guide c Click one of the available OST Master processing node listings and one or more of the available OST I O Node listings d Click Create Storage Server for the Source server The wizard returns the message Storage Server lt Server Name gt successfully created Details for the Source Storage Server are also displayed Source Dis
179. backup process as described below Many to One In this scenario backups are performed regularly to one or more central S Series system s from several remote sites The remote offices have smaller S Series systems consolidating data into an enterprise S Series system Should data recovery be necessary the remote system could restore the cartridges from the central S Series system Data Center Figure 3 2 Many to One Model Active Passive In this scenario one S Series system supports daily backups and restores of data This is the active site A second S Series system is available in another location and its function is to receive replicated cartridges from the active site system This second S Series system is the passive site Should data recovery be necessary the passive site system could be connected to take over the for the failed site Active Passive models can be deployed as one to one topology or one to many topology Data Center Remote y 4 Office Figure 3 3 Active Passive Model Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Active Active In this scenario both S Series systems support daily backups and restores of data at separate data centers Both S Series systems replicate cartridges to each other Should data recovery be necessary for any of the systems the second system takes over for the failed site Active Active models are typically deploy
180. brary or the disk volume Viewing Additional Information About a Library or Disk Volume 5 21 To view additional capacity information about a Library or Disk Volume click the Library Disk Volume name field on the Storage Pool x Capacity screen Figure 5 21 The Library Capacity view is displayed This screen displays capacity information for this Library or Disk Volume a graphical representation showing the Logical Used and Available storage capacity If there are cartridges in this library a table listing the cartridge capacity information is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Library_0 Capacity Per PAA Pie 17 5 15 0 17 5 100 Fol P Bo j Figure 5 22 Library Capacity Screen The Library Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 5 Library Capacity Table Library Capacity Table Allocated Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the Capacity product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data in the Library currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the Library used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available in the Library for Capacity additional backup data Thi
181. can be aggregated for high throughput Each Storage Server may offer Storage Volumes from either a common storage pool or from different pools if you need to support multiple companies or subsidiaries in a multitenancy arrangement Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Data Erasure Data erasure is a licensed feature of S Series Data Protection platform that provides guaranteed erasure of information on virtual tape cartridges Data erasure is implemented as an optional step in the Delete Cartridge menu of the Hitachi Console Manager This option enables you to schedule all or selected cartridges for a total data overwrite to ensure that no data can be retrieved from tape cartridges The erasure procedure conforms to the NIST 800 88 standard that is used in many government agencies and regulated industries to ensure the complete destruction of sensitive data before storage media are reused or discarded Data erasure corresponds to the act of shredding the cartridge to make sure no information is retrievable from it Hitachi Protection Platform Support Portal The HPP support portal is your online self service interface with Hitachi Customer Service The HPP support portal provides an interactive customer experience by leveraging a host of case management and self help tools The portal provides real time visibility throughout the life cycle of your Support case so that you know t
182. cation Configuration creating LAN WAN replication targets 3 14 global LAN WAN replication settings 3 13 managing source replication 3 16 Replication Job History Report D 12 description D 4 D 7 D 10 D 12 sample replication job history report D 12 Replication Monitoring and Reporting configuring job reporting 5 43 current jobs 5 41 job history 5 44 pause resume and cancel jobs 5 42 replication ports H 2 Replication Use Models active active 3 6 active passive 3 5 many to one 3 5 Report Setup 2 9 adding users to receive reports 2 11 changing the report settings 2 12 deleting a user from the report list 2 12 2 13 format 2 11 frequency 2 12 report types 2 10 Reporting best practices 6 52 Reports cartridge to backup summary report 2 10 D 2 replication job history report D 12 sample system capacity reports D 1 system capacity report 2 10 system capacity reports D 1 Tape Drive Replication Job History Report 2 10 restart all processing nodes 6 30 restart all processing nodes task system maintenance restart all processing nodes 6 30 Restart Broken Mirror 3 26 Restart Console Manager and GUI 6 29 System Maintenance 6 29 Restart Replication Services 6 32 I ndex 6 Restart VTL 6 28 Restarting the Console Manager 6 29 Restore Config link 6 24 Restore Config wizard 6 24 Restore Configuration 6 23 Restore Media 3 23 Restoring configuration settings 6 24 RMAN Configuration Settings B 3 S S2100 Platform Health 5 4 Save
183. ce Name IP Address Gateway Address Net Mask SRE Noded bondt 192 168 20 236 FIGURE 2 3 Network Settings Wizard 10 GbE NIC Network aes 192 168 10 1 5 255 240 0 2 Enter the IP Address Gateway Address and Net Mask value for the 10 GbE NIC port on your processing node x The Device Name is assigned automatically 3 Click Apply Editing Accounts There are two user types supported by the Console Manager Administrator The administrator has full Console Manager privileges and can edit system parameters and make changes to virtual devices The default login information for the administrator is User name administrator Password admin User The user can only monitor the S Series system and generate a support ticket in order to assist with troubleshooting The user cannot modify system parameters and cannot add edit or delete virtual devices The default login information for a user Is User name user Password guest Changing the Password 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Click Edit Accounts in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The Edit Accounts screen Is displayed A aE FIGURE 2 4 Edit Accounts Screen Enter the current password for the user type you intend to change Enter the new password Confirm the new password by retyping it Click Apply Settings NOW Bw Click Next to confirm the change Otherwise click Cancel NOTE Changing the password restarts the Console Manager af
184. ch ENDOPER TRUE OPERATION BACKUP OBJECTTYPE FILE OBJECTNAME Test db file2 DATABASE Test Database FILEGROUP PRIMARY SQLHOST SQL 1 NBSERVER SQL 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 0 BLOCKSIZE 7 POLICY test database mssql file bch ENDOPER TRUE OPERATION BACKUP OBJECTTYPE FILE OBJECTNAME Test db fg1 DATABASE Test Database FILEGROUP Test DB_ FG SOLHOST SOLS NBSERVER SQL 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 0 BLOCKSIZE 7 POLICY test database mssql file bch ENDOPER TRUE OPERATION BACKUP OBJECTTYPE FILE OBJECTNAME Test db fg2 DATABASE Test Database FILEGROUP Test DB EG SOLHOST SOnh L NBSERVER SQL 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 0 BLOCKSIZE 7 POLICY test database mssql file bch ENDOPER TRUE OPERATION BACKUP DATABASE Test Database OBJECTTYPE TRXLOG SQLHOST SQL 1 SQLINSTANCE SQL 1 BLOCKSIZE 7 NBSERVER SQL 1 POLICY test database mssql file bch ENDOPER TRUE 8 KKK KK RK KK RK RR RK RK RR RK KK Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual B 11 SQL Server with Multiple Streams B 12 Multiple streams from a given data file will reduce delta differencing deduplication effectiveness This is important because some database backups create multiple savestreams per database file Disabling this feature Is critical when using delta differencing deduplication except for TSM or OST Note that multiple backup sets from a database is not an issue o
185. chnology associates the source system with a target system It ensures that the replicated data Is kept identical including contents barcodes and cartridge types Mirroring is an S Series system feature and it is performed without the backup application s knowledge You can configure the Hitachi replication solution to operate in one of two modes e Tape image replication deduplication mode e Tape image replication nondeduplication mode Tape image replication deduplication mode Is a high performance replication solution that leverages delta differencing deduplication technology enabling you to replicate more data faster by transferring only the changes between backups Tape image replication nondeduplication mode copies data byte for byte from the source cartridge to a cartridge on the target system Tape image replication configuration requires e Configuring global LAN WAN replication settings e Creating LAN WAN replication targets e Managing the source replication library NOTE The procedure for configuring replication is identical for both tape image replication with deduplication and tape image replication without deduplication 3 12 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring Global LAN WAN Replication Settings Tape Image Replication provides a simplified way to configure multiple targets within a target system You do this by setting up global parame
186. cing algorithm used for the backup set type of backup deduplication status data type percentage of data backed up logical size of backup physical size of backup the deduplication ratio achieved amount of storage space saved after the deduplication process was initiated percentage of space reclaimed amount of data that was unprocessed by the deduplication process amount of time in seconds that the deduplication process required amount of data per unit of time that it took to deduplicate the data MB sec the name of the backup set that this backup set was compared against during deduplication GroupX which is the mount point or other value that distinguishes this backup from others with the same policy and host and an internal Hitachi process code S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The possible states for a backup being deduplicated are Scanning for data to dedupe Waiting for next backup Delta differencing in process Waiting to claim Space Delta differencing deduplication technology is scanning the data to be deduplicated Delta differencing deduplication technology is waiting for the next backup Delta differencing deduplication technology has selected the CA2 or CA3 compression algorithm and has started compression Delta differencing is complete and Delta differencing deduplication technology is waiting to claim space Reclaiming space Space is being reclaimed Too s
187. client backup policy used the time when the backup job started delta differencing algorithm used for the backup set type of backup deduplication state data type total physical Capacity space reserved for system usable capacity logical data used capacity available capacity deduplication ratio achieved the name of the backup set that this backup set was compared against during deduplication the mount point that distinguishes this backup from others with the same policy and host and an internal Hitachi Customer Support diagnostic code Figure D 2 illustrates the contents of a sample Cartridge to Backup Summary report S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YO0001 10 11 12 Y00002 13 14 Y00003 15 16 17 Y00004 18 19 20 Y00005 21 Cartridge Backup NeClient Policy gams01 seqams gams01 seqams gams01 seqams gams01 seqams C D Report Type Cartridge to Backup Summary Report Completed Time Thu Jan 20 15 41 20 EST 2011 Report Frequency One time only Hostname QADRO2 sepaton com Chassis Serial Number 14080 Revision Tag VTL_6 0 0 6 gams01 seqamsO1 se DRSmoke_ 1 19 2011 21 15 CA3 Full gamsO1 s qamsO1 se DRSmoke 1 19 2011 21 17 CA3 Full gamsO1 seqams01 se DRSmoke_ 1 19 2011 21 17 CA3 Full Job Started Alg Type Status O1 seDRSmoke 1 19 2011 21 12 CA3 Full 01 seDRSmoke_ 1 19 2011 21 12 CA3 Full O1 seDRSmoke_ 1 19 2011 21 12 CA3 Full O1 seD
188. d enhanced script practices The key parameters to change are in bold These script changes are for the data file df the archive log al and the control file ctl The FORMAT clauses are additional fields to include The main concern is that backup applications require the names of all backup streams to be unique Also you should include enough information in the backup stream to be able to visually identify where the stream came from The sample below includes all of these concepts Allocate up to 30 channels RUN ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch00 TYPE SBT TAPE B 8 Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch01 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch02 TYPE SBT TAPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch03 TYPE SBT TAPE BACKUP SBACKUP_ TYPE SKIP INACCESSIBLE FILESPERSET DEFAULT DATABASE sql alter system archive log current RELEASE CHANNEL choo RELEASE CHANNEL ch01 RELEASE CHANNEL ch02 RELEASE CHANNEL ch03 backup all archive logs ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch00 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch01 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch02 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch03 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch04 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch05 TYPE ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch06 TYPE BACKUP FILESPERSET DEFAULT ARCHIVELOG ALL DELETE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE SBT TAPE INPUT RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CH
189. database server to the S Series system are supported provided you make the appropriate parameter and option changes as described in Appendix A Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Integration with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Block Record The maximum record size supported is 512 KB however to achieve Size the optimal data throughput rate use a backup and restore data block size of at least 256 KB 6 34 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Table 6 1 S Series Data Protection System Best Practices Virtual Tape Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology requires two matching Drives backups and these backups must be on separate cartridges NetBackup Options Data Buffer To optimize back up and deduplication performance Hitachi Size recommends that you set the SIZE _DATA_BUFFERS in NetBackup to the value to 262144 default is 65536 and set the NUMBER_DATA_BUFFERS to 32 default is 16 NDMP for To optimize backup performance NDMP requires the following string NetBackup netbackup db config SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_ NDMP 262144 Fragment Size Do not set a maximum fragment size for S Series system storage units Leaving this setting unchecked defaults to a 1 TB fragment size NetBackup catalog consists of the image record files containing the information about the backups These files will not be deduplicated by delta differencing because they will result in a very low deduplication
190. days after dispatch and for fax on receipted transmission of the fax Rights and obligations under these Software License Terms which by their nature should survive the termination or expiry will remain in effect after termination If either of us fails to promptly exercise any contractual right this does not of itself mean that the right has been waived For a waiver of a right to be valid it must be written and it will not give rise to an Ongoing waiver or any expectation that the right will not be enforced unless it is expressly stated to do so These Software License Terms may not be modified except in writing signed by an authorized representative of each party These Software License Terms are the entire agreement relating to its subject matter All oral or written communications understandings proposals representations and warranties are by agreement excluded and are of no force or effect to the extent permitted at law 18 Definitions Confidential Information information that at the time of disclosure is clearly marked as confidential or in the circumstances would be considered to be confidential Equipment hardware and spare parts manufactured by HDS or Hitachi Ltd or HDS has authorized You to use with the Software Open Source License Website the licenses applicable to Open Source Software listed at www hds com corporate legal index html Open Source Software Third Party Software which may be available without charge for
191. deduplicated by substituting pointers for any runs of data that are present in the current backup As a result of this design the latest backup is always the fastest version to recover The latest version is also optimized for streaming to a physical tape because it can be read in a strictly sequential fashion with minimal movement of disk heads Therefore an effective tape vaulting strategy involves making tape copies the same day as the backup and shipping the tapes off site ASAP Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 41 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Application Specific Recommendations Symantec NetBackup Storage Lifecycle Policies support the immediate production of a tape copy after backing up data to the Hitachi S Series The NetBackup Vault option can also be used at the end of the backup window to produce tapes for off site protection I BM Tivoli Storage Manager TSM uses the concept of Copy Pools to create Off site Tape for Disaster Recovery These are logical copies of the data that are held in the Primary Pool This is done on a daily basis as only the latest backup data is required to keep the Copy Pool synchronized with the Primary Pool Because this latest data is in its original undeduplicated form it does not need rehydration thus you can use the Hitachi S Series to maximize the performance of the Storage Pool Copy BACKUP STGPOOL function Storage Tiering and Tape 3 42 If you manage s
192. differencing deduplication technology This information is intended for personnel who assist In installing maintaining and managing the S Series system in the backup and restore deduplication and replication environment Installing the Plug Ins This section describes downloading the appropriate OST plug in s for your environment to a local system moving them to the media server and installing them on the media server Follow these steps to add plug ins for the S Series platform in the navigation tree Figure 4 1 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 1 Replication User Guide Go to the OST Plug in Downloadsscreen System gt Chassis gt OST gt OST Plug in Downloads 1 Choose from among the available Hitachi Protection Platform OST Plug ins including e Windows e Linux e Solaris e SUSE e AIX e Symantec appliance DST Plug in Downloads 0 Ered Cobre Rees Se eee Opernting System Mars OT ge Cpt Se es os i a a aa AT HDSHPPS 057 7 5 0 1644 VVindows 200S F2 WinSoWe Windows Sener 2008 R24 2012 Az AMOee ge DET AMD sxe ye OT AIR replioation Lines RHELS RHEL A CemOS SE CentOS 936 61 HDSHPPS O87 7 20 18040 056 ea rpmubin oD ET Plugin Downlosds ii ee HID SHIPP 0 57 7 5 0 18544 Sotaris ge Disk Votes SPACE 5 10 pagugz F ij Prossssing Modes ALK AG S741 PPC HDSHPP S 0 87 7 3 0 1544 aint 1 ppc rpm SUSE E310 amp E311 86_64 HDSHPP 057 7 3 0 18844 585 G4 rpm SUSE bin LS I
193. e available in the system If you want to change the access of all the cartridges displayed on the screen click Select All at the bottom of the screen Select the desired access status from the drop down list at the bottom of the screen and click GO Deleting Cartridges You can delete one or more cartridges at a time from the S Series system Because this operation is destructive to user data you are required to confirm your actions Deleting cartridges removes the specified cartridges from the system and frees up the storage space previously consumed by those cartridges for new user data The S Series system also provides an additional feature associated with deleting cartridges that guarantees secure information destruction when a cartridge is deleted also known as data erasure Data erasure overwrites deleted cartridge data to prevent retrieval of information from the disks This is achieved by overwriting the data on the disk with a specific data pattern For deduplicated cartridges the data erasure operation deletes and overwrites the new cartridge and its supporting cartridges The S Series data erasure process is a form of data shredding that can be compared to Tape Shredding where the tapes are destroyed to preserve maximum data security and accountability NOTE Before performing this procedure make sure that all the active tape image replication jobs associated with a cartridge have been canceled before deleting the cartridge
194. e the connection you have The Hitachi S Series system does not act as an authentication authority so this alert is invalid When you receive the Secure Connection Failure Alert depending on your browser it states something similar to the following Mozilla Firefox message P_ Address 443 uses an invalid security certificate The certificate is not trusted because it is self signed The certificate is only valid for lt a id cert_domain_link title alc10 sepaton com gt alc10 sepaton com lt a gt Error code sec_error_ca_cert_ invalid Click OK Click Or you can add an exception Click Add Exception The Add Security Exception page appears Click Get Certificate hoang Click Permanently store this exception then click Confirm Security Exception The S Series Console Manager Login screen is displayed Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 1 8 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console Username Password Figure 1 2 Console Manager Login Screen 3 Enter the login information Logging in as an administrator gives you full privileges to all S Series system functions available through the Console Manager The default login information for administrator Is User name administrator Password admin If you are logging in as a user you can only monitor the S Series system and generate a support ticket in order to assist with the troubleshoo
195. e 4 3 Hitachi OST Plugins Setup Wizard 2 Click Next The HITACHI OST Plugins End User License Agreement screen is displayed Figure 4 4 4 4 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide End User License Agreement Please read the Following license agreement carefully Software License Terms 2045 Lafayette Street Santa Clara CA 35050 HOS these Software License Terms Sottware License Terms apply to the HDS products purchased hy You Sottware You must read these Sottware License Terms under which HDS will license Software to You Capitalized terms Ido not accept the terms in the License Agreement Advanced Installer lt Back Cancel Figure 4 4 The End User License Agreement Screen 3 After reviewing the Read me file click Next The HDSHPPS OST Plugins Select Installation Type screen is displayed Figure 4 5 Installation Type Choose the installation type Install HOS HPP 5 OST plugins For only for me Administrator f Everybody fall users Advanced Installer lt Back Cancel Figure 4 5 Select I nstallation Folder Screen Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 5 Replication User Guide 4 Make the appropriate selection for your environment Administrator only or Everybody then click Next The HDSHPPS OST Plugins Read Me file is displayed Figure 4 6 Read me file Please read the Following text carefully H
196. e License Agreement THE sOFTVVARE AND DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED HEREIN Is PROPRIETARY TO Lal CORPORATION AND ITS LICENSORS LSI CORPORATION Is WILLING I accept the berms in the license agreement I do not accept the terms in the license agreement Figure 5 5 License Agreement Screen 5 Click laccept the terms in the license agreement then click Next The Customer Information page is displayed ie MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard Customer Information Please enter your information User Name Organization Sep Slow availability of this application For C All users Only For current user Mrugo Figure 5 6 Customer Information Screen 6 Enter an Organization name if desired then click Next The Destination Folder page is displayed Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual qs 8 ii MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard Destination Folder Click Next to install to this Folder or click Change to install to a different folder Install MegaRAID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 to C Program Files MegaRAID Storage Manager Figure 5 7 Select Folder Screen Select a destination folder for the software then click Next The installation Setup Type page Is displayed ie MegaRAID Storage Manager v9 00 0100 InstallShield Wizard Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs Ple
197. e Net Mask value Enter the IP address of your primary DNS server If you have a secondary DNS server enter its IP address Click Apply NOTE Changing from a static IP address to DHCP causes the processing node to reboot when the changes are applied NOUR WN Configuring Your System for DHCP 1 Under Node Network Settings click the Use DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol checkbox Figure 2 1 2 Click Apply Changing Your System Host Name or Domain Name 1 Under Chassis Network Settings enter a new system name in the Host Name field Chassis Network Settings Host Name ga40v1 Domain Name sepaton com NTP Settings Primary NTP Server 195 43 74 3 Secondary NTP Server 150 101 254 110 Time Zone Settings Geographical Zone America Country United States Time Zone FIGURE 2 2 Network Settings Wizard Chassis Network Settings Configuring the 1500 2 2 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Following are host naming restrictions Invalid host names include noden sren and Head_n where n represents a number Do not use underscores in the host name for example myhost Is a valid host name and my_ host is an invalid host name The host name can only contain alpha numeric values and a hyphen see restriction below The host name cannot begin or end with a hyphen The host name cannot contain any other special characters NOTE If you are running tape image replication a
198. e Pools best practices 6 41 Storage Presence 1 13 confirm storage LUNs 1 15 confirm storage pool 1 13 storage server creation A l R 4 23 Storage Tiering and Tape vaulting to tape 3 42 Summary List best practices 6 34 Support History 6 28 Support ticket 6 25 Support Ticket link 6 25 Support Ticket wizard 6 25 Symantec volume pools 6 45 Symantec NetBackup vaulting to tape 3 42 Symantec NetBackup OpenStorage 1 5 Symantec Veritas NetBackup 3 40 Synchronizing to an External NTP Server 2 3 System 5 18 System Capacity Report 2 10 description D 2 System Capacity Reports D 1 System Capacity View 5 18 System Maintenance 3 39 6 28 Restart Replication Services 6 32 restart VTL 6 28 restarting the console manager 6 29 system maintenance restart all processing nodes 6 30 System Maintenance link 6 28 System Notifications 5 3 System Sizing deduplication ratios 6 39 sizing systems 6 37 T Tape Drive Parameters Screen 2 20 2 24 2 28 tape drive replication cartridge status 3 20 job history and performance graph 5 45 job summary 5 46 key features of tape drive replication 3 1 licensing 3 10 monitoring and reporting 5 35 prerequisites 3 9 replication concepts 3 2 3 9 tape drive replication best practices 5 35 tape drive replication concepts 3 2 3 9 tape drive replication configuration 3 12 Tape Drive Replication Job History Report 2 10 tape drive replication licensing 3 10 tape drive replication monitoring and reporting 5 35 Tape
199. e current backup because nocatalog has been specified To include the information about the current backup the control file should be backed up as the last step of the RMAN section This step would not be necessary if we were uSing a recovery catalog H ALLOCATE CHANNEL ch00 TYPE SBT TAPE BACKUP recommended format FORMAT ctl s p t CURRENT CONTROLFILE RELEASE CHANNEL ch00 Delta Differencing Deduplication with Standard RMAN Script Changes In cases where there are many scripts to maintain or modify customizing each RMAN script may not be practical Therefore the goal is to minimize the total number of backup sets delta differencing deduplication has to search to find a correct match You can minimize the number of backup sets by reducing the number of channels and increasing the number of files per backup set To avoid problems finding matching backup sets set the number of channels to 30 or fewer Accordingly leave the default FILESPERSET value in place to optimize the number of files per backup set In this case Hitachi recommends these settings FILESPERSET default MAXOPENFILES default Number of channels lt 30 NOTE You must not set the format to be the same as the enhanced format string described above In particular do not start the format string with df AA Sample Oracle RMAN Script with Standard Script Practices Following is a sample Oracle RMAN script without the Hitachi recommende
200. e image replication solution is offered with or without a deduplication license The S Series Data Protection platform can be used as a target or source for tape image replication Tape image replication leverages delta differencing deduplication technology to identify changes since the last backup and transmits only the changed data deltas to the target system effectively reducing the required bandwidth by the deduplication ratio for each backup If delta differencing deduplication technology is not used tape image replication replicates each backup set in full Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 4 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Hitachi Protection Platform Service Console The HPP service console is a standard feature of the S Series Data Protection platform The HPP service console monitors the Hitachi Data Systems Hitachi Unified Storage HUS system Management of Hitachi Data Systems storage is performed via the LSI MegaRAID Storage Manager The HPP service console automatically brings added storage online configures devices to their optimal settings and incorporates the storage into the system as available capacity The Hitachi Hi Track Monitor Call Home Service and Remote Maintenance Tool provides real time 24x7 platform monitoring advanced diagnostics and phone home functionality Compression The S Series system incorporates dual hardware compression cards in each node as a standard f
201. e mode by pressing the FUNCTION switch continuously for 10 seconds or more using for example a ballpoint pen When BMC maintenance mode is canceled the ERROR LED stops blinking S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Back side ooo Figure A 5 CR 220S rear side overview Table A 6 CR 220S rear side components Extension storage bays 2 5 inch 13 14 optional Green On __ Accessing HDD ee optional Amber Blink2 On going data rebuild ao PCI slots e A PCI Express board can be installed to a PCI slot PCI Power supply A power supply can be installed to a power supply slot The slots slot numbers are 1 2 from left to right AC power is supplied Stand by state AC cable is Green Blink connected POWER switch is OFF Green On Power is ON Normal operation POWER switch is ON Power supply LED Amber Blink Warning status over temperature Errors occurred Failure AC cable has been disconnected or Amber On other reason Network interface Connectors to connect LAN cables Network interface connectors 1 4 connector numbers are 1 to 4 from right to left USB connectors Connect a keyboard and a mouse You can also connect USB rear side devices o loom switch Blue On The SERVICE LED turns on when a SERVICE switch either on o SER SERVICE LED the front side or the rear side is pressed Connect the management interface connector to a system
202. e more space to cartridges than is physically available on the disks Delta differencing deduplication automatically enable oversubscription of the S Series system s backend storage Without proper monitoring however this allows the system to completely fill up its available capacity If you were to fill up the available capacity you would need to relabel or recycle expired cartridges for example those in the scratch pool See Deleting Cartridges on page 14 for additional information Moving or Deleting Cartridges and Data Erasure This section provides information to help you while moving and deleting cartridges and performing the secure cartridge erasure procedure e To avoid problems while moving cartridges make sure that the cartridge has been exported from the library using the backup application before moving it to another library or the FireSafe e You should always move a cartridge to the FireSafe before deleting it Refer to the backup application s documentation for details You will have to reinventory your devices after the completion of move cartridges e Suppress backup and restoration activity to the library from which cartridges are being moved or deleted or e Use the backup application to export the cartridge from the library before moving or deleting it This prevents errors due to cartridges in use by the backup application e Ifa cartridge has not been deduplicated and is not a reference pointer to a d
203. e of the owner Case Type The type of support case Case Component The case component Case Module The case module Case Summary The case summary or any keywords in the case summary Severity The severity of the case Status The current status of the case VTL Serial The serial number of the system for which the case was created OEM Serial The OEM serial number of the system for which the case was created Resolution The resolution status of the case Customer XRef The customer XRef number of the case Priority The priority of the case Contact The name of the contact person for the case Root Cause The root cause of the case RC Category The root cause category of the case RC Summary The root cause summary or any keyword from the root cause summary of the case 3 Click Includes Closed checkbox if you want to include the closed cases in the search results 4 Enter the number of Rows to be displayed under the search results The number of rows displayed by default is 20 5 Click Scan to display the search results or Reset to reset the filter options The list of cases filtered as per the filter options selected is displayed on the screen Click the icon next to the case number in the list to display the case details description closed information and detailed case activity of the particular case 6 64 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Knowledge Mana
204. e required under local privacy laws or otherwise from employees and other individuals to access relevant data and b Verifying that data continues to be held retrieved deleted or otherwise processed in accordance with relevant laws Hitachi is a registered trademark of Hitachi Ltd in the United States and other countries Hitachi Data Systems is a registered trademark and service mark of Hitachi in the United States and other countries All other trademarks service marks and company names are properties of their respective owners Export authorization is required for Data At Rest Encryption Import Use regulations may restrict export to certain countries e China Eligible for import but the License Key and encryption may not be sent to China e France Import pending completion of registration formalities e Hong Kong Import pending completion of registration formalities e Israel Import pending completion of registration formalities Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Introducing the Hitachi Protection PlatformS1500 1 1 Key Features of the S Series Platform 08 1 1 Designed for Multiple Office Environments 1 1 COMPONENTS faa 44 ou 5a u ROG Se ee ee A ee 1 2 Performance Optimization 0 00 eee eee 1 2 Equipped with Deduplication Technology 1 2 Flexibility and Control 1 0 eee eee es 1 3 S Series OvVervieW aaa 1 3 S Series Data Protection Platform Overview
205. e use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment is intended to reduce the use of substances that may pose risks to human health or the environment The RoHS directive restricts the following hazardous substances to the levels shown Lead 0 1 e Mercury 0 1 Cadmium 0 01 Hexavalent chromium 0 1 e Polybrominated biphenyls PBB 0 1 e Polybrominated diphenyl ethers PBDEs 0 1 Regulatory Compliance Notices Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual EU REACH REACH Registration Evaluation Authorization and Restriction of Chemicals is a regulation covering the manufacturing and import into EU of hazardous chemicals Article 33 1 of the REACH regulation states that manufacturers and importers of articles products are required to notify their customers of the presence of any Substances of Very High Concern SVHC in their products exceeding 0 1 by weight However in order to display due diligence we are confirming with all of our suppliers that there are no traces of these chemicals in any sub assemblies or components used in our products China RoHS CR 210 CR 220 Besa SRM BZWAMRSeS FHEAE A Ri SBE si i Cr a PBB PBDE pO 0 O ABR X AREEN CX COTO V O O O WE i S X T O Oe o Le he fi Bt Ba DI x OT x oO B a O XxX O L O 0 O0 O O RMRAZEAH MADAM RSSA EVANS SE SJ T 11363 2006 EMERE AY BR E BO AA X aT el lll
206. eates through the S Series software the elements in the following diagram This will aid you in keeping the Source and Destination Storage Servers and Disk Volume Pairs straight The illustration and procedures create a bidirectional one to one S Series OST A R replication environment Cape02 Vine02 Media Server Media Server Media Server Media Server EEEEIETITIFIOL FERE Vette i ili iani we 4 0 gt RTD ech BATTLE TTT TEESE TTT D ii Iota LI P EIEE OTA EE Aana Storage Sefver Vine02 2 RABE 21 1A a e N it RE BT Storage Setver Cape02 Disk Volume Disk Volume Pair Source Cape02 Target Vine02 Disk Volume Pair Source Vine02 Target Cape02 Storage Pool 1 Storage Pool 1 Figure 4 25 Typical OST A I R Replication Configuration You must use public IP addresses for the Source and Destination Storage Servers that you create 4 22 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R Replication User Guide Source Storage Server 1 Navigate to the OST directory System gt Chassis gt OST and click Create Storage Server from the Tasks bar O Epmd Coflopin Roelrosh a Chassis capocod sangale com mM apaci he elie Sen 1 I T F aT Z ST HOTFCATONS FOR OF m AN e087 Flugin Gownlashs No Nobthoations Found ge SRL Modes Figure 4 26 OST Source Storage Server Creation Task The OST storage server creation Task option is displ
207. eature to accelerate the compression and decompression of stored data Additionally spare CPU cycles may be used to provide additional compression capability Compression typically results in about a 2 1 reduction in data thus doubling storage capacity and halving the bandwidth required to do I O Some data is highly compressible while other data Such as encrypted or precompressed data will not compress at all The S Series Data Protection platform automatically identifies uncompressible data and does not attempt to compress it Symantec NetBackup OpenStorage OpenStorage OST is a licensed feature of S Series Data Protection platform Data Centers are increasingly turning to 10 Gbps Ethernet for new solutions to backup bottlenecks Symantec NetBackup provides a powerful solution called OpenStorage OST that implements a disk like interface to NetBackup Media Servers while preserving the large block sequential I O advantages of Fibre Channel tape The S Series platform can be configured with one or more OST Storage Servers to provide scalable high performance backup over multiple 10Gbps Ethernet links The Hitachi Data Systems implementation of OST is certified by Symantec and is designed to offer the highest levels of OST throughput of any enterprise class backup platform OST Storage Servers are analogous to tape libraries Each storage server may provide OST services over one or more pairs of 10Gbps ports The ports on a LOGigE card
208. ecovery That means faster easier recovery when an emergency is declared Storage Lifecycle Policies allow you to automate data replication with A I R A R replication transfers deduplicated information to minimize bandwidth with no administrative action required Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 19 Replication User Guide Hitachi Protection Platform and OST A 1 R Replication Benefits 4 20 Multiple replication and recovery possibilities Support for one to many servers many to one server active passive and active active Fully leveraged intelligent disk appliances Take advantage of high speed backup and recovery over a Fibre Channel VTL or Ethernet OST connection along with disk sharing virtualization and deduplication technologies High performance and efficiency Automatic load balancing eliminates manual administrative processes Grid scalability Increase capacity and add performance as needed Simple migration and consolidated management Storage pooling lets you partition a single system into separate pools of physical storage and implement a simple transition to OST Fast efficient Hitachi Protection Platform replication controlled by NetBackup Improved manageability and enhanced disaster recovery Fully leverage advanced features such as backup image replication between multiple data centers eliminating the need to ship encrypt or store tapes OST A I R replication is d
209. ed Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 16 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Add Storage Wizard Step tof 3 E Format Lis Kish Array 177 060 41 Select Ling Prinia y Ee ETEN Cancel Figure 1 12 Add Storage Select LUNs Storage LUNs found that are not yet configured into a storage pool are displayed The path values for each LUN shown are auto populated by the S Series software along with the disk array s IP address and the number of storage LUNs available 3 Click Format LUNs Then select one or more groups of LUNs that you would like to add and click Next Step The Add Storage Wizard 2 screen is displayed oO Add Storage Wizard Stop 2 of 3 FINISH ADD STORAGE i Finish adding storage iyi Aang ENG Add Storage buton peh ii gt D WARNING Existing data will be destroyed and cannot be recovered This step cannet be reversed Figure 1 13 Add Storage Wizard 2 Screen 4 Click Add Storage After a brief pause during which the Console Manager configures the storage LUNs the wizard reports that the storage has been added and now belongs to a specific storage pool Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual a Add Storage Wizard Step 3of 3 Tr Olin LUGS are successhuty added to Siorager ool Restart VTL to exit out of Maintenance mode Lae Primary Seta ced aay 7 2a Figure 1 14 Add Storage C
210. ed as one to one topology _ Remote S Office Remote Office Figure 3 4 Active Active Model Understanding Replication Concepts Before moving on to the implementation of replication it is important to understand the replication concepts Active System An Active System Is the S Series system that sends data to be replicated on the target S Series system Passive System A Passive System is the S Series system that receives the replicated data from the source S Series system but does not receive local backup data Target System A Target System is the S Series system that has been identified to receive the replicated data Source System A Source System Is the S Series system that sends data to be replicated on the target S Series system Source A series of cartridges in a virtual library are the source data to be replicated This is the original copy of the backup data written to and managed by the source site s backup application 3 6 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Target A series of corresponding slots and cartridges in another virtual library at another site in another location that receives data from the source virtual library This is the secondary data recovery copy of the backup data that is managed by the replication system LAN WAN Replication Targets The Replication Target is the library on the target S Series system where the repl
211. ed on the alarm time sepatonTraps 1 END SNMP V2 Event MIB Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Software License Terms Unless otherwise provided for in a current signed agreement between You and Hitachi Data Systems Corporation located at 750 Central Expressway Santa Clara CA 95050 HDS these Software License Terms Software License Terms apply to the HDS products purchased by You Software You must read these Software License Terms under which HDS will license Software to You Capitalized terms will have the meanings indicated in Section 18 below BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING COPYING ACCESSING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR BY CHOOSING THE I ACCEPT OPTION LOCATED ON OR ADJ ACENT TO THE SCREEN WHERE THIS AGREEMENT MAY BE DISPLAYED YOU AGREE TO THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU ARE ACCEPTING THESE TERMS ON BEHALF OF ANOTHER PERSON OR A COMPANY OR OTHER LEGAL ENTITY YOU REPRESENT AND WARRANT THAT YOU HAVE FULL AUTHORITY TO BIND THAT PERSON COMPANY OR LEGAL ENTITY TO THESE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL COPY ACCESS CLICK AN ACCEPT BUTTON OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND PROMPTLY RETURN THE SOFTWARE TO THE PARTY FROM WHOM IT WAS OBTAINED FOR A REFUND OF THE AMOUNT PAID STANDALONE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS 1 License Grant Except as otherwise expressly provided HDS grants You a personal non transferable non exclusive license
212. eduplicated cartridge then the space will be reclaimed immediately For a reference pointer to another cartridge or a deduplicated cartridge the space Is not reclaimed immediately Refer to Reclaim Space on page 5 for additional information on reclaiming Space Notifications 6 40 To avoid filling up the available storage capacity warning notifications are displayed in the user interface and sent by email if configured when the available backend storage reaches a user configured threshold The default alert setting is 90 percent so the first alert occurs when a storage pool is 90 percent full thus there is only 10 percent of the disk space available An additional notification is sent at 95 percent When the storage pool reaches 98 percent full the S Series system will send an alert notification to the users about this condition Any backups occurring at this time will receive an error and all attempts to write data will be rejected by the system At this point you must erase unnecessary cartridges to free storage or add storage beforehand You cannot hot add storage while delta differencing deduplication is deduplicating data Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Using Storage Pools There are several reasons why you might choose to divide your available storage into separate pools Among the reasons you should use storage pools are multitenancy environments technology migrations and re
213. eduplication If the reference backup set has been overwritten or been deleted this field will be blank The mount point or other value that distinguishes this backup from others with the same policy and host Process Code An internal Hitachi Customer Support diagnostic code S1500 Platform Reports D 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Policy Cartridge Summary Report NOTE The Policy Cartridge Summary report provides Hitachi delta differencing deduplication technology specific information and is only available when delta differencing deduplication technology is licensed on your system The Policy Cartridge Summary report lists cartridge information for each backup set This report lists the backup summary information for each backup and its corresponding cartridges The Policy Cartridge Summary report is an extension of the Backup Summary report and provides detailed backup information of each cartridge associated with a particular backup set In some instances the report cites backup application catalogs which is a reference to the database For example a TSM catalog reference is referring to the TSM database Figure D 4 shows a sample Backup Summary report A B C D E F G H J K IL M 1 Report Type Policy Cartridge Summary 2 Report Completed Time Tue Jun 14 11 32 28 EDT 2011 3 Report Frequency One time only 4 Hostname ds3 qa1 sepaton com 5 6 7 gt Chassis Serial Number 12345 Revision Tag MA
214. ee of care used to protect our own Confidential Information We won t disclose Your Confidential Information to anyone else unless You allow us to and You must do the same with our Confidential Information We can however disclose it to our employees and contractors who need to know the information in order to perform obligations under these Software License Terms 13 Export Compliance You acknowledge that in various countries laws and regulations regulate the export of computer products and technology which may prohibit use sale or re export of such products or technology if You know or have reason to know that such products and technology are for use in connection with the design development production stock piling or use of nuclear chemical or biological weapons or missiles and in some countries e g China for certain conventional military end uses If You sell or transfer to another person or entity title in or right to use any Software you will ensure that all applicable export restrictions of the nature described in this section are observed 14 Termination of License Your license in the Software will terminate i when that Software is replaced with any upgrade revision or replacement Software or ii if You are in breach of any of these Software License Terms or any license for Third Party Software 15 Dispute Resolution Both of us will use reasonable efforts to get an appropriate person from our respective management teams
215. een is displayed EDIT SLOT MAP Figure 3 21 Edit Slot Map Screen 7 Enter the new Start Slot and the End Slot and click Submit The screen refreshes and a success dialog is displayed Availability Window Replication jobs can only begin during the availability window Availability Window parameter settings are set while creating the Replication Target however these settings can be modified later Availability Window settings include the start day start time and window duration when replication of data will take place When the availability window ends any replication jobs currently in progress will continue until they complete No replication jobs can begin until the next availability window opens To edit the availability window l Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed Click the target name to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Click Edit in the Tasks bar The Edit LAN WAN Replication Target Settings screen is displayed Figure 3 20 Click Edit Availability Window in the Tasks bar The following screen is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 29 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual EDIT AVAILABILITY WINDOWS Figure 3 22 Edit Availability Window Screen 5 Availability Window Parameters can be set daily 24 hours weekly and monthly Enter the Start
216. eled using before editing the cartridge To modify cartridges or to view their current settings or location follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Cartridges Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Cartridges The Cartridges Summary screen is displayed 6 12 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual O Egyed College Retresn Tie r AN Carrhdiges Fer Fags E Chassis br sepi sapaian ori ee k E 1 gt ae Bi H ge apeo H aa Depia on TF T Earoods Prete indse Range Cartridges Per Page ae Disk Vous Cartridge Details aa T 7 100 ool a le Processing Modes j ae E gj LUN Mapping El H g Libraries Library Hams Caririidges Per Page gM Biorags Pools aj Borage LUNs Fiesa wo ia View a Cartridges Liorary 24 00 al aa t Tsk Arrays _ brary 26 100 Eal WE Da mr 100 View Laran 74 oo E view korsgs Pool Kaen Cartridges Per Page eR 1 w kl Wiew Figure 6 8 Cartridges Summary Screen 2 In the drop down menu beside the cartridge select the maximum number of cartridges you want to view per screen page The default is 100 cartridges per screen page Other values are 10 50 500 and 1024 If you have more cartridges than the number selected the cartridge view allows you to continue to next and previous pages to see the additional cartridges 3 Click View beside the group of cartridges you want to edit A Cartridge Details screen similar to the one shown in Figure 6 9 is displayed
217. emental backups e The last incremental backup before a full backup is deduplicated against the next incremental following the full backup TSM All TSM backups will be deduplicated against all related backups Data Protector e Full backups will deduplicate against other full backups e Incremental backups will deduplicate against full backups and against other incremental backups Monitoring Your 1500 5 34 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual NetWorker e Full backups will deduplicate against other full backups e Cumulative incremental backups will deduplicate against full backups and other cumulative incremental backups if no newer full backups exist but they will not deduplicate against differential incremental backups e Incremental backups will deduplicate against other incremental backups Replication Monitoring and Reporting 5 35 The S Series software continuously monitors the status of replication jobs running on the source and the target systems Tape image replication provides various ways for checking and monitoring the status of replication jobs Cartridge Status screens provide a detailed status of the cartridges used in the replication jobs The cartridges used in the replication jobs can be in several different states depending on the state of the backup set These states are displayed on the Cartridge Status Figure 5 33 screen J ob Reporting screens allow you to monitor the progress of active
218. en allows you to edit the Report Type and Schedule of the email report 2 Make the changes and click Save to save the changes Deleting a User from the Report List You may want to remove an existing user from the list of users receiving email reports To remove a user from the email reports list from the Report Setup screen 1 Click Edit The Edit Report Job screen appears Click the red checkbox beside the email address for the user s you want to delete from the list The list refreshes and no longer displays the deleted user The deleted user s will no longer receive reports Configuring the 1500 2 12 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Deleting a Report from the List You may want to remove an existing report from the list of reports To remove a report from the Report Setup screen 1 Click Remove for the report you want to delete The list refreshes and no longer displays the deleted report Configuring SNMP Settings The S Series system can be configured to send alerts to specific management station addresses using the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP when it detects errors or specific events The management station uses applications such as SNMP Manager or HP OpenView to handle these traps If the S Series system detects an error condition on such events as drive failures power supply failures fan failures or temperature abnormalities it generates a trap with the Hitachi Object Identifier OID
219. entative To perform a system maintenance task 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Click System Maintenance in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The System Maintenance screen is displayed Figure 6 35 System Maintenance Restarting the VTL 6 28 Some Console Manager operations require that the VTL be restarted in order for changes to become known Other times you may be directed to restart the VTL by a Hitachi Customer Support representative To restart the VTL 1 Manually power on the 1500 node from the front panel button 2 Click Restart VTL in the Tasks bar A warning displays stating that any VTL operation in progress will not complete 3 Click Restart VTL The VTL begins its restart process which takes several minutes During this time a Please Wait indicator message appears on the screen If the system has not completed its restart process before Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual you attempt any activities in the browser a Cannot communicate with chassis message appears on the screen Wait a few more minutes and try to connect again 4 The VTL restart process is complete when the following dialogue screen is displayed Click OK to continue See N Beis Figure 6 36 VTL Restart Process Complete 5 The system is ready for use when the Initialization for nodex completed notification is displayed NOTE If you have email
220. ep Configuring the 1500 2 30 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Figure 2 34 Cartridge Size and Number The Cartridge Parameters screen lists the open used and total number of slots defined for this library The maximum number of cartridges created in this library cannot exceed the number of open slots available This screen defaults the cartridge size to the standard capacity for the cartridge type selected If you have multiple storage pools you can also select the storage pool in which those cartridges will reside If oversubscription is not enabled this screen displays the maximum number of cartridges that can be created based on both physical storage Capacity remaining and number of available slots remaining in the library NOTE TheS Series system requires a certain amount of storage overhead for each cartridge you create for cartridge content information It automatically subtracts this amount from the available capacity 17 Specify the number of cartridges to create and the cartridge size The amount of storage required by these values is displayed If the storage required exceeds what is available the overage appears in red You can change either the number of cartridges the cartridge size or both to correct the overage condition or allow the overage NOTE The Console Manager permits an overage only when the oversubscription feature is enabled See Oversubscribing on page 4 17
221. epatonnlsre_ssidv_sepatonnt 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done BSSessss 2 1 HEHH 5 37E 10 5 37E 10 283099 se sepatonnisrc_ss dv_sepatonnt 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done EnEn EHH 2 O HHHHHHHH 3 92E 09 3 92E 09 283192 se kibbutz_1 src_ss dv_ kibbutz_1 192 168 1 gt HHHH H compressi done BSanssss 4 O HHHH 5632 5632 283099 se sepatonnisrc_ss dv_sepatonnt 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done SSSnssss 2 O HEHEHHE 1463296 1463296 283193 se notapesl src_ssidv_notapes1 192 168 1 HAAR compressidone HHHH 6 0 HHHH 19968 19968 283198 se septriage src_ss dv_ septriagel 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done FRR 4 O HHHH 8775080 8775680 283199 se notapes2 src_ss dv_notapes 192 168 1 HHHHHHHH compressidone HHHH 2 0 HHHH 6656 6656 283199 se notapes src_ssidv_notapes 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done HHHH 4 O HHHH 512 212 283198 se septriagelsrc_ssidv_septriagel 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done HHHH 1 0 HHHH 312 512 283198 se septriagelsrc_ssidv_septriagel 192 168 L HHHH compressi done HHHH 0 O HHHH O3 BE 08 3 BE HOS 283199 se notapes src ssidv_notapes 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done FRR 4 O HHHH 2 826408 2 85826E 08 283199 se notapes src_ssidv_notapes 192 168 1L HHHH compressidone HHHH 3 0 HHHH 512 512 283198 se speedwaysrc_ssidv_ speedway 192 168 1 HHHH compressi done SSnnssss 5 O HHHH 32768 32768 283199 se notapes2 src_ss dv_notapes 192 168 1 HHHH compressidone HHHH 2 0 HHHH 4E amp 08 4E 08 283199 se notapes src_ssidv_notapes 192 168 1 HHHHHHH le aes done HHHH 3 0 HHHH 1
222. ered DIMM DDR3 1333 SDRAM 2048 MB 4096 MB 8192 MB 16384 MB Wide range registered DIMM DDR3 1600 SDRAM Error correction ECC As memory RAS features SDDC online spare memory mirroring lockstep device tagging are supported 6 1 CPU 12 2 CPUs 96 GB 1 CPU 192 GB 2 CPUs 2 GB 1 CPU 4 GB 2 CPUs Graphics Resolutions Number of colors 3 640 x 480 16 77 M 800 x 600 16 77 M 1024 x 768 16 77 M 1280 x 1024 16 77 M S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 13 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Disk array controller 512 MB 1024MB without with cache backup module Hot plug S HDD 4 2 5 inch optional mee PSaren O Rotational Speed 7200 17200 r min S 10000 10000 r min S capacity 4 TB x 12 HDD 900 GB x 2 HDD 5 4 TB x 2 HDD x 6 RAID 900 GB x 2 HDD hase a 4 TB x 12 HDD 600 GB 900 GB Device SSD 4 2 5 inch optional SATA 3 Maximum RAID O 400 GB capacity 200 GB x 2 SSD internal RAID 1 200 GB 5 200 GB x 2 SSD Supported capacit 200 GB PCI slot Slot PCl Express 3 0 x 8 1 PCI Express 3 0 x 4 2 PCI Express 2 0 x 4 1 PCI Express 2 0 x 1 1 Vacant slots 5 Standard Display mini D SUB 15 pins x 1 interfaces Serial D SUB 9 pins x 1 USB x 6 front 2 rear 4 Controller o BCM5719 x 1 onboard KSZ8051 PHY x 1 onboard for remote management Interface Broadcom BCM5719 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T x 4
223. eries system on receiving end NOTE The S Series system makes storage available for user data through storage pools If a storage pool used by tape image replication reaches its capacity the replication will stop This is irrespective of the capacity of the other storage pools Key Features of Tape I mage Replication The key features of tape image replication include Optimized Replication via Data Deduplication Tape image replication leverages data deduplication to enable only the unique data to be transferred to the target S Series system This enables more data to be expediently transferred to Safety Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Asynchronous Mirroring Technology Asynchronous mirroring technology makes tape image replication well suited for LAN WAN replication whereby resources are effectively utilized for data transfer through user defined policies Unified Management Console Tape image replication s management features are integrated into the unified management console A tape image replication tab in the S Series Console Manager window centralizes the setup monitoring and reporting of tape image replication operations A tape image replication summary page displays job status and enables a 90 day trend analysis capability and email reports Parallel Processing Architecture Tape image replication uses a concurrent and parallel processing architectu
224. erver Creation Wizard Siep d ol S Add Diak Volume CREATE OST DISK VOLUME Marne Vinel ikamet SELECT 4 STORAGE POOL oraga Pooli Ciel Mink Waina Figure 4 37 Create OST Disk Volume Screen a Provide a Disk Volume Name and as necessary select a Storage Pool for this Disk Volume Storage_Pool_1 is enabled by default b Click Create Disk Volume for the Destination The wizard returns the message lt Disk Vol 1 gt has been successfully created in Storage Pool 1 Disk Volume details are also displayed OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Mep 2 ol Conhigure more Sk Volumes yYimegi Aomen has been seccesshiihy created in Storage Pawn 1 ik Yali Infiguiied for Kawapi Server Vine Disk Vokurren Hlorap Pool fined 1 Volumedt BioraegePood_ Figure 4 38 Disk Volume Successfully Created Screen Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 27 Replication User Guide c Click Return The Destination Storage Server Status screen is displayed de Gonliguradion Te Cif gurali cen Pf Chassis vineyardsangaie com n ir 7 COMP URL T IO Ce O S MOS m as iis Mastar Hode j Ja VST Hashor Hadi SRE Hoge 1 147 128 1143 lt a AA Vine Devic Muar hel e057 Plug in Downloads a SAUE Speed 4 E lainel a Vinet Volumet i Good UE Mobis ead BRE Node 182 188 1148 a 3 i ie S Nodes fesaded F ee SE Hin Se SRE Henke 1 ra DSE Win OME S Credentials s Usermim
225. es instructions for creating OST Storage Servers selecting OST Master and I O nodes and adding a disk volume NOTE Do not use DHCP on the S Series with OST Creating a Storage Server Follow these steps to create an OST Storage Server OST Tasks Create Storage Server NOTIFICATIONS FOR OST No Notifications Found Figure 4 12 OST Notifications Screen 1 Click Create Storage Server in the Tasks bar The OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Name and Credentials screen is displayed Figure 4 13 OST Storage Server Creation Wizard tap 1 of 5 O37 Storage Server Athibitss OST STORAGE SERVER HAMP OST STORAGE SPRVER CREDENTIALS OST STORAGE SERVER ATTRIBUTES cot EES Figure 4 13 OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Name and Credentials Screen Enter a name for the OST Storage Server Enter the following OST Storage Server Credentials e Username e Password The password must be 14 characters or more e Confirm Password Enable OST over Fibre Channel as necessary 5 Click Next Step The OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Configure Nodes screen is displayed Figure 4 14 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R 4 13 Replication User Guide 4 14 OST Master Node OST I O Nodes OST Storage Serer Creation Wizard Step 2 of 5 Configure Notes SELECT OST MASTER HODE SELECT OST bO HODES Selec a processing node as me OST Master Node Select one or more processing nodes as ine O
226. es that consumes 32 MB of physical space The Extent Size of relabeled cartridge is fixed at 32 MB This is added to the Used Capacity value of the relabeled cartridge even when the cartridge has no data The barcode name in the Cartridges Capacity table is a link to display the capacity information about the cartridge Clicking on the barcode will display the Cartridge Capacity view Figure 5 23 See Viewing Additional Information About a Cartridge on page 24 for detailed cartridge capacity utilization 5 27 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Monitoring Processing Nodes Performance Navigate to the Processing Nodes link on the navigation tree System gt Chassis gt Processing Nodes and click Monitor Nodes Performance in the Tasks bar The Fibre Channel Ports Performance Statistics screen is displayed Figure 5 28 This is information that has been generated since the last system reboot FIBRE CHANNEL PORTS PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Since last reboot SRE Node FC Port Read Written Current Throughput 0 0 4 10 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s 0 1 4 10 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s 0 2 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s 0 3 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s 1 KB 00 KB KB 1 1 4 70 KB 00 KB KB 1 2 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s 1 0 00 KB 0 00 KB 0 00 KB s Figure 5 28 Fibre Channel Ports Performance Statistics Screen The Fibre Channel Ports Performance Monitoring table lists the following
227. es to the host The LUN Mapping mode is active when the global host access mode is set to User Defined You can map devices to hosts via either the device view or the host view Enabling LUN Mapping Enabling LUN mapping involves changing the global host access mode from All Devices to User Defined When the User Defined mode is initially selected hosts cannot see any defined libraries or tape drives You must manually map each device library and tape drives to each enabled host that will use them To enable LUN mapping perform these steps 1 Navigate to the Host Access Mode screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping The Host Access Mode screen is displayed Tasks O Change Hoo Sane Tapschy Host Access Mode Figure 6 2 Host Access Mode Screen 2 Click User Defined to select that mode and then click Apply A confirmation dialogue Is displayed 3 Click OK to confirm the host access mode change A success message appears on the screen and the additional LUN mapping screens Device View and Host View are available in the navigation tree 6 4 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Access Mode Tasks 0 Change Hi Sen O Device View O Hot view Host Access Mode Host Access Mode Changed Successfully JAN Devioss Gi Vss Figure 6 3 Host Access Mode Changed 4 Begin mapping the devices and hosts as described in the following sections Mapp
228. esigned for DR across multidomain environments Improved Recovery Point Objective RPO Shorter backups allow multiple backups per day Improved capacity reporting and management Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Summary of OST A 1I R Replication Configuration Following is a Summary description of how to configure OST A I R replication on S Series processing nodes The complete procedure along with accompanying screens appears in the section Creating an OST Storage Server on page 4 22 Make sure that you log in and provide credentials to both the Source Storage Server and the Destination Storage Server before you attempt to assign a Disk Volume Pair to each Similarly you must also create a parallel configuration here as exists in your NetBackup environment You must use public IP addresses for the Source and Destination Storage Servers 1 Put the plug in onto both NetBackup media servers a Refer to See Installing the Plug Ins on page 1 2 On the Source processing node a Create the Storage Server b Create the Disk Volumes 3 On the Destination processing node a Create the Storage Server b Create the Disk Volumes 4 Create the Source Disk Volume Pair on the Source processing node and a Destination Disk Volume Pair on the Destination node a Go to the Source processing node Console Manager for A I R and create a replication pair System gt Chassis
229. f doing so and iv are not in breach of these Software License Terms or any other agreement that You have with HDS or any of its affiliates b HDS will at its option and cost do any of the following in relation to Software which is or HDS considers is likely to be the subject of an IP Claim i secure the rights for You to continue to use the Software without infringement or ii modify the Software so that it is not infringing or replace it with something that has similar functionality to the Software If neither option is reasonably possible HDS will provide You with a refund provided that You promptly return the Software to HDS The above remedies will not apply to x any Third Party Software including without limitation any Open Source Software or y otherwise to any Software that You have or any person on Your behalf has i modified or combined with any third party product not resold and authorized or approved by HDS ii used outside the stated standard operating environment for the Software or for an unauthorized purpose or iii failed to use a more recent version of the Software that was available to You and would have avoided the infringement or where the IP Claim arises due to any material or item that You own or have sourced from a third party Yourself 11 Liability Limitations We each acknowledge the full extent of our own liability to the other arising from death or personal injury resulting from our negligent acts or omiss
230. f the S Series system in the Location field and a company name in the Company field The location company name contact email and serial number fields are included in reports and support tickets mailed to Hitachi Customer Support You can help us resolve your problem quickly by ensuring this information is complete and correct 6 Enter a description system administrator or Support to indicate whom to contact about the S Series system in the Contact field 7 In the Contact Phone field enter a telephone number for the system contact person 8 In the Email field enter the system administrator s email address 9 Enter the warranty serial number of your S Series system in the Warranty Serial Number field 10 The S Series system allows you to have DeltaView Reports automatically sent to the Hitachi Customer Support team Click DeltaView Reports if you want to enable this facility These reports will help the Customer Support team to evaluate your storage environment Click the link Learn more to display more information about the DeltaView Reports 11 Click Apply Settings to save the changes Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring Notifications a Mail Server Reports and SNMP Alerts The S Series system continuously monitors the status of its components Capacity and performance The Console Manager provides three different options to receive S Series system information f
231. fferencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server B 5 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual With this configuration delta differencing deduplication will be able to quickly identify the correct matching backups using fewer system resources Additionally this practice allows delta differencing deduplication to successfully deduplicate database backups spanning a virtually unlimited number of data files The scripted filenames are more fully described with sample scripts in the following document that is available on the Hitachi DeltaView Customer Support site Go to the Knowledge Manager Knowledge Base folder Legacy Oracle RMAN_ Scripting rtf Recommendations for Updating Your RMAN Scripts Table B 3 shows you the various RMAN scripting possibilities and describes the results of taking the noted actions Table B 3 Recommendations for Updating RMAN Scripts aims meen Se USINg scripted continue to use this is a Better filenames scripted filenames Practice policy USINg scripted Stop using scripted you must rename the filenames filenames current policy or create a new policy otherwise new backups will not deduplicate Be aware that there will be no deduplication between the new and old policies USINg CA2 policies continue to use the then you should not that are rendering CA2 algorithm change the satisfactory deduplication algorithm deduplication ratios uUSINg CA2
232. fications tab Should be cleaned up of any ERROR messages or the highest level will still show as warning critical To delete any Notification from the Notifications screen select the notification by clicking on the box beside that notification and then click Delete Selected The selected notification is deleted from the list of notifications on the Notification screen Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The notifications list uses the following color coding Red Failure events Yellow Events showing a component is not in a fully functional state Green Events indicating an improvement in component status or those that are informational only NOTE Under some conditions the Console Manager may not be able to properly classify an event for example when optional hardware is MISSING or the event came from an external source that did not provide information In this case the Console Manager considers the event severity to be UNKNOWN and displays a black question mark An event generated in this state is often due to a completely unexpected occurrence or configuration Chassis Status Screen The Chassis Status screen is displayed when you select Chassis system name from the navigation tree oo a OO ll Ln os a a _ Chassis br sep3 sepaton com 0 Egad Colas Rete Crease lban Clear All Fauis MAINTEHARCE T I niall License H ma Pronssi Hicees al LUH Mapping H
233. field This name may be up to 32 characters in length NOTE You can also modify an existing hostname using these steps 3 4 Repeat step 2 for each host you want to identify with an alias Click the checkbox beside each host whose name you have just entered or modified Click Rename Hosts to apply the changes A confirmation message appears indicating that the changes have been applied Disabling a Host on the SAN By default all host servers auto discovered by the S Series system are enabled to see all virtual devices that are defined in the S Series system These servers can be disabled so that no S Series system devices are available Conversely a previously disabled host can be enabled making the S Series system devices available to it l Navigate to the Host Setup screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host Setup The Host Setup screen is displayed Figure 6 1 Click the checkbox beside each host to disable to select it Click Disable Hosts to apply the state change The screen refreshes with a host state of Disabled for those hosts Enabling a Previously Disabled Host 1 Navigate to the Host Setup screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host Setup The Host Setup screen is displayed Figure 6 1 Click the checkbox beside each host to enable to select it Click Enable Hosts to apply the state change The screen refreshes with a host state of Enabled for those hosts
234. following screen is displayed ATE or ob Bis et ob 6 Figure 3 12 Summary For Slots Screen The Slots screen displays the slot number for each cartridge its barcode current cartridge status local library copy pool and when it was last mirrored The Cartridge Status allows you to see which cartridges are not in the state replication pending i e they have already replicated or have not been modified since replication was enabled which cartridges are in the queue awaiting replication within the specified window and which cartridges are actively replicating over the LAN WAN link The Last Mirrored shows the date and timestamp of the last successful replication The following table lists various Cartridge States in the destination library Table 3 2 Cartridge States Status Message Description This cartridge is not part of any Mirror Copy Pool Adding Cartridge Copying the header from the target cartridge to this newly created source cartridge Up To Date The target and source cartridges have the same contents Waiting for Waiting for data from the backup application to append or Backup Data overwrite the cartridge Secondly a cartridge can get into this state when the barcode for the source cartridge already existed on the source system when the Mirror Copy Pool was created The cartridge has been loaded into a drive by the backup application Backup Delta differencing deduplication technology is runnin
235. for instructions on how to set up this feature CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Figure 2 35 Storage Pool Selection 18 Click Next Step 2 31 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Hep pane Figure 2 36 Cartridge Summary 19 The new cartridges now exist and a summary of the emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed Click Next E Figure 2 37 Summary Screen The Create Library wizard has finished and a new library tape drive s and cartridges now exist and are summarized on the final page of the wizard These devices are accessible through the navigation tree 20 Click Return to exit the wizard and return to the System screen NOTE If the User Defined Host Access mode is enabled you must map these devices to hosts on the SAN See LUN Mapping on page 6 4 for more information Configuring the 1500 2 32 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Oversubscription and delta differencing deduplication technology Delta differencing deduplication technology automatically enables oversubscription of the S Series system s backend storage for each storage pool configured in your S Series system This option allows you to free up additional backend storage Graceful Shutdown at 98 Storage Pool Capacity To avoid filling up the backend storage warning notifications are displayed on the Notifications page when the consumed storage pool capacity reaches a user configured threshold
236. formation ge Fire Eats OF Tps image Fiepiicsiion LAN WAN Tenge Host Name gil Conmestw Ty si H Gg Configuration Bummnry gl import toss Hat Pubic Key Usar Mame Usar Private Key Destination Directory Report Start Hour 0 23 hre Raport interval Hrs HP ii 7 i eed Figure 3 6 LAN WAN Replication Target Settings Modified Successfully The global LAN WAN replication target configuration settings are applied for all existing and subsequent replication targets Creating LAN WAN Replication Targets NOTE The type of library must match on the source and target S Series systems Creating a LAN WAN Replication Target allows you to assign a library on the target S Series system where the replicated data will reside The global LAN WAN replication target configuration settings are applied to all the replication targets unless specified otherwise On the Target System 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The LAN WAN Replication Target screen is displayed 2 Select Create LAN WAN Replication Target in the Tasks bar The Create LAN WAN Replication Target wizard is displayed 3 14 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Pett Cancel Figure 3 7 Create LAN WAN Replication Target Step 1 J 4 10 Enter a LAN WAN Replication Target Name Select the library on the source system where you want to add the target
237. g S in pragre Figure 6 32 Support Ticket Archiving Screen e When the Support Ticket creation is complete a message along with the size of the Support Ticket is displayed SUPPORT THEKET Figure 6 33 New Support Ticket Creation Screen 4 To download the Support Ticket a Click Download on the Support Ticket screen to download the Support Ticket package b A File Download dialogue box is displayed Select Save c The default name is displayed in the File name field If desired navigate to another folder rename the file and click Save The support ticket file is saved to the designated location The Notifications page cites that the Support Ticket has been created Maintaining Your 1500 6 27 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual woteicatons a i a Capo Hisi fumes wsio dicti SALT la m He 5 620018480 ta yta F F r be cur ichel docs SWRI r AO30J p0 71 0 ip ID PE Fie 1 IZ PEN T 7 E T r mr f Y TE tree san B L a a IEH i Oke Suppo icom aet Mp M UUS iS 1 5 GEL Eh CUTE J Figure 6 34 Notifications Screen Performing System Maintenance Tasks The System Maintenance screen provides information about the software version and build number you are running the number of nodes being managed the Fibre Channel host ports licensed and their mode etc Figure 6 35 It also provides access to tasks that can be performed in an emergency under the direction of your Hitachi Customer Support repres
238. g commands to other devices and causing excessive command overhead e All the SAN media servers must follow the respective vendor s best practices guidelines for connecting over long distance high latency fiber links For example this could include recommended settings for the SCSI command timeout values Fibre Channel buffer credits or other applicable tuning parameters TSM and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology This section provides introductory information on the following TSM options along with how they might affect delta differencing deduplication ratios and results Collocation You should disable collocation because backups on the same cartridge will not deduplicate against one another Concurrent Mount Points The Oracle agent in relation to TSM drive mounts must consider the following The RMAN script defines the number of channels configured drive mounts The number of channels must be equal to the client node s maximum number of mount points Device Pathnames Operating system software particularly Windows can cause TSM device pathnames to get lost To avoid this reconfigure the TSM paths Otherwise set the SAN Autodiscovery for TSM to autodetect path or device name changes and update them Keep Mount Point Set the parameter KEEPMP to Yes This specifies that client nodes must retain the mount point during the entire session If policy definitions cause data to be stored to a disk storage pool
239. g Cartridges 6 15 WWPN 6 2 I ndex 8 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Hitachi Protection Platform S Series User Guide Hitachi Data Systems Corporate Headquarters 2845 Lafayette Street Santa Clara California 95050 2639 U S A www hds com Regional Contact I nformation Americas 1 408 970 1000 info hds com Europe Middle East and Africa 44 0 1753 618000 info emea hds com Asia Pacific 852 3189 7900 hds marketing apac hds com Hitachi Data Systems MK 95HPP006 00
240. g files for Array Information Core Files Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Information Network Information Proc Entries Process Information System Management Miscellaneous System and VTL Information Custom Allows you to select log files from the full list of components Click Create Ticket or Cancel to exit without creating the Support Ticket The S Series system gathers the system log files for each processing node for the components based on your selection The status of the Support Ticket creation process is displayed by a progress bar Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Module Name SRE Hode 0 SRE Node 1 In Progress Completed Core Files Pending Completed DeltaRemote Skipping Skipping DeltaStor Skipping Skipping Console Manager Skipping Skipping System Completed Completed Figure 6 31 Support Ticket Creation Status d While the Support Ticket is being created you can return to the Chassis page to continue working by clicking Return Upon completion of the Support Ticket generation a notification is displayed on the Notifications page If enabled email notifications are sent to the specified users citing the Support Ticket status You can return to the Support Ticket page to Download the new support ticket The gathered system trace log files and the components are archived in a tar file SUPPORT TICKET Data Gathering far all ReqQuIned module malet Archnvin
241. g on the Postprocessing cartridge Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Table 3 2 Cartridge States Status Message Description Out of Sync The source virtual cartridge has been updated by the backup application since the target cartridge was updated Also it goes into this state if you are outside of the replication Availability Window Mirror Scheduled Cartridge is waiting for a dependent cartridge to be mirrored to the source or an available job slot Cartridge is being replicated over the network Mirror Broken A problem was encountered mirroring the cartridge You can repair this problem using the Restart Broken Mirror option Restoring Cartridge is being restored from the target cartridge to the source cartridge Mirror Gathering the deduplication instructions needed for replication Preprocessing Mirror Cartridge is being rebuilt on the target system Postprocessing Managing Replication This section discusses procedures for performing functions that support or manipulate replication jobs LAN WAN Replication Library Operations The Hitachi Replication feature allows you to perform several library manipulation tasks to manage replication on your S Series systems Unmanage Library To manage a library is to enable replication by connecting the source library to a destination library that is already on the S Series system Until you manage the destin
242. g the systems connected via a 20 meter fiber cable Here is the best approach to configuring the S Series system in a high latency environment e Minimize the overhead associated with SCSI commands by increasing the NetBackup record size from its default setting of 64 KB to 256 KB The maximum record size supported by the delta differencing deduplication software is 512 KB e Provided adequate bandwidth is available on the fiber link you can implement a nominal increase in the number of concurrent data streams to increase the aggregate throughput You can do this by allocating more tape drives to the SAN media servers e But do not create too many data streams and thus oversubscribe the available bandwidth of the DWDM link e Regularly monitor the NetBackup media servers and fiber switches for error conditions to determine whether the link data flow is congested You can use Fibre Channel switch statistics or the backup applications data throughput statistics to determine if the load is distributed properly across all of the ports e Distribute the load evenly across all the S Series system node s ports You can do this by distributing the amount of the daily data to be backed up by NetBackup media servers evenly across each node Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual e Configure the SAN environment to only allow the media servers access to the system ports it requires This eliminates servers sendin
243. gement The Knowledge Management screen is displayed by clicking on the link Knowledge Management on the Dashboard screen The Knowledge Management screen is basically a repository of important articles and documents that provide information regarding various Hitachi products This information is divided into a set of articles meant for quick resolution of issues and detailed user documents for in depth product procedures The Knowledge Management screen provides links to the following 2 knowledge areas Knowledge Base This includes articles providing detailed description and resolution for certain support cases The articles on this page are constantly reviewed and revised for technical accuracy and effectiveness by the Hitachi Support Team The Knowledge Base screen includes a search criteria to search a particular article The search results are displayed on the screen along with their ID last modified date and title Clicking on the icon next to the ID will display the article details Product Documentation The Product Documentation page includes a set of product and support related documents The product documents include Software Installation Instructions Software Update Instructions Release Notes and User Manual The support documents include Maintenance Summary and Entitlements End of life Summary Bulletins and End of life Policy documents Maintaining Your 1500 6 65 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 6
244. gt Destination Libraries gt Mirror Copy Pools The list of all Mirror Copy Pools is displayed Figure 3 25 Click the name of the Mirror Copy Pool The Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed Figure 3 26 Click Change Local Library in the Tasks bar The Change Local Library screen is displayed Select the library and click Submit The Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed and a success dialog confirms that the local library has been changed successfully Editing the LAN WAN Policy 3 36 l Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt Mirror Copy Pools The list of all Mirror Copy Pools is displayed Figure 3 25 Click the name of the Mirror Copy Pool you want to edit The Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed Figure 3 26 Click Edit Policy in the Tasks bar The Edit LAN WAN Policy screen is displayed EDIT LAN WAN POWCY Sur Cancel Figure 3 29 Edit LAN WAN Policy Screen The Deduplication Timeout option allows you to schedule an automatic nondeduplicated replication in case a backup was not replicated for a specified number of hours This option is set to 12 hours by default To enable this option click the option hours and enter the number of hours Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 5 Enter the number of hours when tape image replication should notify you in case a cartridge is not replicated in the specified
245. h NetBackup Optimally use only a single storage pool to back up the same client with the same policy and on the same cartridge for improved deduplication ratios All the backup images on the same cartridge should have the same retention policy Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Factors that I mpact System Sizing and Deduplication Ratios In most cases full backups provide better deduplication ratios than incremental or cumulative backups And daily full backups provide more immediate deduplication benefit than weekly or monthly full backups Increasing the retention period also improves the delta differencing deduplication technology benefit But you must have a minimum of two backup sets retained on the system to achieve deduplication results although three or more backup sets is preferred Following are several considerations that impact system sizing and deduplication ratios e Backup policies data types retention periods backup data set size and cartridge sizes e Rate of data change e Backup file name changes e Incremental backups particularly of new data e The performance of deduplication including the ability to keep up with the rate of data ingress e Client software compression and encryption should be turned off for optimal deduplication performance Operational Considerations This section cites information that you should be aware of to most efficiently configure yo
246. h policy is equal to 2 Full_ backup Incremental_backup 1 67 which is the expected hardware compression size In practice due to the concurrent processing capabilities of the system previous generation backups are being differenced and undergoing space reclamation while others are being ingested so the landing zone is Somewhat smaller Note that operational errors can consume landing space If you perform a test backup of a new policy then abandon that policy the first backup is sitting in the landing zone waiting for another instance of the same policy to trigger deduplication You should expire and relabel cartridges that contain orphan policies Another source of orphan policies is retired or renamed clients Since delta differencing deduplication uses both the policy name and client name to optimize deduplication you should be rigorous about expiring and relabeling cartridges associated with clients that are no longer used e For optimal deduplication performance client software compression and encryption should be turned off Backup Job If the filename changes but the data in the backup set is the same for Naming example if the backup application appends a timestamp to the filename you should change the policy to CA2 NetBackup The client node name and policy must match for deduplication The node names must match for deduplication Oracle RMAN Backups of Oracle databases using RMAN directly from the Oracle
247. h your Hitachi Customer Support representative for assistance to use this feature properly As part of the oversubscription feature you need to specify a storage pool capacity threshold level for notification purposes When the consumed storage pool capacity reaches this threshold the Console Manager notifies you via email and alert messages that you need to add more storage Configuring the 1500 2 16 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring the Storage Capacity Alert Parameter 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis The Chassis Status screen is displayed 2 17 yste Chassis br sep3 sepaton com O Egad Collapse amp Remesi Tasks O Creak Lian O Clear All Fauts GENERAL MAINTEMAMCE Th BH OE TETIS m install License Edn Accounts on T73 A Sowar Up br sep3 sepaton com B Ser Status D Restore Com Cegreces D Sse Sane D Ghosh pamlings MS W100 19 10 Mss gt HOTIFICATION E E MANS 0Sa INFO bse sepaoncomn gt Pronessing Noii IADSA OST pugin version 17251 on media sarvar 152 165 150 may be incompaline shouid be 14 OT SenG sapanon gt oa BONIS OFS initdizeon for noe completed br sen3 sepan cam gt Razon r Figure 2 11 Chassis Status Screen 2 Specify a percentage value for the Storage Capacity Alert parameter This percentage value is the threshold of available storage pool space remaining for alert notification This percentage value applies to a
248. hat is not a part of echo copy pool does not move the source cartridge The same behavior applies if the target cartridge is ejected Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual e Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library or to a new slot in the same library within a new echo copy pool causes the source cartridge to disappear from the echo copy pool and moves it from its existing library The results in this scenario may vary and result in different behaviors depending on the order in which the cartridges were moved Changing Cartridge Capacity 1 To change a cartridge s capacity enter a new value that represents the desired capacity in GB for that cartridge and click Update Changing Write Access Do not make any cartridge s used by tape image replication read only Tape image replication does not support read only cartridges 1 To change a cartridge s access from Read Write to Read Only or vice versa select the desired access mode from the drop down list for that cartridge and click Update 2 Repeat the above steps for each cartridge whose write access you want to change NOTE The Console Manager warns you if you attempt to move more cartridges to a library than there are slots available It also warns you if you attempt to change cartridge settings for a cartridge currently in use or if you attempt to increase the cartridge size when there is not enough spac
249. he contact profile Summary Enter the Summary of the issue Description Enter the detailed Description of the issue You can enter any errors received steps to reproduce the issue and steps taken to resolve the issue prior to engaging Hitachi Customer Support Severity Select the Severity classifications The default Severity level is Severity 3 Priority Select the Priority of the case By default the option Medium is selected Click Create Case A new support case will be created The Case Search screen is displayed by clicking on the link Case Search Figure 6 52 The Case Search screen provides a number of filter options to search a particular Support case The search results are listed on the screen based on your selection To Search an Existing Case l Click on the link Case Search The Case Search screen is displayed Home gt Customer Support gt Case Search Case Search Number Sewerity Highest Sewerity Account Priority Jira Site Status Vendor XRef Contact Visibility Customer XRef Owner Serial Root Cause Case Type OEM Serial RC Category Case Component Resolution RC Summary Case Module Summary Description Activity Wildcard Queue DL Event DL Reason Not Applicab DU Event DU Reason Not Applicab Has JIRA Include Closed F Rows 13 Scan Reset 13 Search Results CASE NUMBER STATUS SITE LOCATION OWAER CONTACT SUMMARY SEV UPDATED AGE r
250. he latest status and action plan at all times The HPP support portal has updated technical news and bulletins to keep you informed about changes and new features in the product and information to help ensure you remain current with the latest releases The portal also provides online account management features allowing you to quickly and easily provide updates to your company s profile including active contacts and important notes for Hitachi to be aware of such as after hours contacts the escalation process and parts delivery instructions to name a few You can visit the Hitachi HPP support portal at https deltaview sepaton com Click on the New User link to begin the secure registration process Benefits of Delta Differencing Deduplication and Tape I mage Replication Some key benefits of the S Series Data Protection platform include e Multiprotocol support including OpenStorage OST e Fast Time to Safety e Fast Restore for data retrieval and vaulting e Superior Console Management and Reporting e Scalable Architecture e WAN Optimization Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 1 6 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Keeps Pace with Data Growth If more storage capacity is needed simply install additional disk arrays Once the new storage is configured and added to an existing storage pool the S Series platform immediately incorporates the additional disk drives for data storage Conso
251. he replication target offline 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed 2 Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Figure 3 19 3 Click Offline in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click OK to confirm that you want to place the selected target offline The following screen is displayed Tasks GEG Giurie Ola Manage Hae VIL G Orina thy Figure 3 24 Offline Replication Target Screen 3 32 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual When a replication target is placed offline all the replication jobs are canceled Placing The Replication Target Online The S Series system s Replication feature allows you to place a previously offline target online if required To place the replication target online 1 Click Replication gt Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Targets The Summary of all LAN WAN Replication Targets screen is displayed 2 Click the target name from the list of targets to edit target details The Target Details screen is displayed Figure 3 19 3 Click Online in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Mirror Copy Pool Operations Hitachi allows you to perform several Mirror Copy Pool manipulation tasks to manage replication on your S Series systems Deleting an Ex
252. healthy and ready for configuration and monitoring Dashboard Screen The Dashboard6 screen is the primary S Series Console Manager display Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console ro Dashboard Last Login 037345 1532 25 Genie suriy siminisirsior F lasi begin aie amd Gere ls bmioarrent Overall Health Status ng System Healthy Hostname HITACHI Inspire the Next System Capacity os P Io 5 Reserved for System 851 03 GE m Used Capacity 3 86 GB E Available Capacity 73506 42 GB Overall Storage Savings Space Savings from Deduplication i Logical Data Used Capacity m Data m m Data m Space Savings 77 31 savings Savings 77 31 savings 77 31 m Data m Space Savings 77 31 savings Figure 1 6 Dashboard Screen Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 12 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The left pane displays the S Series system to be managed through this Console Manager The image shows the overall health status of the S Series system and lists the S Series system by its user defined host name If no host name is specified for the S Series system the system IP address shows the system name default The right pane provides a graphical view of the overall delta differencing deduplication technology statistics and the deduplicated storage savings graph The Overall Storage Savings shows the total amount of System Data the
253. hem LAN Seeding LAN seeding involves collocating the target S Series system with the source S Series system to create a mirror as fast as possible then transporting the target S Series system to the remote data center This method is attractive because it allows the backup operator to test procedures much more quickly and to test the recovery procedure locally using a spare media server Typically only a few days elapse before the target is brought online again and replication can continue Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 11 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual WAN Seeding WAN seeding involves mirroring an S Series system and database across a WAN link to matching equipment at the remote data center Depending on the bandwidth of the WAN connection this can be very time consuming Realistically as your use of replication grows you will find that you are employing WAN seeding for new backup policies so even if you started with a LAN seeding approach you will almost always do some WAN seeding It is important to understand how often new policies will be introduced and how much data they will generate because the seeding process requires extra bandwidth and extra landing space on the target system Configuring Tape I mage Replication Tape image replication is an option that enables you to replicate data over a LAN WAN between Hitachi s S Series systems using cartridge mirroring technology The mirroring te
254. ibrary Creation Summary 2 23 2 32 Library Emulation Types create library 2 18 2 27 Library Emulations creating cartridges 2 27 Library Parameters Screen 2 19 2 27 Library Summary Screen 6 20 Link Speed Parameter C 7 Linux Device Configuration 6 51 Logical Data data logical 1 13 5 3 LUN Mapping clear the devices mapped to a host 6 11 clear the hosts mapped 6 8 disabling LUN mapping 6 12 map devices on a particular node 6 7 mapping devices to a host 6 9 mapping hosts to a device 6 5 mapping hosts to a device assign one or more hosts 6 6 view detailed information about a device 6 8 M Mail Server Setup 2 9 maintenance mode 6 32 Maintenance Tasks edit accounts 2 4 restore configuration 6 24 save config 6 23 Support Ticket 6 25 System Maintenance 6 28 user preferences 2 5 Managing Replication 5 47 configuration 3 37 editing cartridge summary configuration 3 38 editing GUI configuration 3 40 editing LAN WAN policy 3 36 LAN WAN replication library operations 3 21 copy now 3 24 nondeduplicated copy 3 25 placing the destination library in an offline and online status 3 22 restart broken mirror 3 26 restore media 3 23 unmanage library 3 21 LAN WAN replication target operations 3 2 7 mirror copy pool operations 3 33 viewing existing configuration 3 37 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Managing Source Replication Library 3 16 Manually Add Hosts 6 4 Mapping Hosts to a Device 6 5 Maximizing Deduplication Effecti
255. ic parameters for your delta differencing deduplication technology configuration Renaming Unknown Data Types Delta differencing deduplication technology supports deduplication for all data types The delta differencing deduplication technology Configuration screen displays a list of backup applications and data types There can be certain data types however that do not fall under a specified category Delta differencing deduplication technology allows you to rename these unknown data types to user defined names To rename an unknown data type 1 Navigate to the delta differencing deduplication technology screen System gt Chassis gt Deduplication 2 37 Configuring the S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 2 Either select the Configuration link in the Task bar or navigate to the Configuration link in the navigation tree The Configuration screen is displayed I 4 P Oo a 0 0 0 0 0 9 FIGURE 2 40 Configuration Screen The unknown data type will display an Edit link next to the View link 3 Click the Edit link beside the unknown data type The following screen is displayed gu a Je Te fii E niim Ta CIE FIGURE 2 41 Rename Special Agent Data Type 4 Enter a name for the unknown data type and click Apply The screen refreshes and the new name appears in the list Laz Pa gt e Next I Dag ET JE cha vecupscation igen ey co aff sehen up Apt Data yr ei wan Ape FIGURE 2 42 Data
256. ical use of backup tapes Many companies perform a combination of full and incremental backups of their data on a regular basis These backups are often kept on site for rapid access in the event data recovery is needed due to human error i e accidental erasure of files a malicious computer program i e virus attack or a hardware fault i e hard drive crash Protecting against data loss due to disaster is the second most common use of backup tapes Here full backups or copies of full backups are made and transported away from the original data source These backup tapes are kept in this off site secure location for some period of time Should a disaster occur i e flood fire etc the off site tape can be retrieved and restored to an alternate data system to facilitate business recovery This off site media is often part of a rotation plan in which the media is cycled back to the source site for reuse on a regular schedule Providing a historical data record is the third most common use of backup tapes Tape copies of source data are kept for an extended periods of time as dictated for Sarbanes Oxley or HIPAA Health Insurance Portability amp Accountability Act of 1996 compliance This compliance determines the media rotation policy Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The Hitachi replication solution allows multiple S Series systems to be used in different ways in the
257. icated data will reside This library must have the same number of slots and cartridges to hold the replicated data from the source system You can create replication targets using either an existing library on the target S Series system or a newly created library While creating a replication target you also specify the start and end slots of the library to hold the replicated data The target system must have a virtual library and cartridges of the same type and barcode as on the source to receive replicated data A target S Series system can have multiple replication targets You create multiple replication targets on a single target system by mapping different libraries or different slot ranges within a single library You then map the replication target to the library on the source S Series system and reserve the specified library and slots for replicated data only Destination or Replication Libraries A Destination Library is the term used to identify the replication library on the source system The destination library is also called the replication library The target S Series system is linked to the source S Series system using the IP address or the host name of the target system After the target system is connected to the source S Series system and the desired target is selected and authenticated the available targets are displayed on the source S Series system under Destination Libraries as Replication Library Adding replica
258. ication job history table provides a graphical view of the transfer rates at MB per second for the replication jobs listed in the table The source and the destination library or host names are also listed beside the performance graph 5 45 Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Job Summary The Job Summary screen allows you to view detailed job summary about replication jobs for both the source and target S Series systems To view a replication job summary of the source or the target system 1 Click Replication gt Job Reporting gt Job Summary Job Summary Ditke Eads ipia Dea JB SL LER Y Lar anian ed Succeed laba Raaz hahida e Faea Badia Figure 5 41 Job Summary Screen Enter the number of days the Job Summary includes Select the location type the default is Source Select Update The screen refreshes and job history summary table updates to include jobs based on the new criteria The Job Summary table displays the details about a replication job These details include the location name number of successful jobs number of rescheduled jobs and the number of failed jobs Replication Taking Too Long If replications are taking longer than expected the link quality may have dropped or there could be hardware problems anywhere in the path from the source network interface card NIC to the target NIC causing packet retries Rescheduled replications can also indicate that a link ha
259. idge if you want to view replication status of a particular cartridge 3 Select the Job Status from the drop down menu if you want to view jobs at a particular job status Enter the Nodeld if you want to view replication jobs on a particular node 5 Select location type Click Update The screen refreshes and displays the list of replication jobs as per the selected filters Pause Resume and Cancel Replication J obs The Current Status screen allows you to perform the following tasks Click the Pause button next to the cartridge barcode to pause L an active replication job Click the Play button next to the cartridge barcode to resume gt a paused replication job Click the Cancel button next to the cartridge barcode to x cancel an active or paused replication job Monitoring Your S1500 5 42 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Configuration J ob Reporting On the Job Reporting screen you can assign default settings for reports To configure job reporting on your source or target system 1 Click Replication gt Job Reporting gt Configuration 1 Job Reporting Configuration CONFIGURATION CUMALAT STATUS Figure 5 38 J ob Reporting Configuration Screen Complete the fields as appropriate 3 Click Submit 4 To Select Locations for Custom View select one of the locations The left dialog box shows the source and target systems that fall into the location category selected The right
260. iep 1 ol S Borage Seren Name and Credantials CREATE OST STORAGE SEAVER server Name OST STORAGE SERVER CREDENTIALS cane Figure 4 34 Destination Storage Server Name and Credentials Screen b Enter an OST Storage Server Name and the OST Storage Server Credentials including Username Password and Confirm Password Passwords must be at least 14 characters in length c Click Next Step The OST Configure Nodes for the Destination Storage Server screen Is displayed l O OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Diep 2 of 5 Conbgare Modes SRE Node SRE Hode Ho Pubt IF Assigned Cancal tresle Sone Serer Figure 4 35 Configure Nodes for the Destination Storage Server Screen d Click one of the available OST Master processing node listings and one or more including all of the available OST I O Node listings e Click Create Storage Server The wizard returns the message Storage Server lt Server Name gt successfully created Details for the Destination Storage Server are also displayed 4 26 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A 1 R Replication User Guide Destination Disk Volume oO OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Riep Fol S Gonhigere Hak Volos image Sever Vimahi socorsistally onsale slatag Sareer Mame Creat Piik Wolof Figure 4 36 Destination Storage Server Details Screen 4 Click Create Disk Volume s The Create OST Disk Volume screen is displayed O OST Storage S
261. igure 5 16 The MegaRAID Storage Manager window provides you with three different views e Dashboard View e Physical View e Logical View MSM Dashboard View The MSM Dashboard screen provides an overview of the backend storage and devices Figure 5 16 The Dashboard screen includes e Properties of the virtual drives and the physical drives e Total capacity configured capacity and unconfigured capacity e Background operations in progress including Initialization or a RAID group Consistency Check e MSM features and their status enabled or disabled e Links to the online help e Event log panel Monitoring Your 1500 5 14 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 5 15 MegaRAID Storage Manager 9 00 0100 DEAR Manage Log Help TORDO i MegaRAID Storage Manager Views f LSI Welcome MegaGuest View Only Log Off Dashboard Physicgl Logical Controller LSI MegaRAID SAS 9280 4i e Bus 9 Dev 0 Properties Usage Capacity Background Opergkions Backg round Status Optimal I nfo rmation virtual drive operations in Operatio ns Enclosures 1 ae Total capacity 10 910 TB Backplanes o Log Off oO Configured Capacity F gt Drives 12 10 910 TB Drive operations in progress 0 Li n k Drive grou Unconfigured Capacity Ind Properties A j Bytes E Virtual Drivets 1 View server profile More details MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Act
262. ill no longer receive email alerts Configuring the 1500 2 8 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Setting Up a Mail Server For users to receive notifications and reports from the S Series system of events errors and system configuration settings you must configure the mail server to process emails received from the S Series system Adding a Mail Server To configure your main server from the Notifications screen 1 Click Mail Server Setup in the Tasks bar The Mail Server Setup screen is displayed 0 cae Serve Setup Task Noliicalions Sotup Ropon Setup 0 SNMP Setup O FIGURE 2 6 Mail Server Setup Screen 2 Enter the address for the mail server that processes messages from the S Series system 3 Select the chassis that uses the mail server from the listings Click Add to add the mail server settings to the Mail Server list 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each additional mail server you want to add to the Mail Server list Deleting a Existing Mail Server To remove an email server from the list of available mail servers on the Mail Server Setup screen 1 Click Remove for the server you want to delete from the list The list refreshes and no longer displays the deleted server Setting up Reports The S Series system has powerful reporting capabilities that allow you to download or send reports via email on System Capacity Cartridge to Backup Summary Backup Summary Policy Cartridge Summary OST
263. ils 192168 11 113 Lotus_Notes io O Umanga O Re llanage LAW VIAN Hepicabon lagel Offline Figure 3 9 Destination Library Details Screen The Destination Library Details screen displays the name of the library the type of library number of simultaneous transfers number of slots the management URL and its current availability status Creating Mirror Copy Pools Mirror copy acts as a transparent disk cache to the physical library so that the backup application writes to virtual cartridges in the virtual library Replication then automatically schedules the copies from virtual cartridges to their matching physical cartridges with the same barcodes based on the replication policies Tape image replication without deduplication copies the entire virtual cartridge from the source system to the target system In the case of tape image replication with deduplication the virtual cartridge is replicated after delta differencing on the source system This ensures that only data that has changed is transmitted over the network to the target system NOTE Only backups performed after the Mirror Copy Pool is created are replicated Existing backups are not replicated Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 17 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 3 18 On the Source System Li 10 ll Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries You may need to expand the
264. imary and secondary DNS server IP addresses See Network Configuration Settings on page 4 1 for information on changing the IP address gateway address net mask primary and secondary DNS for your processing nodes Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 9 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual On the Source System Create a virtual library tape drive and cartridges to receive backup data See Creating Virtual Devices on page 5 1for information on creating virtual devices On the Target System Create a virtual library tape drive and cartridges of the same size type and barcode as those on the source system Licensing Tape I mage Replication Table 3 1 provides information about licensing requirements to allow you to run tape image replication For customers that require replication and deduplication Table 3 1 Replication and Deduplication License License Key Key Required Required Differencing Deduplication Tape Image Replication In an active active scenario each S Series system must serve as a source and a target In a many to one scenario there are multiple S Series systems replicating to a single S Series system Since each source must have an associated target there will multiple targets on the target S Series system all of which must be licensed 3 10 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User M
265. includes the default compression setting unencrypted data transfer port number and the maximum number of jobs to run on master node To edit global LAN WAN replication target settings 1 Click Replication gt Configuration Summary 2 Either click the Edit Global LAN WAN Replication Target link in the Tasks bar or navigate to the Global LAN WAN Replication Target link in the navigation tree The Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings screen is displayed AN Replication Target Settings GLOBAL LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGET CONFIGURATION SETTINGS Figure 3 31 Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings Screen 3 38 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 3 Tape image replication allows you to use a Default compression in addition to deduplication Select whether the Default compression setting for LAN WAN replication targets is on or off by default 4 Enter the unencrypted data transfer port number for all LAN WAN Replication transfers This is the TCP IP port number that will be used for replication data transfers Default is port 5570 5 Enter the maximum number of jobs to run on master node Click Submit If the settings were configured successfully a confirmation message appears The global LAN WAN replication target configuration settings are applied for all existing and subsequent replication targets Editing J ob Reporting
266. information HS0001 Capacity D Logical Date Used Capacity Cartridge Utilization Alha Capacity Logical Data Used Lapackhy Ratio Backups on this Cartridge cme Backup lame Paley Backup Tins Type Figure 5 23 Cartridge Capacity Screen The Cartridge Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 7 Cartridge Capacity Table Cartridge Capacity Table Allocated Total storage capacity allocated to the Cartridge This capacity Capacity might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether deduplicated or not The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity The Cartridge Backup Capacity table lists the following capacity values Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Table 5 8 Cartridge Backup Capacity Table Cartridge Backup Capacity Table The current deduplication state of the backup The possible deduplication states are Waiting for Next Backup Delta diff in Process Pending Reclamation Partially Reclaimed Dedupe Complete and No Match Found Backup Name The backup name Policy The backup policy name Backup Time The VTL time when the data was backed up Type The backup type for example full incremental Ratio The deduplication ratio obtained Libraries View Navigate to the Libraries link on the navigation tree System
267. ing Hosts to a Device Device View The Device View allows you to define your mapping scheme from the virtual device view by allowing you to map hosts to each device Each device can have multiple hosts mapped to it The virtual devices are presented based on the library The Device View screen displays a library and all tape drives associated with that library Figure 6 4 The default library for this view is Library_0 When the User Defined mode is first enabled no hosts are mapped to any of these devices In the Device View the following actions are possible e Assign one or more hosts to a device e Restrict the devices shown in the list to only those defined on a particular node e View detailed information about a specific device e Clear all hosts mapped to one or more devices Maintaining Your 1500 6 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Assigning One or More Hosts to a Device Follow these steps to map one or more hosts to a device 1 Navigate to the Device View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Device View The Device View screen is displayed Tasks Cong HostAccess Mode Change Hoel Seu Hort View Esie Davis Tps Frossgsing Hoda id Prone sing Port Thimi Mepp d Hosts ereer eee u a Figure 6 4 Device View Screen 2 Select the library to map hosts from the Library drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that library and all tape drives as
268. ing LUN Mapping 000 eee aae 6 4 Mapping Hosts to a Device Device View 6 5 Assigning One or More Hosts to a Device 6 6 Mapping Devices ona Node 00 eee 6 7 Viewing Detailed Information About a Specific Device 6 8 Clearing All Host Mapping sanaaa aaa 6 8 Mapping Devices to a Host Host View 6 9 Assigning One or More Devices to aHost 6 9 Mapping DevicesonaNode 0000 ee eee 6 10 Viewing Detailed Information About a Specific Device 6 11 Clearing All Host Mapping 0 00 ee ees 6 11 Disabling LUN Mapping 0 00 eee eee 6 12 Editing Cartridges naaa a es 6 12 Moving CartridgeS 1 6 14 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Contents 5 Moving Cartridges Used by Tape Image Replication 6 14 Changing Cartridge Capacity 0058 6 15 Changing Write AcceSS 1 0 ee 6 15 Deleting Cartridges aaa 6 15 Deleting Cartridges Used by Tape Image Replication 6 16 Deleting Cartridges with Data Erasure 6 17 Deleting Cartridges without Data Erasure 6 18 EGItING LIDFaNleS weno 4 4 84 oaa GEM ed ee hee es a 6 18 Destroying a Library 6 20 Destroying a Tape Drive 00 6 22 Saving Configuration Settings 0 0 eee 6 23 Restoring Configuration Settings 0000e 6 24 Creating a Support Ticket oauan aaa eee 6 25 Performing System Maintenance TaskS 6 28
269. inst harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian compliance statement Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Regulatory Compliance Notices E 1 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada European Union notice EU Products with the CE Marking comply with both the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC and the RoHS Directive 2011 65 EU issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms the equivalent international standards are in parenthesis EN55022 Class A Limit Electromagnetic Interference EN55024 EN61000 4 2 3 4 5 6 8 11 Electromagnetic Immunity EN61000 3 2 12 Power Line Harmonics EN61000 3 3
270. ion Backup Filters screen is displayed i E feszevel mjes 300A A AAE aa O HEBD te Figure 5 31 Backup Filters Screen 2 Select the backup Agents for which you want to view the backups By default all agents are selected Click the checkbox beside the agent to deselect an agent 3 Select the Backup Type Full or Incremental By default both backup types are selected Click the checkbox beside the type to deselect a type if trying to view either full or incremental backups NOTE Select the Backup Type Full for TSM backup sets because TSM backups are viewed as full backups by the S Series system software 4 Select the State of the backup The backup can be in any of the states shown in Table 5 13 TABLE 5 13 Backup State Icons Definition Meaning Waiting for Next The backup data is yet to be deduplicated Backup Delta diff in Process The delta differencing of the backups has started oa ie Reclamation The space reclamation task is pending o M Reclaimed One or more cartridges that make up the backup have been reclaimed Monitoring Your 1500 5 32 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual TABLE 5 13 Backup State Icons Icon Definition Meaning Dedupe Complete Deduplication process has been completed and the space has been reclaimed No Match Found No corresponding matching backup sets 2 found This includes backups such as backup sets which are too small backup sets in an
271. ions claims for non payment the non excludable statutory rights of consumers for example under laws providing for strict product liability the breach of any obligation of confidence and our breaches of these Software License Terms Except for the immediately preceding sentence our indemnity obligations as described in Section 10 and to the extent not prohibited by applicable law a HDS and Your maximum aggregate liability for all claims relating to all Software licensed to You under these Software License Terms whether for breach of contract breach of warranty or in tort including negligence will be limited to the amount paid for the particular Software which is the subject matter of the claim up to a maximum of two million US dollars U S 2 000 000 and b neither You nor HDS will be liable for any indirect punitive special incidental or consequential damages in connection with or arising out of the Software License Terms including without limitation loss of business revenue profits goodwill use data or other economic advantage however they arise whether in breach of contract breach of warranty or in tort including negligence and even if that party has previously been advised of the possibility of such damages End User License Agreement G 3 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 12 Confidential Information Each of us must keep each other s Confidential Information confidential using the same degr
272. ions Help O li lt j _ _ niin MegaRAID RAIDS Enabled e Create virtual drive How to use MSM ae ee Create CacheCade 55D Caching How to create virtual drive Help Li n ks Load configuration How to enable MegaRAID Advanced Software Options Update Firmware Glossary Silence alarm MSM Features Event Log and Status Panel Error Level Date Time Description Informatio 2011 04 19 13 28 29 Successful log on to the server User MegaGuest Client 192 168 2 146 Access Mode View only Client Time 2011 04 19 13 2 Informatio 2011 04 19 13 00 33 Controller ID 0 Battery relearn in progress Informatio 2011 04 19 13 00 32 Controller ID Battery is discharging Informatio 201 1 04 19 13 00 03 Controller ID Policy change on YD O Current Current Write Policy Write Through Power Save Policy Default None Warning 1 2011 04 19 13 00 03 Controller ID 0 BBU disabled changing WEB logical drives to WT Informatio 2011 04 19 13 00 03 Controller ID O Battery relearn started InFormatio 2011 04 19 12 28 00 Successful log out from the server User root Client 192 168 2 146 Client Time 2011 04 19 12 28 00 Informatio 2011 04 19 12 27 30 Successful log on to the server User root Client 192 168 2 146 Access Mode Full Client Time 2011 04 19 12 27 29 Informatio 2011 04 19 09 43 14 Controller ID 0 Fan speed changed on enclosure PortO 3 1 Fan 10 Informatio 2011 0
273. isk Volumes View Capacity Manager screens provide an additional disk volumes view if you have the Hitachi OpenStorage OST plug in installed on your S Series system Navigate to the Disk Volumes link on the navigation tree System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Disk Volumes The Disk Volumes view Is displayed Disk Volumes Expand Collapse Refresh E 9 Chassis qa40v1 sepaton com 3 5 Disk Volumes All El ij Capacity Storage Pools 1 1 0f1 a prar r m Pa i S gt Libraries Disk Volume Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio as Disk Volumes Cartridges OST_DP2 1 76 TB 85 78 GB 5 88 GB 1 76 TB Figure 5 25 Disk Volumes Capacity Screen The Disk Volumes screen displays the list of disk volumes capacity utilization in your S Series system The Disk Volumes Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 10 Disk Volumes Capacity Table Disk Volumes Capacity Table Disk Volume The name of the disk volume Allocated The total storage capacity allocated to the Disk Volume The Capacity allocated capacity can be as high as the maximum capacity of a storage pool containing the disk volume Logical Data The size of all backup data in the Disk Volume currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the Disk Volume used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage capacity in the Disk Volume currentl
274. isting Mirror Copy Pool When a Mirror Copy Pool is no longer needed or when it should be restructured you should delete it 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt Mirror Copy Pools The list of all Mirror Copy Pools is displayed SUMMARY FOR ALL MIRROR COPY POOLS 2 Click the name of the Mirror Copy Pool the Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 33 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual liiki O Dusi OER olla Q Chinga Lors ram Eii Poicy Erpin lapet tso Lan ian Transier Figure 3 26 Mirror Copy Pool Details Screen 3 Click Delete in the Tasks bar to delete the Mirror Copy Pool A dialog is displayed 4 Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the Mirror Copy Pool The system takes a few moments and a success dialog appears on the screen and the Mirror Copy Pool is successfully deleted NOTE Deleting a pool moves the associated virtual tapes into the FireSafe Editing the Slot Maps Slot mapping refers to the assignment of physical slots in a library to correspond to a specific virtual Mirror Copy Pool Mapping occurs as a Mirror Copy Pool is created however mapping can be changed at any time To Edit Slot Maps On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt Mirror Copy Pools The list of all Mirror Copy Pools is displayed Figure 3 25 2 Click the name of the Mirror Copy Pool you want to ed
275. istration form is displayed Maintaining Your 1500 6 55 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Hitachi Data Systems HITACHI Inspire the Next Hitachi Protection Platform Support Portal First Name Last Name Email Address Register Figure 6 45 New User Registration Form b Enter the First Name Last Name and Email Address You must enter your company provided email address only Entering any other email address will result in a failure to complete the registration process Click Register An email confirming your registration will be sent to you Click the link provided in the email and enter your profile information gt pa oA A confirmation email with the temporary password will be sent to you Upon entry of a valid login and password the HPP support portal displays the Dashboard screen Figure 6 46 HPP Support Portal I nformation The HPP support portal provides you with information and tasks that allow you to have an interactive customer experience The HPP support portal screens are designed to provide you a quick access on your account activity and the vast knowledge base on support and product related documents The HPP support portal provides five main screens to perform support tasks access company and product related information and perform a number of account activities These screens are 6 56 Dashboard Account Management Customer Support Knowledge Management Product Analy
276. it The Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed Figure 3 26 3 Click EditSlotMaps inthe Tasks bar The Edit Slot Maps screen is displayed Figure 3 27 3 34 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Edit Shot Maps Take Show Lop Pool Deisis EDIT SLOT MAPS Siar Sant End jane Actions Figure 3 27 Edit Slot Maps Screen The available slots for this target are displayed 4 Enter the Start Slot and the End Slot under Add Additional Slots and click Add to add additional slots 5 If you want to edit the current slots click Edit under Actions The following screen is displayed eae Show Copy Pool helaits EDIT SLOT MAP Figure 3 28 Edit Slot Map Screen Enter the new Start Slot and the End Slot 7 Click Submit The Mirror Copy Details screen is displayed and the changed slot information is reflected under the Slot Maps 3 35 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Changing Local Library Tape image replication allows you to modify the replication library on the source system associated with a Mirror Copy Pool Reasons to change the local library in a Mirror Copy Pool include the need to replicate a different library on the target without creating a new Mirror Copy Pool Changing the local library does not change Mirror Copy Pool settings On the Source System l 4 Click Replication
277. ith an IA 32 32 bit Intel Architecture processor or an EM64T 64 bit processor also compatible with SPARC V9 architecture based systems e A minimum of 256 Mbytes of system memory 512 Mbytes is recommended e A drive with at least 400 Mbytes of available free space Solaris 10 SPARC requires a minimum of 640 Mbytes available free Space e The supported operating systems for MegaRAID Storage Manager software are as follows e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2008R2 Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista and Microsoft Windows 7 e Red Hat Linux 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 e Solaris 10 x86 SPARC e SuSE Linux SLES 9 10 and 11 with the latest updates and service packs e VMware ESX 4 0 and ESXi 4 1 also Known as COSLess it is an embedded version of VMware that does not have a console to do configuration Refer to your server documentation and the operating system documentation for more information on hardware and operating system requirements 5 7 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Installing the LSI MegaRAI D SAS Manager Software To be able to view the S Series backend storage you must use the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager MSM software Version 9280 4i4e 1 You can download the client software from the LSI Web site at the following locations Copy the appropriate address into a Web browser and click Enter Windows Client
278. ix Preferred Paths Wizard step 1 4 To change the data path for all storage LUNs to the preferred path click Apply button or Cancel to cancel the action You may need to scroll down to access the button 5 The screen refreshes and displays a message that the operation is complete Click Return to return to the Storage LUN Details screen The Storage LUNs Details screen shows the data path in use for each Storage LUN If the source of the data path failure was not resolved the S Series system will again failover to the preferred data path Incompatible Fibre Channel Port Settings Description Solution Under certain conditions the fibre channel host port settings may not be compatible with your environment These settings may include the loop ID topology and the link speed for each port The Fibre Channel host ports ports 0 and 1 have configurable settings that allow you to set the loop ID topology and link speed for each port In general the default values need not be changed for most environments Each parameter has a Preferred value that you set and an Actual value that is in use NOTE The Fibre Channel ports associated with the disk array enclosures ports 2 and 3 are not configurable To configure Fibre Channel host port settings 1 Navigate to the Processing Ports screen System gt Chassis gt Processing Nodes gt Processing Ports for the processing node on which you want to change Fibre Ch
279. k View Log in the Tasks bar The Cartridge View Log screen is displayed The date and time of each replication activity is listed under the date column The message column lists the cartridge barcode and the replication activities performed on the cartridge Since the log file contains an extensive list of replication activities you will need to scroll down to view the complete activity log file of a cartridge 1 Click Back to return to the Cartridge Details screen Replicating Wholesale Cartridges Cartridges may be transferred wholesale because there is no previous generation backup on the target system While this is normal during the seeding process if this occurs during normal operations it may be caused by a backup client creating new backup policies that you have not been informed about Moreover if the administrator of the client system is testing policies that are discarded without being run more than once the source and target systems will accumulate a lot of orphan policies that waste Space and bandwidth Orphan policies like all policies that have been run for the first time will display a status of waiting for next backup in the backup report Tracking down orphan policies is best done with your backup software s reporting tools Job Reporting Tape image replication allows you to customize and view replication job status and create history reports for the source and the target S Series systems This allows yo
280. k Volume OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Siep 3 ef 5 Configure Disk Volume s Slorape Ser Capet seccesstolly crease Cancel Create Disk Volumejsi System Dale and Time OR 17 4113 EST Figure 4 29 Source Storage Server Details Screen 2 Click Create Disk Volume s The Create OST Disk Volume screen is displayed OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Stop 4 of 5 Add Disk Volume CREATE GST WSR VELUME EFLECT A STORAGE POOL Sioage Poot Figure 4 30 Create OST Disk Volume Screen a Provide a Disk Volume Name and as necessary select a Storage Pool for this Disk Volume Storage Pool 1 is enabled by default b Click Create Disk Volume for the Source The wizard returns the message lt Disk Vol 1 gt has been successfully created in Storage Pool 1 Disk Volume details are also displayed 4 24 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide OST Storage Server Creation Wizard Slop 5 of 5 Configure mone Disk Volumes Cape V lumeni has been successtully created m storagePool_ 1 Desk olume Storage Poot Capedl volumed StoragePool_1 Crenie Ammer Dia oiue Figure 4 31 Disk Volume Successfully Created Screen c Click Return The Source Storage Server Status screen is displayed O Epari Colapse amp Retresh Tasks Eon Credeniais Edi Nade Comiguraton EditDist Volume Configuration Delete Storage Server E Ag Chassis tapreni sangate nem
281. ker will retry on the next available cartridge This process will repeat until all of the available cartridges have been used This can be avoided if the backup is stopped manually A Backup Set that Spanned Cartridges Leaves Used Capacity in Cartridges that Are Not Relabeled A backup set spanned at least two cartridges and one of the cartridges was subsequently relabeled or overwritten Relabeling the cartridge removed any knowledge of the backup set from the S Series because the backup set was no longer available for deduplication However some Used Capacity remains on the other cartridge s And since the S Series no longer knows about the backup set associated with the Used Capacity it displays the message There are no backups for this cartridge In this instance you should relabel the other cartridge s Cartridge to Backup Summary Report NetBackup 2 35 The Cartridge to Backup Summary report helps you identify the space utilization of each cartridge This report lists the barcode of each cartridge disk space usage in bytes deduplication status and dependent cartridges if any exist 1 Generate a new Cartridge to Backup Summary report using the Report Setup option Notifications gt Report Setup 2 Identify the cartridge s that can be erased to create free storage using the Cartridge to Backup Summary report The following considerations can help you while identifying cartridges to erase delete e Cartridges that
282. l by the lock key oe Indicates the LEDs on the operation panel by lenses Bezel indicator O Bezel lock Notes 1 The LED lights green while the HDD is being accessed for rebuilding 2 Adummy tray is installed for an extension bay without an internal HDD S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 3 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Operations Panel The enclosure front panel incorporates an operations panel Figure A 2 The operations panel includes the Power Maintenance and Service LEDs and the Power and Service switches With Front bezel AU7706 Y AU7706 R O00000 0000 a Figure A 2 CR 220S Operation panel overview Table A 2 describes the LEDs and the buttons on the S1500 operations panel Table A 2 Operations panel switches and indicators Item Name State _ Description _ The POWER LED is turned on when the system unit is turned a in A Green On on by pressing the POWER switch MODE1 LED The lower LED is MODEO and the upper one is MODEL According to the lighting state of these two LEDs and the SERVICE LED the information displayed on MAINTENANCE LEDs will differ MopeoteD LED PE MAINTENANCE LEDs Green On Indicating the operation status of the system unit 4 SERVICE en The SERVICE LED turns on when a SERVICE switch either on anon io ee ee o aua front or the back side is pressed e 7 ACCESS LED Green On Accessing HOD SSD 2 hardw
283. l devices currently mapped to it Select the processing node from the View By drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to shown only the devices associated with the library residing on that particular node Choose the devices you want to map to the host from the Device drop down menu near the bottom of the screen For an individual device click the device name If you want to select multiple devices press the Shift key and click each device name Click Map The screen refreshes displaying all devices mapped to that host Repeat these steps to specify additional devices Do the following before performing any backup restore operations with that server Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Viewing Detailed I nformation About a Specific Device Perform the following steps to obtain more information about a device 1 Navigate to the Host View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host View The Host View screen is displayed Figure 6 6 2 Click the device name to view more information about that device The Status screen of that device is displayed Figure 6 7 displays the status screen for Library 0 This library has two hosts mapped to it Figure 6 7 Library Status Screen with Mapped Host
284. l not allow you to disable it However you should review this section to ensure it is configured appropriately Also Hitachi advises you to set up an email alert for when the configured storage pool capacity threshold is reached See Configuring Notifications a Mail Server Reports and SNMP Alerts on page 2 6 for more information on setting up these alerts When you create cartridges the S Series system defines those cartridges in the storage pool but does not reserve the amount of storage space specified for the cartridge size It is only when user data Is written to a cartridge by the backup application that storage space is consumed i Cartridges Taske O Creste Cannio Aci hence Barcode r a a idges Ps a An F A bai E R Cartridges Per Cartridge Details Barone Prefs inden lange Page co l co E ae Cariridges Fer Rame Page horags Foo Cartridges Per me Page co l pam Figure 2 10 Cartridge Summary This oversubscription feature permits configuring your system for anticipated storage growth When the oversubscription feature is enabled you can configure cartridges you anticipate you might need beyond your current capacity and later you can add physical storage seamlessly NOTE Use of this feature carries the risk of running out of physical storage capacity when not anticipated and requires careful planning of your storage needs and upgrades and a review of your policies Hitachi highly recommends that you consult wit
285. lable for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available for additional backup Capacity data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity Navigate to the Storage Pools link on the navigation tree System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Storage Pools The Storage Pools view is displayed Monitoring Your 1500 5 18 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 5 19 Storage Pools Storage Allocation by Pool GB StoragePool_2 35 262 05 ___ StoragePool_3 47 016 07 StoragePool_1 35 262 05 Storage Pools All 1 3of3 Storage Pool Total Physical Capacity Reserved for System Usable Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio StoragePool_1 35 26 TB 418 36 GB 34 84 TB 27 89 TB 12 70 TB 22 15 TB Fey Figure 5 20 Storage Allocation by Pool Screen The Storage Pools screen displays the statistical graph depicting all the storage pools in your S Series system The graph also displays the total capacity of each storage pool The Storage Pool Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 2 Storage Pool Capacity Table Storage Pool Capacity Table
286. lication TargetS 0000 eee 3 7 Destination or Replication Libraries 3 7 Prerequisites for Using Tape Image Replication 3 9 Licensing Tape Image Replication nnna auaa aaa 3 10 Seeding Initial Data on S Series Replication Systems 3 11 LAN Seeding naua a 3 11 WAN Seeding ouaaa aaa a 3 12 Configuring Tape Image Replication 3 12 Configuring Global LAN WAN Replication Settings 3 13 Managing the Source Replication Library 3 16 Creating Mirror Copy PoolS naaa aaa aa 3 17 Source System Cartridge Replication Status 3 20 Managing Replication naaa a 3 21 LAN WAN Replication Library Operations 3 21 Placing the Destination Library into an Offline and Online Status ee es 3 22 Restore Media es 3 23 Copy NOW ce es 3 24 Non Deduplicated Copy 000 0 eae 3 25 Restart Broken Mirror 0 000 eee eee 3 26 LAN WAN Replication Target Operations 3 27 Editing LAN WAN Replication Target 3 27 Deleting a Replication Target 004 3 31 Clearing the Managing Source System 3 31 Renaming the Host System 0 0 eee eee 3 32 Placing the Replication Target Offline 3 32 Placing The Replication Target Online 3 33 Mirror Copy Pool Operations 0 00 eee 3 33 Deleting an Existing Mirror Copy Pool 3 33 Editing the Slot Maps 0 cee ee ees
287. lick Return to exit the wizard and return to the Library Summary screen Destroying a Library You can delete a virtual library using the Destroy Library task This operation deletes not only the selected library but all tape drives associated with that library The cartridges that were associated with that library still exist in the S Series system However from the Console Manager prior to destroying a library you move all cartridges associated with that library to the FireSafe To use those cartridges again you will need to reassociate them with a library NOTE This operation cannot take place if a cartridge is loaded in the tape drive That is the cartridge is actively being used by the backup application or was left in the tape drive by the backup application In this case refer to Force Unload Cartridge s on page 1 To destroy a virtual library and its tape drives follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Library Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries The Library Summary screen is displayed Figure 6 20 Library Summary Screen 2 Select the library you want to delete by clicking on its name The Library Status screen for that library is displayed 6 20 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 3 Click Destroy Library in the Tasks bar The Destroy Library wizard is displayed O Destroying Library O will leave gaps in the LUN ordering Select Restart VTL in System
288. lidates IT I nfrastructure Unlike a physical tape library the S Series Data Protection platform s VTL emulates multiple library types and multiple tape formats in a single platform This allows the S Series platform to provide a flexible platform to accommodate new data protection strategies as they become available In addition the S Series Data Protection platform supports user configurable virtual cartridges providing additional flexibility to meet the data center s unique needs and environment Long term Vaulting The S Series platform provides an easy solution for replicating or vaulting backups to physical tape Since the S Series platform emulates a library with tape drives to the backup application you can simply perform a clone from virtual tape to physical media This is useful for meeting off site requirements or long term vaulting Simple Management The Console Manager provides a graphical user interface for simplified system management Unparalleled Scalability The S Series Data Protection platform with delta differencing deduplication technology allows simple seamless scaling of storage capacity and additional nodes provide more mount points and faster backups and restores Fully Integrated Solution The S Series Data Protection platform s VTL delta differencing deduplication technology and tape image replication interoperate and can be used with other compression products for even greater data compression
289. ll not provide support for Third Party Software and will not provide You with any IP indemnity for the Third Party Software Some Software End User License Agreement G 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual licensed to You includes Open Source Software and You can access a complete list of these licenses for the Open Source Software provided with HDS or Hitachi Ltd s proprietary Software from the Open Source License Website The Open Source License Website does not include Third Party Related OSS You must refer back to the applicable Third Party EULA for those terms It is Your responsibility to review and adhere to all licenses for Open Source Software By accepting the Software License Terms You are also accepting the terms and conditions of the licenses applicable to any Third Party Software including any Open Source Software included with the Software If the Software licensed by HDS includes certain software licensed under the GNU General Public License or other similar Open Source Software with a license that requires the licensor to make the source code publicly available GPL Software and the applicable source code was not included in the Software then You may obtain a copy of the applicable source code for the GPL Software by either a requesting the open source code be mailed to You by HDS or b downloading the open source code by following the links on the Open Source License Website 3 Use Restrictions Exce
290. ll the existing and subsequent storage pools configured in your S Series system 3 Click Apply Settings to save these values Scroll down to access the Apply Settings button if necessary Prior to creating cartridges the first time make sure you have a storage pool with storage LUNs as described in Confirming Storage Presence on page 2 8 This ensures that the Console Manager recognizes the storage devices and makes them available for your use Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Creating Virtual Devices To use the S Series Data Protection platform you need to create virtual devices to emulate your libraries and tape drives or modify those already configured You also need to create cartridges for your backup data NOTE Prior to creating cartridges the first time make sure you have a storage pool with storage LUNs as described in Getting Started on page 2 1 This ensures that the Console Manager recognizes the storage devices and makes them available for your use This section assumes that you have logged into the Console Manager as administrator See Managing Virtual Devices on page 6 1 for information on how to perform additional operations associated with your virtual devices such as deleting devices moving cartridges to another library or the FireSafe or mapping devices to specific hosts The S Series Data Protection platform provides a FireSafe for cartridges
291. llow you to download it using the Download option Figure 6 29 k SUPPORT TICKET Help New Ticket Cancel Figure 6 28 Support Ticket Screen If there is a previous Support Ticket saved in the system the Support Ticket screen with Previously Created Support Ticket is displayed Maintaining Your 1500 6 25 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 6 26 SUPPORT TICKET Please click on the button below to download the Support Ticket Created on Wed Mar 16 06 17 23 EDT 2011 starting a new Ticket will result in last persisted Support Ticket being deleted Help Download New Ticket Cancel Figure 6 29 Support Ticket Screen with Previously Created Support Ticket 3 The S Series system saves the latest support ticket until a new one is created You can either download the previously created support ticket if there is one or create a new ticket for your S Series system To create a new Support Ticket a Click New Ticket The options for creating a new support ticket are displayed Create support Ticket Wizard SUPPORT TICKET Log Console Manager tag Deduplication Log Deduplication Agent Logs Log System tg Tape Image Replication tag WTL Figure 6 30 Support Ticket Creation Options Select a Support Ticket Creation option Basic Includes log files for Tape Image Replication Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology System Management Miscellaneous System and VTL Information Full Includes lo
292. llowing options a Click Create Tape Drive s to continue defining the virtual tape drives to associate with the new library The Create Tape Drive s screen is displayed b Click Cancel to exit the Create Library wizard NOTE Clicking Cancel exits the Create Library wizard The library does exist at this time however it has no virtual tape drives associated with it These devices can be added at a later time Canceling from the wizard prior to this step exits the wizard without creating the library 2 19 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS dp HP LTO aye HP LTO dp HPLTOS aye HPLTOS ll PEMA SSO IBAA J597 IBM Ultrium LTO 1 g IBM Ultimum LTO 2 Ep EM Uitnum LTO age EM Uithum LTO gp Guantum DLT 7009 J gg Guanium DLT 4000 Quantum SuperDLT Quantum SuperOlT mn sn P Se Sony Ait 2 g Sony AT Cr ai StorageTek 840 Sit StorageTek Tas40 Figure 2 14 Create Tape Drives The tape drive parameters that you specify create one or more tape drives of the same type under the control of the same processing node and Fibre Channel host port 10 From the listings select the processing node on which to configure the tape drive NOTE The Hitachi processing node x option is present if you have a multinode S Series system only 11 Only those tape drive types that you have licensed for your S Series system are active for selection Select the physical tape drive type you want to e
293. loaded But Not Restored 5 Click Next to begin restoring the configuration A message confirms that the configuration is uploaded successfully and the system is rebooting The Rebooting with the Restored Configuration message is displayed 6 24 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Figure 6 27 Rebooting with the Restored Configuration 6 Click Finish Wait at least 5 minutes for the processing node s to fully reboot before attempting to restart the browser session NOTE If you have email notifications enabled the system will report via email when the S Series system Is again ready for use Creating a Support Ticket To assist with troubleshooting your S Series system a Hitachi Customer Support representative may ask you to generate a support ticket The support ticket gathers current component logs that contain configuration and diagnostic trace information The user preference information is also included to help identify your system To generate a support ticket for analysis 1 Navigate to the Chassis screen System gt Chassis 2 Click Support Ticket in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The S Series system saves one copy of a previously created support ticket If there is no previous Support Ticket saved in the system the Support Ticket screen displays that there are no previously created Support Ticket to be downloaded Figure 6 28 If a Support Ticket exists the Support Ticket screen will a
294. loeb t RA HW SJ T 11363 2006 Regulatory Compliance Notices E 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Restricted Materials List This product does NOT contain any of the following substances in concentrations exceeding legal threshold limits Asbestos Azo Colorants Cadmium and Cadmium Compounds 1 e Hexavalent Chromium Compounds 1 Lead and Lead Compounds 1 e Mercury and Mercury Compounds 1 Ozone Depleting Substances Polybrominated Biphenyls PBBs 1 Polybrominated Diphenyl ethers PBDEs 1 Polychlorinated Biphenyls PCBs e Polychloronapthalenes CIl gt 3 Radioactive Substances e Short Chain Chlorinated Paraffins e Tributyl Tin Oxide TBTO e Tributyl Tins TBTs Triphenyl Tins TPTs 1 except for use in applications exempted by the EU ROHS Directive Batteries Batteries in this product are not based on mercury lead or cadmium technologies Below is a listing of batteries present in the product Battery Type Li lon Battery Description 3 V CR2032 Coin Cell California Best Management Practices Regulations for Perchlorate Materials This Perchlorate warning applies only to products containing CR Manganese Dioxide Lithium coin cells Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate E 6 Regulatory Compliance Notices Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Product recycling and disposal EU and Norway Waste
295. lth Status 5 Reserved for System 851 03 GB s m Used Capacity 3 86 GB F a Available Capacity 73506 42 GB System Healthy ne Overall Storage Savings Space Savings from Deduplication 175 br sep3 7 Hostname Logical Data Used Capacity a Data m Space Savings 77 31 savings Figure 5 1 Dashboard Screen The left pane displays the S Series system to be managed through this Console Manager The image shows the overall health status of the S Series system and lists the S Series system by its user defined host name If no host name is specified for the S Series system the system IP address shows the system name default Monitoring Your 1500 5 2 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The right pane provides a graphical view of the overall delta differencing deduplication technology statistics and the deduplicated storage savings graph The Overall Storage Savings shows the total amount of System Data the amount of storage used and the overall amount of storage capacity that is still available The Space Savings from Deduplication graph provides information about the storage savings achieved with data that has been deduplicated The Logical data Is the size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application The Used data represents the physical storage capacity whether fully or partially deduplicated and includes the effect of hardware compression if enabled
296. mall to dedupe Cannot find match in previous backup Data grooming abandoned Metadata grooming abandoned Compression disabled Skipping dedupe due to TSM duplicate error Rev5 cartridge not supported Data compression aborted The backupset will not be processed because it is too small The backup set will not be compressed as no match was found in the previous backup set The backup set will not be compressed as a data grooming error occurred The backup set will not be compressed because a metadata grooming error occurred Compression has been disabled for this backup set A backup set with a duplicate name has been renamed and set to this state It will not be compressed Revision 5 cartridges are not compressed An error occurred during compression The backupset will not be compressed OST A I R History NOTE The OST A I R History report provides Hitachi OST A I R specific information and is only available when OST A 1I R is licensed on your system The OST A I R History report lists A I R information for tracking replication jobs and determining the efficiency of transfers This report lists the OST A R information for all replications from the Source system Figure D 4 shows a sample OST A I R History report S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Report Type OST A I1 R History Report Start Time Tue Apr 10 13 32 17 EDT 2012 Report Frequency One time only Ho
297. ministrative operations creating a support ticket 6 25 restoring the configuration 6 24 saving the configuration 6 23 support history 6 28 system maintenance 6 28 Administrator Login 1 9 Allocating and Filling Cartridges 6 39 Allocating Storage 6 40 ALPA Value C 7 Arbitrated Loop Mode C 7 Auto Image Replication A 1 R 4 19 Auto Save Configuration 6 23 Availability Window 3 29 Background Consistency Check 5 14 Initialization 5 14 Backup Agents 5 32 Backup Job Naming naming 6 42 Backup J obs system sizing 6 38 Backup Reports 5 32 Backup State 5 32 I ndex Backup State Icons 5 32 Backup States dedupe complete 5 33 delta diff in process 5 32 no match found 5 33 partially reclaimed 5 32 pending reclamation 5 32 waiting for next backup 5 32 Backup Type 5 32 backupset backup 6 48 Barcode Templates adding 2 26 deleting 2 26 Best Practices reporting 6 52 summary list 6 34 best practices tape drive replication 5 35 Block Size NetBackup 6 45 C Capacity Manager additional information about a cartridge 5 23 additional information about a disk volume 5 26 additional information about a library or disk volume 5 21 additional information about a storage pool 5 20 cartridges view 5 27 disk volumes view 5 25 libraries view 5 24 storage pool view 5 18 system capacity view 5 18 Cartridge 5 22 Cartridge Barcodes 2 25 Cartridge Management 6 37 Cartridge Parameters Screen 2 22 2 31 Index 1 Hitachi
298. mulate and click Next Step The Tape Drive Parameters screen is displayed TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS Port Mapping 0 Ej 1H 2 3 Select the Fibre Channel port number to which the tape drive is mapped Number of Tape Drives 1 ir All devices LUN Mapping Masking mode is enabled The tape drive s is accessible to all hosts Help Cancel MAGAGA Be CRE aT Figure 2 15 Tape Drive Parameters 12 Specify the desired values for the tape drive s a Select the Fibre Channel host port on which you want to configure the tape drive s for the Port Mapping selection b Choose either host port O 1 2 or 3 c Enter the number of tape drives to create 13 Click Create Tape Drive to continue The new tape drives now exist and a summary of the emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed Configuring the 1500 2 20 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 1 Tape Drive s created successfully GENERAL SAN IDENTITY Name Vendor Product Inquiry String Revision Node Virtual Device Port LUN Compression ID ID Map Number TapeDrive HP HP Ultrium R500 0 2 0 2 Enabled 2 LTO4 4 SCSI Help cance trou Gna Figure 2 16 Tape Drive Parameter Summary If the tape drive is dual ported the Port Map lists ports 0 and 1 The tape drive s LUN value on both ports is also shown here NOTE Devices created on processing nodes have 4 digit virtual device IDs The first digit of the ID is the processing node number followed by the device s vir
299. n The Current Status screen displays information such as the cartridge barcode start time percent complete last update time source and target locations status and compression Figure 5 36 Click Refresh in the Tasks bar to refresh the job replication Current Status screen The Current Status screen also provides you with an option to change the filters to display the replication jobs on this screen Click Expand next to the Select Filter Criteria s To Filter Jobs to view or change the current filters The following screen is displayed Imke GkHai ili CURRENT STATUS Select Filter Criteriais To Filter Jobs eee Wie cation Et Boh EF Hirss s P pnenmma deh M Cansel don Pap biei w piain Sai ET ence T it Aidi aama ETIM Jid Tima Tinas Lacan Lacat Hh j Completion Tina rka iptal W hirra iile wi woe 1 Kil DARDI tejab enn QA Hit cih Oo Ach Jb lyp Figure 5 37 Current Status Screen Filter Options Monitoring Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Create the filter to display replication jobs by providing the options below 1 Select a location The left dialog box shows the list of available locations The right dialog box contains the list of selected locations Use the arrow buttons to move locations to or from the right box You can select multiple locations by using Ctri click The locations you select appear under the selected locations list 2 Enter the Barcode of the cartr
300. n to help you determine cartridge sizes and your backup policy sizing requirements Delta Differencing Deduplication Cartridge Management The best practice for freeing up space in the S Series system is to use the Independent Software Vendor ISV application to expire and relabel or recycle the cartridges Relabeling a cartridge frees up all of the disk space that cartridge is using Accordingly you should migrate older backups off the S Series system and onto tape then expire and relabel the cartridges for reuse In a VTL only environment if a data cartridge is erased or relabeled then all of the space consumed by the data contained on the cartridge becomes available for reuse If a delta differencing deduplication cartridge has been deduplicated however then only the space that contains the unique data and references may be freed up A Backup Set that Spanned Cartridges Leaves Used Capacity in Cartridges that Are Not Relabeled If a backupset spanned at least two cartridges and one of the cartridges was subsequently relabeled or overwritten Relabeling the cartridge removed any knowledge of the backupset from the S Series because the backup set was no longer available for deduplication However some Used Capacity remains on the other cartridge s And since the S Series no longer knows about the backupset associated with the Used Capacity it displays the message There are no backups for this cartridge In this instance you
301. nStorage OST protocol over TCP IP Data may be replicated over IP networks to disaster recovery centers to eliminate the transport of data via tape Key Features of the S Series Platform Designed for Multiple Office Environments The Hitachi S Series Data Protection platform is an easy to implement manage and maintain solution that is designed for offices with limited IT resources The S Series platform provides a scalable secure and reliable backup and restore solution that smoothly integrates into existing environments allowing you to preserve current policies and procedures Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Components The S Series storage system is a 2U sized disk drive enclosure housing up to twelve low profile 1 inch high 3 5 inch form factor SAS drives of 4 0 Tb s up to 7200 rpm Each individual disk drive is hot swappable and field replaceable The Hitachi S Series system provides high reliability by using state of the art disk array technology The S Series hard drives are RAID 6 protected in order to prevent hard drive faults from causing a backup window to be missed Figure 1 1 displays the front drives and the front view with bezel Figure 1 1 S1500 Front Drives and Front View with Bezel See for detailed S Series System Specifications Performance Optimization The S Series can be set up with multiprotocol Fibre Channel and
302. name is already properly installed Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Installing HDS HPP S OST plugin as lt HDSHPPS OST gt Installing part 1 of 1 usr openv 1lib ost plugins libstspihdshpps so usr openv 1lib ost plugins libstspihdshppsMT so verifying class lt none gt Installation of lt HDSHPPS OST gt was successful 5 After restarting NetBackup you can then configure and monitor your S Series platform with OST refer to Installing the AIX Plug In on page 4 12 Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 3 Replication User Guide Uninstalling the Solaris Package Should you need to update your Solaris Plug in software enter these steps rpm qa grep HDSHPPS HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt rpm e HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Installing the Windows Plug In HDS HPP S OST Plugins cannot be installed on systems earlier than Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Follow these steps to install the HITACHI OST Plug in for Windows 1 Click the Windows Plug in installation file The Welcome to the HITACHI OST Plugins Setup Wizard is displayed Figure 4 3 i HDS HPP S OST plugins Setup Welcome to the HDS HPP S OST plugins Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard will install HDS HPP 5 ST plugins on your computer Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard Back Cancel Figur
303. nd and Collapse options that change the granularity of the tree view A plus sign beside a component in the tree indicates that it has subcomponents Clicking the plus sign shows the components Conversely a minus sign beside a component indicates it is a main component with one or more subcomponents Clicking on the minus sign collapses the view of that component There is alSo a Refresh task that when selected causes the Console Manager to query all of its components and rebuild a fresh navigation tree This activity takes several seconds to perform Create and Destroy tasks add and delete items from the navigation tree and force a refresh of the navigation tree at that time Monitoring Your 1500 5 6 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Back Button The back button does not necessarily return you to the previous screen and could display outdated cache information So instead click the appropriate tab and navigate to the desired page The LSI MegaRAI D SAS Manager To be able to view the S Series backend storage status you must use the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager solution which requires a client to be installed on a PC or laptop that has a Web connection The following section lists the hardware and software requirements for installing and using the LSI MegaRAID SAS Manager Hardware and Software Requirements The hardware requirements for MegaRAID Storage Manager MSM software are e A PC compatible computer w
304. nd the Configuration selection by clicking the Plus sign in the navigation tree Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 37 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Editing Cartridge Summary Configuration Tape image replication allows you to edit the time to check the replication cartridges that are not migrated in the copy pool until a user specified time The system will generate notifications and if configured these notifications are sent to the list of configured users To edit the cartridge summary configuration 1 Click Replication gt Configuration Summary 2 Either click the Edit Cartridge Summary Configuration link in the Tasks bar or navigate to the Cartridge Summary link in the navigation tree The Configure Cartridge Summary screen is displayed 3 Enter the Time to check for cartridges not migrated in Copy pools notification limit Select the checkbox Send notification if cartridges are not migrated in Copy pools notification limit to receive notification when the cartridges are not migrated at the threshold limit 5 Click Submit to save the changes or Cancel to cancel the configuration If you selected Submit the screen refreshes and a success message is displayed 6 Click Back to return to the Cartridge Summary screen Editing Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration Tape image replication provides a global parameter to configure multiple targets within a target system This
305. nd visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the disk volume used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage in the disk volume currently available for Capacity additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the disk volume Monitoring Your 1500 5 26 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Cartridges View Navigate to the Cartridges link on the navigation tree System gt Chassis gt Capacity gt Cartridges The Cartridges view is displayed Cartridges Figure 5 27 Cartridges Capacity Screen The Cartridges screen displays the list of cartridges in your S Series system The Cartridges Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 12 Cartridges Capacity Table Cartridges Capacity Table Barcode The barcode of the cartridges in the library Allocated Total storage capacity allocated to the Cartridge This capacity Capacity might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained on the cartridge and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage on the cartridge used for data whether deduplicated or not The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity on the cartridge NOTE The Used Capacity value for some cartridges may be greater than the Logical Data This can be due to relabeling of the cartridg
306. nd you change your the host name then you must perform the steps in Renaming the Host System on page 3 30 under tape image replication 2 3 Enter a new system domain name in the Domain Name field Click Apply Synchronizing Your System to an External NTP Server l Under NTP Settings enter the IP address of your primary NTP server Figure 2 2 If you have a secondary NTP server enter its IP address Click Apply The S Series system will synchronize its system clock to the specified NTP server Configuring Your System Time Zone Settings This feature allows you to change the time zone of the S Series system to match your local time zone Emailed S Series system status reports will then reflect your local time l Under Time Zone Settings select the Geographical Zone of your S Series system from the listings Figure 2 2 Select the Country from the listings Select the Time Zone corresponding to the selection made above Click Apply Configuring Your System 10 GbE NIC Network The system provides you with an option to configure a dual port 10 Gigabit Ethernet 10 GbE network interface controller NIC for supporting NetBackup OST 1 Select the Bond Unbond checkbox to enable bonding 10 Gigabit Ethernet 2 3 10 GbE network interface controller NIC on a particular processing node Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 10 GbE NIC Network Settings Bond Unbond Devi
307. ndex 2 Configure SNMP Settings 2 13 Configure the S2100 Platform to Send Traps to a Management Station 2 14 Configuring a Static IP 2 2 Configuring delta differencing deduplication 2 37 Consistency Check Background 5 14 Console Manager create library task 2 18 event notification 5 6 login screen 1 8 navigation tree 5 6 notifications pane 5 5 task bar 5 5 URL 1 8 console manager status and parameter entry 5 5 Console Manager Login Screen 1 8 Copy Now 3 24 Create Cartridges 2 27 create cartridges 2 21 2 29 Create Library 2 18 cancelling from 2 19 2 28 cancelling out 2 21 2 30 cartridge summary 2 23 2 32 create tape drive 2 19 2 28 creating cartridges 2 21 2 30 creating tape drives 2 20 2 28 exit the create library wizard 2 19 2 28 number of slots and ports 2 19 2 27 select cartridge type 2 22 2 30 select library emulation step 2 18 2 27 size and number of cartridges 2 22 2 31 summary 2 23 2 32 tape drive parameter summary 2 21 2 25 Create Tape Drives 2 24 Creating a support ticket 6 25 Creating Cartridges 2 21 2 30 Creating LAN WAN Replication Targets 3 14 Creating Mirror Copy Pools 3 17 Creating Tape Drives tape drive emulations 2 20 2 28 D Dashboard Screen 5 2 delta differencing deduplication statistics 1 13 5 3 left pane 1 13 5 2 right pane 1 13 5 3 data erasure 1 5 cartridges move or delete 6 40 move or delete cartridges 6 40 Data growth 1 6 Data Path Failure C 4 description C 4 soluti
308. ng Your 1500 5 30 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Space Savings from Deduplication The overall Delta differencing deduplication technology statistics appear in a status pane on the right side of the Delta Differencing Deduplication screen This status pane has two main regions the overall deduplication Statistics and the deduplicated storage savings graph The Logical data Is the size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application The Used data represents the physical storage capacity whether or not deduplicated The Space Savings is the percentage of physical storage capacity reclaimed from data that has been fully deduplicated Delta Differencing Deduplication Event and Error Notifications A notifications pane at the bottom of the Delta Differencing Deduplication screen reports any errors or events detected by delta differencing deduplication technology An Info notification does not have additional details or diagrams associated with it 5 31 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Viewing Backup Reports The Backup Report displays a high level summary of the backup set information You can also view the individual deduplication ratios for a single backup To view the Backup Report for backup sets 1 Navigate to the Backup Report System gt Chassis gt Deduplication gt Backup Report in the navigation tree The Delta Differencing Deduplicat
309. ng a full backup on a regular basis that backup should be allocated to a different management class or a different virtual node name This is because you don t want it deduplicating against a daily incremental Backing up a full against an incremental renders poor deduplication results The client names must match for deduplication to take place The saveset is also used for Windows and UNIX files and Exchange Lotus Notes and NDMP agents although it is based on comparing common paths so data1i folder1 would be compared to datai Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Performance and Tuning Optimization This section provides information that is useful to consider when configuring your system for optimal performance Optimum VTL and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Configuration Optimal configurations are highly dependent on the S Series system s environment The current system configuration guidelines work with delta differencing deduplication as well Here are some best practice guidelines to optimize backup and deduplication performance along with deduplication results Each processing node can support up to 192 virtual devices The best practice recommendation to optimize backup restore and delta differencing deduplication performance is to allocate the appropriate number of drives based on the connectivity available from the master and media servers Each processing node port can
310. ng is a process in which two data streams are analyzed for differences by using either a backup set level or file level e A backup set level looks for similar regions between two backup sets by analyzing the data e A file level identifies similarities by using metadata such as filename path size time last modified and an MD5 checksum The default delta differencing method used in the deduplication process is determined by the data type NOTE The NetBackup raw files are deduplicated by delta differencing deduplication technology only if the corresponding policy for these files is set to CA2 If the policy for these files is set to CA3 these files will not be deduplicated Configuring the Delta Differencing Method 1 Navigate to the Deduplication screen System gt Chassis gt Deduplication 2 Either select the Configuration link in the Task bar or navigate to the Configuration link in the navigation tree The Configuration screen is displayed Figure 2 43 By Data Type 1 Select the checkbox for each application and data type whose delta differencing algorithm you want to change for duplication 2 Select CA2 or CA3 from the Change Deduplication Algorithm listings at the top of the screen and click GO The screen refreshes and the Deduplication Algorithm field reflects your changes and a success message Is displayed Configuring the 1500 2 40 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual By Policy or Manageme
311. nings 7 Select the S Series system to send traps from the listings 8 Add the SNMP settings to the SNMP list by clicking Add Removing a Host from the SNMP Setup List Follow these steps to remove an SNMP host from the list of hosts receiving SNMP traps From the SNMP Setup screen 1 Click Remove for the host you want to delete The list refreshes and no longer displays information for the deleted host The deleted host s will no longer receive the SNMP alerts Downloading the SNMP MIB Follow these steps to download the Hitachi MIB From the Notifications screen 1 Click Download SNMP MIB 2 A File Download dialogue box is displayed Select Save 3 The default name is displayed in the File name field If desired navigate to another folder rename the file and click Save The Hitachi MIB file is saved to the designated location See Appendix J SNMP V2 Event MIB on page 414 for more information on Hitachi MIB Clearing Hardware Compression Faults Follow this step to clear the existing hardware compression faults from the Console Manager 1 Click Clear Hardware Compression Faults on the processing nodex screen The screen refreshes and a success message Is displayed Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Oversubscribing NOTE Oversubscription is automatically enabled for certain Hitachi features such as delta differencing deduplication technology in this case the system wil
312. nly multiple streams from a single data file You can avoid this by ensuring that you disable the Striped Backup feature for Microsoft SQL Server in the backup application because this creates multiple streams from each data file Note that the default setting for this is disabled and most sites do not use Striped Backups with SQL Server For additional details refer to the specific backup application documentation for Microsoft SQL Server Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Troubleshooting This appendix describes some common Issues you may encounter while using the S Series system and provides steps to troubleshoot them NOTE You must have administrative privileges to perform these operations Force Unload Cartridge s Description Solution In some instances a cartridge can become stuck In a tape drive This occurs if a particular SCSI setting has been turned on or if a SCSI request has been initiated during backup or restoration that prevents the cartridge from moving past that location The S Series software does not allow you to delete a tape drive with a cartridge loaded into it If you attempt to delete a tape drive with a cartridge loaded in it or attempt to delete a library that has a loaded tape drive in a slot then the Console Manager displays an error message citing this condition NOTE If you need to rebuild your storage pools yo
313. nt s operating condition has degraded or failed For applications a reported warning or error has occurred 2 13 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual WARNING A component or element s operating condition has degraded The component is still functional but performance may be compromised For applications a limit is being approached This can be the number of retries allowed for an operation or a threshold has been exceeded ERROR A component or an element within a component has failed For applications this indicates an operation failed to complete successfully Fault Message This value indicates the type of component and a high level description of the issue For example S Series Processing Node Link Down indicates that a communications link in one of the processing nodes has failed The Fault Component parameter indicates the link and the processing node reporting the event Fault Component This is a breadcrumb indicating the source of the event being reported It has the format fully qualified name of system gt S Series component gt sub level component info For example alc03 sangate com gt node0 gt FibreChannelO indicates that an event involving host link O port O on the HBA card on processing node O has occurred Adding a Host to Receive SNMP Alerts To configure the S Series system to send traps to a management station follow these steps l Navig
314. nt Class Hue i 1 Click the Data Type link to see all policies or management classes in use for that data type The Policies screen or Management Class screen is displayed 2 Select the checkbox for each policy or management class whose delta differencing method you want to change 3 Select CA2 or CA3 from the Change Deduplication Algorithm drop down at the bottom of the screen and click GO The screen refreshes and the Deduplication Algorithm field reflects your changes and a success message is displayed sa Canfigurabon m i pja FIGURE 2 44 Deduplication Algorithm Changed Successfully Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring and Using Tape I mage Replication This section provides information you need to know for installing and configuring Replication in your environment This section assumes that you have logged into the S Series Console Manager as the administrator Overview and Features of Tape I mage Replication The Hitachi replication solution allows data centers to electronically replicate data from one S Series system in one location to another S Series system in a different location The data can be replicated via LAN WAN between two S Series systems Replication is based on a mirroring technology that associates the source system with a target system The source system is the S Series system from which the data Is being replicated and the target system is the S S
315. nt once per day or after a regular interval of time during the day Select the time when the daily report are sent If you want the daily report to recur enter the number of hours after which the report should be sent Select the time interval when this report Should be sent Weekly Select the day of the week and the time when this report is sent Monthly Select the day of the month and the time when this report is sent 8 When all the selections have been made click Save to add the user s and report settings The following screen is displayed SS SSS ss Notifications Setup Mail Server Setup SNMP Setup Download SNMP MIB Report scheduled successfully Email Addresses Report Type Schedule Last Sent Next Send Operations System Capacity CSV Cartridge to Backup Summary CSV testuser sepaton com Backup Summary CSV Every Day at 08 00 Never 06 15 11 08 00 00 Edit Remove Policy Cartridge Summary CSV Replication Job History CSV FIGURE 2 8 Report Setup Screen List of Added Users 9 The list of users configured to receive email reports is displayed Additional users can be added to the list of users by clicking on Add More Changing the Report Settings You may want to change the report settings of an existing user To change the type of reports received for an existing user 1 Click Edit on the Report Setup screen Figure 2 8 The Add Report J ob screen is displayed Figure 2 7 The Add Report J ob scre
316. nt to stop your replication session click Return to exit without performing any action This process will take a few minutes and the Replication services will restart On completion Restart Replication Services Summary screen will display Petian Figure 6 42 Restart Replication Services Summary Screen 3 Click Return to return to the Dashboard screen Restarting the VTL in Maintenance Mode You can restart the S Series system in Maintenance Mode which disables the customer facing Fibre Channel ports from the media servers While in Maintenance Mode no applications delta differencing deduplication tape image replication and OST are available Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Maintenance Mode is used when you need to change the characteristics of your storage pools Maintenance Mode may also be needed for when Hitachi Technical Support personnel need to perform various maintenance operations on the S Series system You will be instructed when to put the S Series into Maintenance Mode by a qualified Hitachi Support engineer To put your system in Maintenance Mode follow these steps 1 Click Restart VTL in Maintenance Mode in the TASKS bar A warning is displayed stating that any replication operation i e replication restores tape shredding in progress will be stopped Restart VTL in Maintenance Mode on all SRE Nodes Restarts the Virtual Tape Library in Maintenance Mode WA
317. nting Windows Event Log Errors by Disabling the Removable Storage Manager 0008 6 44 Symantec NetBackup and Delta Differencing Deduplication TECNO Yeri Ace Eas Rae ee ee Ee RS 6 45 Multistreaming Storage Groups in an MS Exchange Contents 6 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Volume PoolS 0 00 cece es 6 45 Default Block Size and Number of Buffers 6 45 Do Not Set a Maximum Fragment Size 6 45 You Must Use Supported NetBackup Libraries and DIVES oe ee 6 46 NetBackup Best Practices for Replicating in a High Latency Environment 0005 6 46 TSM and Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology 6 47 Collocation 0 ee 6 47 Concurrent Mount Points 0000 eee uae 6 47 Device Pathnames 1 0 cee es 6 47 Keep Mount Point 0 0 cee ee ees 6 47 Mount Retention 0c eee es 6 47 Relabelscratch wicw de aca Wald Ogre eae ho ee dew 6 48 Versioning soaa es 6 48 Backupset Backup nananana 6 48 NetWorker and Delta Differencing Deduplication TECNDOIOOY 6 kav a He Woenee de Gaon oe ee ees 6 49 Minimize the Number of Pools 08 6 49 Maximizing Deduplication Effectiveness 6 49 Windows Device Configuration 0005 6 50 Linux Device Configuration 00000es 6 51 UNIX Device Configuration 00000G 6 51 NDMPe take OR Sa bbe e ne ee hae ne ee Bo 6 51 Operational Best Practices 0 cee ee 6 52 Key Me
318. ntly in use If your unit does not offer a function described in this document please open a Customer Support case by visiting the support portal located at https deltaview sepaton com or call 1 866 657 8400 for upgrade information This document describes the features and operation of S1500 platforms running software for the delta differencing deduplication technology and tape image replication options and Symantec NetBackup OpenStorage OST Preface 9 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Intended Audience This document Is intended for use by the system and storage administrator system programmer or operator involved in acquiring Managing or operating the S1500 system in a backup and restore deduplication replication management and reporting environment Related Documents e Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 Software Installation Instructions FE 95HPP005 00 e Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 V8 0 Software Release Notes RN S1500 8 0 Please read the Release Notes before installing or using this product They may contain requirements and restrictions not fully described in this document along with updates and corrections to this document Document conventions This document uses the following symbols to draw attention to important safety and operational information Symbol Meaning Description Tips provide helpful information guidelines or suggestions for performing tasks more effectively
319. number of hours 6 Enter the Priority of the Mirror Copy Pool relative to other Mirror Copy Pools high medium low 7 The At End of the Policy Window allows you to cancel replication jobs if they have not completed within the specified replication window they would be restarted on the next window Select one of the policy window behaviors 8 Click Submit The Mirror Copy Pool Details screen is displayed and a success dialog confirms that the policy has been changed successfully Managing Replication Configuration The Hitachi Replication feature allows you to perform several tasks for managing replication configuration Viewing Configuration Summary Tape image replication allows you to view the current replication configuration of your S Series system The Configuration Summary screen displays the replication configuration summary including cartridge Summary configuration global LAN WAN replication target configuration job reporting configuration and Console Manager configuration To view the replication configuration of the source or the target system 1 Click Replication gt Configuration Summary Configuration Summary hakat GEG Carintige Summary Configuration O fat Gobel LAMAN Kepecabon Tepr OEGI Job Reporma Comiguraben O bie GU Configuration CONFIGURATION SUMMARY Figure 3 30 Configuration Summary Screen To view and edit settings of the components associated with the replication configuration expa
320. ny backup restore operations e Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Mapping Devices to a Host Host View The Host view allows you to define your mapping scheme by adding and removing devices assigned to each host Each host can have multiple devices mapped to it Multiple hosts can have the same devices mapped to them The Host View screen displays all the libraries and tape drives mapped to that selected host The default host for this view is the first host listed in the SAN list When the User Defined mode is first enabled no devices are mapped to any hosts In the Host View the following actions are possible e Assign one or more devices e Restrict the devices shown in the list to only those defined on a particular node e View detailed information about a specific device e Clear one or more devices mapped to a host Assigning One or More Devices to a Host Follow these steps to map one or more hosts to a device 1 Navigate to the Host View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Host View The Host View screen is displayed Host View Tanase Cranage Hifo Mode 0 C Ege o Se D Daka VEN Host View 2100001b3217fT0d 6s Mode Ussr Dsfinsd Cho Fite aT View B AD Pross y Ho Wappsd Devices Avaliable
321. o that high priority jobs go to the cartridge set or virtual library that is mapped to the Mirror Copy Pool with a high priority policy and the low priority jobs go to the other cartridges or the other virtual library Only backups performed after the Mirror Copy Pool is created are replicated Existing backups are not replicated Policy Window The Policy Window is created while creating the Mirror Copy Pool on the source S Series system The parameters of the Policy Window define the time when the data is replicated on the target S Series system The Policy Window settings also have an option to allow active replication jobs to completion or cancel all active replication jobs without completing when the Policy Window ends Additionally it also provides an option to allow active replication jobs that have met the specified threshold to reach completion and cancel others when the Policy Window ends Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Availability Window The Availability Window is created while creating the Replication Target on the target S Series system Availability Window settings include the start day start time and window duration when the target system will accept replication data The Availability Window on the Target should be always greater than or equal to the Policy Window on the Source system to allow replication jobs to complete Availability Window Parameters c
322. ompletion Screen You can confirm that the storage LUNs are active by viewing the Storage LUN information see 5 Click Return to System 6 You must now Restart the VTL System gt Chassis MAINTENANCE TASKS System Maintenance Restart VTL Restart VTL on SRE Noded Tape Library WARKING Any VTL operation jie backup restore ete in progress will mot complete Cite Figure 1 15 Restart VTL Screen 7 Click Restart VTL The system reboots and the S Series Console Manager Login screen is displayed Figure 1 16 Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 18 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console Password Figure 1 16 S Series Console Manager Login Screen 8 Enter your Username and Password Username administrator Password admin The system restarts after approximately three minutes although it still appears to be in a degraded state Figure 1 17 a Dashboard Lad Log is tos Covad powi adinin ator E law legen dae ia Lie be inp ect Sys tem Capacity system ma Needs Reserved for System 265 11 G8 ag Attention E Used Capacity 0 00 GB E Available Capacity 9681 06 GB Space Savings trom Deduplication ae A Figure 1 17 System Needs Attention Screen The system is in the process of initializing 1 19 Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User
323. on You only get license rights in Software expressly stated in these Software License Terms Except as otherwise expressly provided by any open source license You must not do anything to jeopardize HDS or our licensors rights in the Hitachi IP including to i copy modify merge or transmit Hitachi IP ii register or attempt to register any competing intellectual property rights to the Hitachi IP iii delete or tamper with any proprietary notices on or in the Hitachi IP iv take or use any action that diminishes the value of any trademarks included in the Hitachi IP or v use the Software in violation of applicable law These restrictions are in addition to those stated in Article 3 10 I ntellectual Property Claims Subject to Section 9 and the exceptions in this Section if a third party makes a claim against You that the Software infringes that party s patent rights or copyright IP Claim HDS will provide the following recourse which to the extent permitted by applicable law comprises Your sole and exclusive remedy against us for IP Claims a HDS will defend or settle the IP Claim at our option and cost and pay to You the amount of damages losses and costs finally awarded or settled with our written consent provided that You i promptly notify HDS of the IP Claim ii allow HDS to solely manage the defense and settlement of the IP Claim iii co operate with and assist HDS as we require HDS will pay Your costs o
324. on C 5 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Dedupe Complete 5 33 Deduplication Algorithm 2 40 Deduplication Backup Types 5 34 Data Protector 5 34 NetBackup 5 34 NetWorker 5 35 TSM 5 34 Deduplication Ratios system sizing 6 39 Deduplication Timeout 3 36 Defining a barcode template 2 21 2 30 Delete Cartridges 6 15 delete cartridges data erasure 6 17 without data erasure 6 18 Deleting a User from the Notifications List 2 8 Deleting a User from the Report List 2 12 2 13 Deleting an Email Server 2 9 Deleting Tape Drives 6 22 Delta Differencing Deduplication Recommended Practices for Oracle RMAN Delta Differencing Deduplication with standard RMAN script changes B 8 Sample Oracle RMAN script with standard script practices B 8 delta differencing deduplication technology 1 4 Delta diff in Process 5 32 Delta differencing 2 40 delta differencing deduplication backup state 5 32 dedupe complete 5 33 delta diff in process 5 32 no match found 5 33 partially reclaimed 5 32 pending reclamation 5 32 waiting for next backup 5 32 delta differencing deduplication Reports and Screens backups list 5 33 delta differencing deduplication Summary Screen 5 30 view backup reports 5 32 view backups 5 33 delta differencing deduplication Statistics 1 13 5 3 5 31 space savings 5 31 delta differencing deduplication Summary Screen 5 30 delta differencing deduplication event and error notifications 5 31 DeltaView Portal 1 6 accessing DeltaView
325. on of Hitachi personnel To restart the processing node 1 Manually power on the S1500 from the front panel button 2 Click Restart processing node in the Tasks bar The Restart Processing Node wizard is displayed WARNING Any VTL operation e g backup restore ete in progress will not complete He Ka L Figure 6 38 Restart processing node Step 1 3 You will be prompted to confirm this action Click Yes to continue If you do not want to reboot your processing node click No or Cancel to exit the wizard without performing any action SRE Hode 0 is restarting Please log in again Ci Figure 6 39 Initiate the Processing Node Restart 4 When prompted click Close to close the browser and initiate the processing node reboot This process will take several minutes and the Console Manager services will restart 5 Start a new browser session and login again NOTE If you have email notifications enabled the system will report via email when the S Series system is again ready for use 6 30 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Shutting Down the Processing Node This task safely stops the processing node services so that the processing node can be powered down To stop the processing node services 1 Stop all input and output of backups or replication 2 Click Shut Down processing node in the Tasks bar The Shut Down processing node Wizard is displayed WARNING Any VTL opera
326. onnector recognized by the device manager may not match to the network interface connector number S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 11 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Management interface connector The status LEDs on the connector are explained as follows mm O Figure A 8 Management interface connector status LED Table A 9 Management interface connector status LED indicate Location __Name___ State _ Green On_ A link with a hub has been established Activity LED Off O O SSS O Green on A 100BASE TX link with a hub has been established A 10BASE T link with a hub has been established or link with a hub has not been established Green Blink A 100BASE TX or 10BASE T link with a hub is Link LED being established Off Do not directly connect between the management interface connector ne and a network interface connector 1 to 4 using a LAN cable If you do the system unit does not work properly ese The link speed and duplex of the management interface are specified to auto negotiation Therefore also specify auto negotiation to the LAN ports both of a console terminal and a switching hub which connected to the management interface We recommend you use the management interface at 100BASE TX If the links speed of the management interface is 10 Mbps 10BASE T link established the Link LED is OFF malfunction may occur in communication In this case you need to
327. ools notification limit to receive notification when the cartridges are not migrated at the threshold limit Click Submit to save the changes and Cancel to cancel the configuration 5 The screen refreshes and a success message is displayed 6 Click Back to return to the Cartridge Summary screen Tape image replication allows you to change this configuration anytime by using the task Edit Configuration Monitoring Your 1500 5 36 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 5 37 Refresh Cartridge Status screen allows you to refresh the cartridge summary and capture the latest state of the cartridges being replicated 1 Click Refresh in the Tasks bar on the Cartridge Status screen to display the current echo copy pool summary The following table provides information about various echo copy pool States Table 5 15 Echo Copy Pool States Echo Copy Pool State Description Not migrated in The cartridges that have not migrated in the specified number Copy Pools of hours notification limit This view allows you to perform corrective actions for the cartridges that were not migrated in the copy pool threshold limit Mirror failed An operation on the cartridges failed and user interaction is Corrective action needed to correct the problem This view allows you to perform needed corrective actions for the failed cartridges In Use The cartridges are in use by the backup application Or the Deduplicating backup
328. ools on the target S Series system then cartridges that would deduplicate on the source system would not deduplicate on the target system if those cartridges are in different storage pools e Capacity reporting provides a graphical representation of data that allows easy in depth capacity and performance monitoring for the overall system capacity view storage pool view library view and cartridge view Maintaining Your 1500 6 41 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Creating a Storage Pool When you add a storage pool for the first time after adding a delta differencing deduplication technology license you must manually restart the S Series system for the change to take effect Backup J ob Naming Considerations NetBackup TSM NetWorker 6 42 Deduplication relies on the names of the backup job and the client to correlate them If you rename the backup job or client after you have deduplication running on your system the deduplication for that backup data is rerun as though you just activated it for the first time Do not divide full backups and incremental backups across different job names They must operate under a common backup job name The client node name and policy must match for deduplication to take place You should put large servers in their own policy and put smaller application and web servers in shared policies The node names must match for deduplication to take place If you are forci
329. or Slots screen 3 Click Non Deduplicated Copy in the Tasks bar The Non Deduplicated Copy wizard is displayed Slop t cd NON DEQUPLICATED COPY Figure 3 15 Non Deduplicated Copy Wizard 4 Select the cartridge to copy and click Submit The selected cartridge is scheduled for a nondeduplicated copy The cartridge status for this cartridge will change to Mirror Preprocessing Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 25 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Restart Broken Mirror If an unexpected error occurred while running the replication job or a restore job the cartridge displays a Mirror Broken in the cartridge state For a failed replication job you can use Restart Broken Mirror task to attempt to recover from the error For a failed restore you should rerun the restore job To restart a broken mirror 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Expand the navigation tree to see the Slots and Mirror Copy Pools associated with this library and click Slots to display the Summary for Slots screen Figure 3 16 shows a list of cartridges where the cartridge prooo1 shows Mirror Broken as its current status laske G Rtimea yda OCopy New Oion eigid O Neria ioia rro OAdvenced feerch O Raiens i SUMMARY FOR SLOTS EERST ELEAT E eo 8 oe8o8 G6 68 a ola Figure 3 16 Summary For
330. or monitoring and planning These options are e Notifications e Reports e SNMP Alerts The Console Manager provides several screens that display current S Series system status In addition the data relative to these screens can be emailed to the specified users in the form of a Comma Separated Value CSV file These reports are described in Table 2 1 The S Series system has reporting capabilities that allow you to configure the S Series system to alert one or more users of detected events and errors via email NOTE While opening the emailed CSV file in Microsoft Outlook the browser alters the appearance of some fields You must import the CSV file into Excel and reset the format from General to Text Setting Up Notifications You will need to configure your email server as well as the email address of each user to receive notifications Adding Users to Receive Email Alerts 1 Navigate to the Notifications Setup screen by clicking on the Notifications tab and selecting Notifications Setup in the Tasks bar Click Add to configure email alerts for a single user For the user to receive event and error alerts specify the following a Enter the user s email address b Select the name of the S Series system from the Chassis listings c Select the type of alert to report from the Alerts listings All Send all notifications errors warnings info Errors Send only errors Warnings Send only warnings None
331. ould you need to update your SUSE Linux RPM software enter the following rpm qa grep HDSHPPS HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt rpm e HDSHPPS OST 7 3 0 lt version gt Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 11 Replication User Guide Installing the Al X Plug In Copy the plug in to the media server and install it as follows l Install the AIX RPM onto the host system Follow these steps to install the HDSHPPS OST Plug in for AIX 2 3 rpm e lt any existing HDSHPPS OST plugin gt 4 5 Validate that the plug in is available to be loaded rpm iv lt new OST plugin gt usr openv netbackup bin admincmd bpstsinfo pi serverprefix HDSHPPS Schedule a window of time to restart the NetBackup application After restarting NetBackup you can then configure and monitor your S Series platform with OST Uninstalling the AI X Plug In Should you need to update your AIX RPM software follow this step Ls rpm e lt any existing HDSHPPS OST plugin gt Installing the Symantec Appliance Plug In Download the plug in and install it on the appliance following Symantec s installation instructions The plug in is certified for the following 4 12 NetBackup 5200 Series Appliances running v 2 6 0 4 or later NetBackup 5300 Series Appliances running v 2 6 1 or later Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Replication User Guide Configuring Storage Servers This section provid
332. ovides a Fix Preferred Paths feature that returns the system to the preferred path If the cause of the data path failure is not resolved however the system will continue to fail over to the non preferred path after being forced to the primary path NOTE A symbol beside a LUN number indicates that the data path has been failed over to the non preferred path Because changing the data path to storage Is disruptive to system operation Hitachi recommends that this feature only be performed when the system Is idle To return the data path to all storage LUNs to their preferred path perform the following steps 1 Navigate to the Storage LUNs screen System gt Chassis gt Storage LUNs 2 Click View beside the storage LUN of your choice A screen similar to Figure C 8 is displayed Storage LUNs GO Eyra Collapse Rees Taske Fie Frered Pains Chassis for sep2 sepsion_ oom penty aa aa ee ee al Paal A A a a a TAAS LL PPR eer Pe Pt AARAA estret t t LUH Etmtus Pretend Fais Hon Preferred Feth lt D o 98 LUH Rindus Prederresd Pais Kon Preterred Pain o 98 g Figure C 8 Storage LUN Details 3 Click Fix Preferred Paths in the Tasks bar The Fix Preferred Path wizard is displayed Troubleshooting Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual All Gath well Se setio preferred 0 Warning Thies may take several minutes to complete Heb Cancel eel Figure C 9 F
333. oviding multiple data paths to each storage LUN categorized as preferred and non preferred path s which are automatically discovered by the S Series system when the storage Is configured in your system By default the S Series software selects the preferred path for all read write operations to the storage LUNs If the system detects a failure on the backend storage path during a read write operation it retries the operation for approximately 90 seconds If the operation is not successful it fails over to the non preferred data path to that storage LUN and continues retrying the read write operation If the operation succeeds successive read write operations to that storage LUN use the new path When all storage LUNs are being accessed via their preferred path established when the storage Is originally discovered optimal system performance Is obtained When the storage LUNs are being accessed via their non preferred path there will likely be some performance degradation When a data path failure has caused it to failover to the non preferred path the S Series system does not return to using its preferred path after the cause of the failure is resolved Troubleshooting C 4 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Solution Because the system uses its preferred path until some circumstance causes it to fail over to its non preferred path you should force the system back to the preferred path The S Series Console Manager pr
334. pabilities that allow you to configure the system to notify one or more users about the status of its components capacity and performance System Capacity Report System Capacity report presents a summary of the overall storage capacity in terms of capacity allocated for user data the storage space currently consumed and the overall efficiency of the storage savings The System Capacity report allows you to monitor the overall efficiency of S Series system s storage savings and plan future Space utilization This information comes directly from the S Series system Other reports return gross estimates made by delta compression or Space reclamation The System Capacity report lists space utilization information such as storage pool name total physical capacity capacity reserved for the system usable capacity logical data used capacity available capacity and system ratio Figure D 1 illustrates the contents of a sample System Capacity report S1500 Platform Reports D 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual A z C U p F G H Report Type System Capacity Report Completed Time Tue Jun 14 11 31 56 EDT 2011 Report Frequency One time only Hostname ds3 qa1 sepaton com Chassis Serial Number 12345 Revision Tag MAINLINES 261 Storage Pool Name Total Physical Capacity Reservedfor System Usable Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio 1 StoragePool1 120 00 TB 292 63 GB 19 71 TB 2761TB
335. pen New Case Screen Open a New Case Click on the link Open New Case Enter the information requested on the form Contact Contact option displays the list of contacts on the Account Management screen Select the name of the contact from the contact list against whom the case will be opened This contact will be the owner of the support case Site Location Choose the Site Location from the drop down list Serial Number Choose the serial number of the system the case is associated with Customer XRef If you are using your own ticketing case management system use this field to track your ticket number for ease of cross reference with the Hitachi support case number Case Type Choose the Case Type The default Case Type is Support Incident Module Choose the Module option The drop down list is based on the Case Type selected Component Choose the Component option The Component option is generated based on the selections made for Case Type and Module Contact Method Choose the contact option you prefer for the issue Contact options are either email or phone Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 3 Case Search Current Phone By default the Current Phone number option displays the phone number entered for the contact selected However you can enter an alternate phone number for the contact to be reached at for this case only This does not update the phone number entered in t
336. pes that you have licensed for your S Series system are active for selection Select the physical library type you want to emulate and click Next Step The Library Parameters screen is displayed The parameters shown in the screen are the default values defined for the selected library type You can change the default values to match your environment physical system and license These values define the maximum number of Slots Ports and Devices that can be associated with this library The S Series system allows you to change these values once the library is created 5 Select the Fibre Channel host port on which to map the library Choose either host port O or host port 1 6 Enter the Library Name if you want to change the default library name to one of your choice 7 Enter the maximum number of cartridge Slots Import Export Ports and Tape Drives for the library emulation and click Next Step NOTE Specifying fewer Slots than a physical library of the type you selected can result in the failure of your backup application to see or access all cartridges associated with the library 8 By default all hosts connected to the S Series system have access to all virtual devices Click Create Library to acknowledge this message and continue The new library now exists and a summary of its emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed GENERAL PROPERTIES Figure 2 13 Library Parameter Summary 9 Choose one of the fo
337. pported backup applications and data types 3 Select the checkbox beside each application and data type whose deduplication state you want to change 4 Select Disable or Enable from the Change Policy State listings at the top of the screen and click GO The screen refreshes and the Policy State field reflects your changes Make sure that when you disable top level policies subordinate policies of the same type are also disabled 2 39 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual By Policy or Management Class Policies and management classes define the backup characteristics for a group of one or more clients that have similar backup requirements Delta differencing deduplication technology allows you to enable and disable deduplication for certain policies or management classes for a backup application through the Console Manager Deduplication is enabled by default for all backup policies and management classes from all hosts when delta differencing deduplication technology is licensed In some cases where you do not want to deduplicate data from a certain set of hosts defined by a policy or a management class you can disable deduplication for that policy or management class only For example you can disable deduplication for one or more NetBackup NDMP policies or TSM MS Exchange management classes Changing Deduplication Algorithm At the core of deduplication is delta differencing Delta differenci
338. pt to the extent these restrictions are prohibited by applicable law or prohibited by the terms of any open source license You must not and must not allow any other person to a use the Software to conduct comparative or competitive analyses including benchmarking b reverse engineer decompile reverse compile reduce in human readable form or otherwise access the source code of the Software c sublicense rent lease modify enhance supplement create derivative works from the Software d copy the Software other than as expressly allowed e remove or otherwise tamper with any proprietary notices contained on or in the Software or f use or permit the Software to be used to perform services for third parties whether on a service bureau or time sharing basis or otherwise without our express written authorization 4 Authorized Copies HDS will provide You with one copy of the media and documentation for the Software For Software licensed under an enterprise license HDS grants to You right to make copies of the Software solely for Your own internal use within the scope of the enterprise license You may also make one copy of back up or archival copies of Software solely for Your own internal use You must reproduce on all copies made all proprietary and copyright notices contained on or in the Software 5 Software Transfers Except to the extent otherwise provided in any applicable open source license You must not transfer the Software
339. r The Copy Now wizard is displayed Suber Cancel Figure 3 14 Copy Now Screen 4 Select the cartridge to copy and click Submit The selected cartridge is scheduled for a Mirror Copy Pool and it overrides lower priority jobs 3 24 Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Non Deduplicated Copy The Non Deduplicated Copy task allows you to force replication of cartridges that are in a Backup Postprocessing state Cartridges are still deduplicating during this state The cartridges will be replicated in a nondeduplicated manner This can have a significant impact on bandwidth and space constraints on the target system You should review the cartridge Slots Summary Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries on a daily basis to check for cartridges that are stuck in the state Backup Postprocessing If deduplication cannot be completed cartridges can remain in a Backup Postprocessing state for an extended period of time In this case they Should be manually replicated using the Non Deduplicated Copy option To copy a nondeduplicated cartridge 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Expand the navigation tree to see the Slots and Mirror Copy Pools associated with this library and click Slots to display the Summary f
340. r es gel Borage Poms ay Poz 4 q einen Hdoregs LUH Dedells Per kods a Hiorsgs LUMS Nods a a Canrdges ie Desi Arrays LUH Eisius Frafsrrej Feis Hon Freterred Feth o T m 1i a i a I ri E L zi fi gi F 1002F i ed T 4 STIE Figure 1 10 Storage LUNs Details Verify that all the storage LUNs in the system are assigned to a storage pool and are mounted Adding Storage LUNs to a Storage Pool If you are adding storage to a node all of the processing node services for the controller and expansion arrays must be up and available to be able to add storage Follow these steps to add storage LUNs to an existing storage pool 1 Navigate to the Storage Pool 1 screen System gt Chassis gt Storage Pools gt Storage Pool 1 where you want to add the storage LUNs The Storage Pool 1 screen is displayed it Storage Pool 1 5 7i 2 F D Emini Callapse Rates Tasks Add Sterage y Chassis pia t gqasepaton coni age Capcity as i MERAL SK AFRAY a Shorage Pools Total Physical Capacity 0 00 KB Disk AUT any lige aT ish Sa tidor 0 J ie elaine Shp Bequest Sarge ac a Srl ae iB spe iones E iD spe iode aj LUi Mapai Sadra s Lg in ajaa dfi age Poot HT ATS Pld T ORAGE Poil Aj Storage Pool 1 Ho Hotiicathedps Foal aj age Lia Status al Cart higes Eo dsk Annas Figure 1 11 Storage Pool 1 screen 2 Click Add Storage in the Tasks bar The Add Storage wizard Is display
341. raphical representation of the available free space total logical space and daily logical space usage of the system over the last three months The portal also stores the last five notifications received from the system the last five system capacity and backup summary reports and job counts of the last five days to facilitate constant monitoring of the system by the Hitachi Customer Support team This section provides information about accessing the HPP support portal and using this Portal to interact with the Hitachi Customer Support Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Accessing the HPP Support Portal Follow these steps to access the online HPP support portal 1 Launch a supported internee browser window The HPP support portal supports the following browsers e Internet Explorer 8 and greater e Firefox 3 6 and greater e Safari 5 3 and greater e Opera 11 0 and greater e Chrome 8 0 and greater 2 Access the HPP support portal by entering the following for the URL https deltaview sepaton com The Hitachi HPP Support Portal Login screen is displayed Hitachi Data Systems le ans Hitachi Protection Platform Support Portal Figure 6 44 HPP Support Portal Login Screen 3 Enter the login information e If you are an existing user enter the Username and Password and click Login e If you are a new user click New User link to begin the secure registration process a The user reg
342. ratio NetBackup Catalog Make sure the policy you use to backup the NetBackup catalog has deduplication disabled In tape image replication environments the benefit is that the catalog will be replicated sooner nor does the system waste time attempting to deduplicate the catalog Open File Always run NetBackup s Open File Manager when backing up open Manager files for optimal deduplication performance TSM Options Collocation Because backups on the same cartridge will not deduplicate against one another you should disable collocation Concurrent The Oracle agent in relation to TSM drive mounts must consider the Mount Points following The RMAN script defines the number of channels configured drive mounts The number of channels must be equal to the client node s maximum number of mount points Device Operating system software particularly Windows can cause TSM Pathnames device pathnames to get lost To avoid this reconfigure the TSM paths Otherwise set the SAN Autodiscovery for TSM to autodetect path or device name changes and update them Mount Set the Mount Retention parameter to 5 which then ejects a cartridge Retention after five minutes MOUNT RETENTION 5 Hitachi recommends you set MOUNT RETENTION to five minutes but it is not required Default is 60 minutes Maintaining Your 1500 6 35 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Table 6 1 S Series Data Protection System Best Practices
343. ratios Industry s Fastest Backup and Restore Times The system is designed to optimize the ingest and restore times for the latest backup generation by storing it in an undeduplicated format This minimizes disk I O and results in extremely fast restore times Concurrently with ingest delta differencing deduplication technology begins differencing Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual previous backups against the latest one shrinking them by replacing data In common with the latest backup by pointers to that data in the latest generation Logging I nto the Console Manager NOTE For optimal Console Manager viewing make Sure your screen resolution is set to a minimum of 1024 x 768 Using lower screen resolution settings can result in excessive scrolling and other undesirable screen behaviors Follow these steps to log into the Console Manager 1 Launch a supported Internet browser window The Console Manager supports the following browser versions and later releases e Internet Explorer 8 e Firefox 3 6 e Safari 5 3 e Chrome 8 0 e Opera 11 0 2 Access the Console Manager by entering the following for the URL https lt ip address of S Series system gt When you first attempt to log in to the S Series system using the public IP network you will receive a Secure Connection Failure Alert This alert is sent from your browser as it assumes you want to authenticat
344. rce or a target cartridge results in the following behavior e f a source cartridge is deleted this results in the mirror broken state in the Mirror Copy Pool on the target S Series system e fa target cartridge is deleted the cartridge disappears from the Mirror Copy Pool on the source S Series system The S Series system allows you to delete cartridges with or without data erasure feature 6 16 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Deleting Cartridges with Data Erasure 1 When you have selected all the cartridges you want to delete and erase select the option With data erasure at the bottom of the Cartridge Details screen Update Figure 6 12 Cartridge Details Screen 2 Click Go A confirmation message is displayed on the Destroy Cartridge wizard To continue deleting the cartridge click Yes Click No or Cancel to return to the Cartridge Details screen without deleting any cartridges Are you sure that you want to delete the cartridge s Deleting cartridges makes their data unavailable and removes the barcode from the system After deleting the cartridges you should reinventory the media in your backup application Help Yes No Cancel Figure 6 13 Destroy Cartridge Step 1 3 If you clicked Yes the system deletes the selected cartridges and the progress of the delete operation is indicated on the Destroy Cartridge wizard Data erasure occurs in the background after a cart
345. rcodes of the cartridges that have been replicated Backup Name The name of the backup set Client The client name Status The current deduplication state of the backup set Data Type The type of data backed up Allocated Capacity Total storage capacity allocated to the cartridge Logical Data The size of backup before deduplication Used Capacity The storage capacity whether or not deduplicated The physical storage capacity currently available for additional The name of the backup set that this backupset was compared against during deduplication If the reference backup set has been overwritten or been deleted this field will be blank The mount point or other value that distinguishes this backup from others with the same policy and host S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual An internal Hitachi Customer Support diagnostic code Backup Summary Report NOTE The Backup Summary report provides delta differencing deduplication technology specific information to you and is only available when delta differencing deduplication technology is licensed on your system Backup Summary report lists the detailed information about the backup sets on an S Series system This information includes backup name client policy used the time when the backup started delta differencing algorithm used for the backup set type of backup deduplication status data type percentage of data backed up logical and physic
346. re that enables backups replication and deduplication to occur Simultaneously enabling your data a faster path to data protection Implementing Hitachi Replication Tape image replication associates the S Series system doing the data replication with the S Series system receiving the data using a source to target model A source to target pair can be a library on one S Series system associated with a library on the target S Series system The source to target pair could optionally be set up on the slot level The steps to set up a source to target pair are described in the following diagram Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual TARGET Step 1 Create a new Virtual library and cartridges to receive replication data on ug Library the target 52100 appliance amp Cartridges log Library Step 2 Create a library on the source 2100 appliance that exactly matches the target library Step 3 Create Replication qil DeltaRemote LAN WAN Targets targets Creating target will assign specified library for E4 agit Target receiving Replication data CP DeltaRemote LAN WAN Libraries Step 4 Manage Replication 7 4 AR library on the source lt meta appliance This will reference pp Slots the replication targets on the Mirror Copy Pools receiving 52100 appliance Step 5 Create Mirror Copy Pool in each Destination library on the Source
347. reconstruct the disk arrays and the logical drives If an unsupported USB device is connected operation of the system unit can be affected Note that the USB ports are USB 2 0 compliant Including protrusion As an exception the cable clamp for an AC cable is not included Including the slide rails and inner rails 3 62 kg used for installation to a rack cabinet Rough estimate of the power consumption in normal operation 10 We recommend installing the system unit in a dedicated room You may feel the noise annoying depending on the installation environment or location If you install the system unit in an office room be careful enough to the environment and location Note that the rotational speed of the fans is controlled by the temperature inside the system unit If the maximum load continues for an extended amount of time at high temperature or one of the fans gets out of order the noise level may exceed this standard level Note also that on startup or reboot the fans run at full speed and the noise level may exceed this standard level S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 15 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual A 16 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Oracle RMAN Scripting Best Practices with the S Series Systems This appendix provides Hitachi recommended Oracle RMAN and S
348. red separately S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications A 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Physical Characteristics of S Series Systems The S Series storage system is a 2U sized disk drive enclosure housing up to twelve low profile 1 inch high 3 5 inch form factor drives of the following types 4 0 TB SAS 7200 rpm NOTE A mixed population of drive types is not supported All the drives in the S Series system must be of a similar type Each individual disk drive is hot pluggable and field replaceable Figure A 1 shows a front view of an S1500 enclosure without and with the bezel Component Locations The S Series major component locations are shown in Figure A 1 Front side Figure A 1 CR 220S front view without and with bezel A 2 S1500 Components LEDs and Specifications Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Table A 1 CR 220S front components The operation panel has switches to control the system unit and LEDs for the status of the system Operation panel Green On___Accessing HO Accessing HDD 2 HDD status LED l Error occurred Amber Blink1 On going data rebuild es USB connectors a USB devices can be connected front side Extension storage bays 3 5 inch 1 122 An internal HDD 3 5 inch can be installed to an extension storage bay 3 5 inch See Operation panel on page A 4 Locking the Front beze
349. reen displays the overall capacity for the selected storage pool and a graphical representation showing the Logical Used and Available storage capacity A table listing the library and FireSafe capacity is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information StoragePoo 1 StoragePool 1 Capacity StoragePool StoragePool_ Total Physical Capacity Reserved fee System Usable Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available C apacty Nari Libraries Disk Volume StoragePoo Library Mhk Valime Aoc ated apacity Reserved tor System Usatie Capac Ey Logik al Guta Used C aparity Avalide Capacity Hats Give Figure 5 21 Storage Pool x Capacity Screen The Storage Pool x Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 3 Storage Pool x Capacity Table Storage Pool x Capacity Table Total Physical Total physical storage capacity purchased and installed on the Capacity system This is the sum of all LUN capacity in the pool Reserved for The space required for system overhead and metadata in the System pool Storage Pool 1 or the FireSafe can have more space reserved than other storage pools due to delta differencing deduplication metadata that can be up to 2 TB Usable Capacity The physical storage capacity in the pool that is available for user data This is the total Physical Capacity less the space reserved for the system Logical Data The size of all backup data in the pool currently re
350. relaxed It is no longer mandatory to assign prefix naming conventions to Oracle data files to make sure the data is properly deduplicated however there is no need to change existing scripts that conform to legacy Hitachi guidelines Backups of Oracle databases using RMAN directly from the Oracle database server to the S Series system are supported provided the required RMAN parameter and option changes are implemented The supported versions of Oracle are 9i 10G R2 and 11G R1 The script integration supports performing RMAN backups from a disk staging area to the S Series system for flat file backups and for backing up Oracle databases with the NBU Oracle agent TSM Oracle TDP and the NetWorker Module for Oracle These agents also use Oracle RMAN Refer to Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server on page 1 for complete details and script procedures Windows Server Best Practices This section lists Windows sever best practices for the Hitachi S Series system Preventing Windows Event Log Errors by Disabling the Removable Storage Manager 6 44 To prevent windows event log errors you should disable the Windows Removable Storage Manager e Stop the service e Set start to disable Refer to the following link for instructions http seer entsupport symantec com docs 240378 htm Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Symantec NetBackup and Delta Differencing Ded
351. ribed as follows Source Job Source Dest J ob Destination Timeout Compression A unique job ID string for each job for example 283098 Hitachiost Hitachinbu_ 1346347541 C2 Fl _Rl 1 The source image or part of an image being copied for example septriageO1_ 1333159236 C3 F11l R3 5 The part before the is the OST image name and the part after is the Subimage ID for parts of the image that are duplicated in parallel The source location of the duplicated image for example airsource dvsource The first part is the source storage server name and the second part is the source disk volume name The name of the image on the destination system for example septriageOl 1333159236 Cl F1l The destination location for the duplicated image for example 182 15 0 2 dvdest The first part is the IP address of the destination storage server and the second part is the destination disk volume name A I R Supports one to many duplication so a single source could be duplicated to multiple destinations in parallel Each of these would be separate jobs and would have individual entries in the report with different destinations The timeout specifies how long an image would delay duplication to get the benefits of low bandwidth duplication for example 9 1 2012 3 46 36 PM After this timestamp has been exceeded the duplication will go wholesale if needed Indicates whether data compression is enabled for the duplication job Pos
352. ridge is deleted 565 completed Pat beg Help Pini Figure 6 14 Destroy Cartridge Step 2 When the delete operation is complete a success message is displayed Maintaining Your 1500 6 17 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 20 Cut 20 Carinidges deleted successfully w Figure 6 15 Destroy Cartridge Step 3 4 Click Finish to exit the wizard and return to the Cartridge Details screen When secure erase has completed on the cartridge s an alert notification is displayed on the Notifications screen Deleting Cartridges without Data Erasure 1 When you have selected all the cartridges you want to delete click Go at the bottom of the screen Make sure the option With Data Erasure iS not selected The Destroy Cartridge wizard is displayed Figure 6 13 To continue deleting the cartridge click Yes Click No or Cancel to return to the Cartridge Details screen without deleting any cartridges If you clicked Yes the S Series system deletes the selected cartridges and the progress of the delete operation is indicated on the Destroy Cartridge wizard Figure 6 14 When the delete operation is complete a success message Is displayed Figure 6 15 Click Finish to exit the wizard and return to the Cartridge Details screen Editing Libraries Once created libraries have several parameters that can be modified including the maximum number of Slots Ports Devices that can be associated wi
353. ripened CONFIGURATION OF UST HOULS CS Set Deh Shor OST Master Mode ge Al SRE Node 1 992 168 155 Se O47 Plug in Genwi a peor Device Name end E te Cage Status eu 5 ecaventvonmen So ce SE ee Degraded ale BRE Hode 0 Cries E m SRL iode 4 Faisg T 3 LiM Mapping MP gt te Eg Librarias J gai Storage Pools Jj Storage Ms j Cartriages Credentials RF AB oink Arrays Usman noc Syslom Dale and Tien ORF 1744 14 EST Figure 4 32 Source Storage Server Status Screen Destination Storage Server At this point you have completed the initial configuration phase of the Source Storage Server You will later configure the cross replication Disk Volume Pair for the Source Next you will complete the initial configuration phase of the Destination Storage Server You will later configure the cross replication Disk Volume Pair for the Destination Gempand Co apse Afis S Chassis capecodsangate com F ae Cane ary gt Saieta Sine gt za hi No Nonncatons Found e087 Plug in Gewnlosws E ge SEL Modes WOTHEOA TIONS FOR OST Figure 4 33 OST Destination Storage Server Creation Task 3 Navigate to the OST directory System gt Chassis gt OST a Click Create Storage Server from the Tasks bar for the Destination Storage Server The OST Storage Server Creation Wizard is displayed Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R 4 25 Replication User Guide a OST Storage Server Craation Wizard D
354. rns Pending Figure 6 50 SUPPORT amp PRODUCT TOOLS HOS On Call Team Alert Notification Catalog Send Email Generate Default License Manufacturing Only CUSTOMER DATA Product Search Support Ticket Audits Support Ticket HealthChecks License Keys Configuration Rewisions Alert Notifications Triaged Alerts PRODUCT USAGE REPORTS Backup Summary Reports DeltaRemote Job History OST AIR History HITACHI Inspire the Next CUSTOMER SUPPORT REPORTS Overall Metrics Reporting Dashboard CSE Scoretlarc System Capacity VENDOR PORTALS Choice Logistics Unisys Customer Support Screen The Customer Support screen allows you to perform the following two tasks e Open New Case e Case Search The Customer Support screen also displays the list of open cases against your user profile if any and the list of open cases against your company Open New Case Clicking on the Open New Case link on the Customer Support screen displays a form that can be used to create a new support case for the Hitachi technical support team Figure 6 51 The information entered in this form allows the Hitachi technical support team to get a detailed description of the Support issue encountered at a particular site Maintaining Your 1500 6 61 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 6 62 Home gt Customer Support gt Open Case Case Details Account Select an Account x Case Type Suppor
355. rotection Platform 1500 User Manual After adding the target on the source system the target name and IP address appear under the Destination Libraries Tape image replication creates the cartridges on the source S Series system automatically once the source and target systems are configured Step 4 Replication is an automated process that requires no human intervention It is based on the creation of a Mirror Copy Pool that synchronizes the source and the target based on user defined policies You must create the Mirror Copy Pool in each Destination library on the source system The Mirror Copy Pool defines 1 Start and end Slot Defining the start and the end Slot allows you to replicate selected cartridges only The cartridges that are not within the Slot range will not be replicated Library on the S Series system from where the data is to be replicated Policy for replication such as priority and policy details for synchronizing the source and the target system NOTE Only backups performed after the Mirror Copy Pool is created are replicated previous backups are not replicated Replication Use Models Data replication solutions are typically performed to accomplish the following overall goals e Provide protection against data loss due to operator or machine error e Protect against data loss due to disaster e Provide historical data records Protecting against data loss due to operator or machine error is the most typ
356. rt Portal The Hitachi S Series License Generator is available in the HPP support portal at https deltaview sepaton com Returning Users Begin with Step 5 New Users Click New User Enter a First Name Last Name and Email Address then click REGISTER 3 You will receive an email within the hour with a Web link that allows you to provide registration details Click FINISH and a second email provides you with login credentials Log in to the HPP support portal at https deltaview sepaton com Go to Account Management in the left pane and under Products click on the gold License Key icon on the far right of your S Series listing The VTL platform License page is displayed Click the gold key License Download icon on the top far right The license txt dialog is displayed Save the license txt file Continue with the section Installing a License Key Installing a License Key The license key identifies The system The serial number The number of storage LUNs The Hitachi features for which your system is licensed Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 10 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual To create virtual devices or to use a Hitachi software application you will need to install the Hitachi provided license file if it was not done by your Hitachi Customer Support representative during product installation This file needs to be accessible via your network for this installation process The
357. rtual device ID of 1 on node O has a device ID of 1 but on processing node 1 13 Choose one of the following options a Click Create Cartridges to continue defining the virtual cartridges to associate with the new library Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual b Click Create more Tape Drive s to define additional tape drives to associate with the new library The Create Tape Drive s screen is displayed c Click Cancel to exit the Create Library wizard CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Figure 2 32 Create Cartridges 14 Define the barcode template to use with the cartridges for this library Although you can define multiple templates you will be creating the cartridges with only one template at this time a Enter the barcode prefix The barcode prefix may be one to six alpha characters b Enter the number of digits for the barcode number c Enter a suffix for your cartridge barcodes if required by your backup application Otherwise ignore the field d Enter the starting barcode number and click Add e Repeat steps a to d for each additional barcode template to create 15 Select the barcode template to use for the cartridges and click Next Step The cartridge types compatible with your tape drive emulation are displayed CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS E boon ip IFS ug LTO BEAR kag SOLT been Figure 2 33 Cartridge Types 16 Select the physical cartridge type to emulate and click Next St
358. rv sparcv9 st grep i LTO for LTO and comparing this to the tape drive string found in var adm messages If tape drive is unsupported by the kernel configure st conf to allow variable block mode For Solaris Persistent Naming see Section 8 Persistent Binding for Tape Devices at the following link http docs sun com source 819 0139 NDMP To optimize backup performance NDMP requires the following string netbackup db config SIZE_DATA_BUFFERS_ NDMP 262144 Refer to the NetBackup documentation for details on how to configure buffers Maintaining Your 1500 6 51 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Operational Best Practices The section describes the operational best practices for the delta differencing deduplication system and the backup environment Key Metrics It is essential to monitor the health and quality levels of all equipment contained within the infrastructure of the backup environment This includes but is not limited to monitoring the following key metrics e Amount of data to be backed up over a 24 hour period e Changes in backup policy retention periods can affect capacity utilization e S Series system storage capacity utilization trends e Data deduplication ratio trends e Failed backup jobs and media server errors e Fibre Channel link bandwidth utilization and errors as measured by the switch e Data ingest rate per S Series system fiber port as measured by the backup application
359. s a Click Create Tape Drive s to continue defining the virtual tape drives to associate with the new library The Create Tape Drive s screen is displayed b Click Cancel to exit the Create Library wizard NOTE Clicking Cancel exits the Create Library wizard The library does exist at this time however it has no virtual tape drives associated with it These devices can be added at a later time Canceling from the wizard prior to this step exits the wizard without creating the library 9 TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS dp HP LTO dp HP LTO2 mj HPLTOD aie HP LTOS EK J990 g IBAA 3597 p IBM Ultrium L TO 1 g IBM Lilt LT IBM Ultnum LTO 2 BM Ultrium L Tod Guantuwm OLT Td0d inn gall Quantum OL T 4000 Quantum SuperDLT Quantum SuperDLT a Se SM aay e See Sony AlT 2 Set Sony AIT 3 Gye StorageTek 5840 Gye StorageTek T3940 i gl Figure 2 29 Create Tape Drives The tape drive parameters that you specify create one or more tape drives of the same type under the control of the same processing node and Fibre Channel host port From the listings select the processing node on which to configure the tape drive NOTE The Hitachi processing node x option is present if you have a multinode S Series system only 10 Only those tape drive types that you have licensed for your S Series system are active for selection Select the physical tape drive type you want to emulate and click Next Step The Tape Drive Parameters screen is
360. s dropped for a significant period of time If necessary a Hitachi Customer Support representative can test the link speed and latency using service tools that are built into the S Series system software Unexpectedly long transfers can also be caused by cartridges being replicated wholesale see previous point Monitoring Your 1500 5 46 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Replication Not Starting 5 47 If replication does not proceed as expected see whether the destination library target is offline or whether the availability window for the source and target are aligned and in sync If the destination library has been manually placed in an offline state replication cannot start To correct this issue log in to the Console Manager as the administrator then click the Tape Image Replication tab and navigate to the LAN WAN Replication Libraries screen from the navigation tree Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries Select the offline library that you want to bring online then click Online in the Tasks bar and confirm your selection when prompted After the library is brought back online replication resumes normally Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Monitoring Your 1500 5 48 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 5 49 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Maintaining Your 1500 This section provide
361. s is the total Allocated Capacity minus the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the Library The Cartridge Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 6 Cartridge Capacity Table Cartridge Capacity Table Barcode The barcode of the cartridges in the library or disk volume Allocated The total storage capacity allocated to the cartridge This Capacity capacity might be oversubscribed This allocation does not consume space until data is written to the cartridge Logical Data The size of all backup data currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage used for data whether deduplicated or not Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the cartridge Monitoring Your S1500 5 22 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual The barcode name in the Cartridge Capacity table is a link to display the capacity information about the cartridge Viewing Additional Information About a Cartridge 5 23 To view additional capacity information about a cartridge click the Barcode name field link on the Library Capacity screen Figure 5 22 The screen displays capacity information for this cartridge and a graphical representation showing the Logical and Used storage capacity Figure 5 23 If there are backups on this cartridge a table listing the backup information is displayed You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity
362. s procedures for performing functions that Support or manipulate the virtual devices using the S Series Console Manager and for performing various system maintenance tasks General Host Access Management LUN Mapping Editing Cartridges Moving Cartridges Deleting Cartridges Editing Libraries Destroying Libraries Destroying Tape Drives Saving Configuration Settings Restoring Configuration Settings Creating a Support Ticket System Maintenance Tasks S Series VTL Delta Differencing Deduplication and Tape Image Replication Best Practices HPP Support Portal Accessing the HPP Support Portal HPP Support Portal Information This section assumes that you have logged into the S Series Console Manager as the administrator Maintaining Your 1500 6 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual General Host Access Management The S Series system has a global switch that defines the host access capability This is referred to as the Host Access Mode This switch has two settings All Devices and User Defined The default Host Access Mode is All Devices In this mode the LUN Mapping feature is inactive All hosts enabled on the SAN see all defined devices libraries and tape drives By default all hosts on the SAN to which the S Series system is connected can see all defined virtual devices The S Series system provides the means to enable a host to see all devices default state or no devices at all When LUN mapping
363. scription feature is enabled See Oversubscribing on page 4 17 for instructions on how to set up this feature CARTRIOGE PARAMETERS me PrevStep NextStep Figure 2 20 Storage Pool Selection 19 Click Next Step Hae Figure 2 21 Cartridge Summary 20 The new cartridges now exist and a summary of the emulation parameters and virtual properties is displayed Click Next GENERAL lt a Figure 2 22 Summary Screen The Create Library wizard has finished and a new library tape drive s and cartridges now exist and are summarized on the final page of the wizard These devices are accessible through the navigation tree 21 Click Return to exit the wizard and return to the System screen 2 23 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual NOTE If the User Defined Host Access mode is enabled you must map these devices to hosts on the SAN See LUN Mapping on page 6 4 for more information Creating Tape Drives Tape drives may be added to an existing library emulation at any time The Create Tape Drive task is available from the Tasks bar in any of the Library Emulation Status screens Follow these steps to add a tape drive to a library 1 From the navigation tree select the library to which the new tape drive is to be added 2 Click Create Tape Drive in the Tasks bar The Create Tape Drive wizard begins TAPE DRIVE PARAMETERS gi HP LTO ge HP LTO dp HP LTO je HP LTOS gg IBM 3530 kg SM
364. ser Manual Physical Size GB The backup size after deduplication in GB This particular field can be in several different states depending on the state of the backup set including displaying O zero when a deduplication job has started but has not yet recorded a deduplication sizing difference a numeric value in the case of hardware compression being employed or when a backup set deduplication job is only Partially Reclaimed upon completion of deduplication this number would decrease when the backup set is partially deduplicated the number decreases and finally when the backup set deduplication job is complete you get the true After deduplication size in GB Dedupe Ratio The deduplication ratio achieved for the backup set Savings GB The amount of storage space saved after the deduplication process was initiated in GB Reclaimed The current percentage of the space reclaimed For backups waiting for deduplication any nonzero value is due to the hardware or software compression For partially deduplicated backups this value will increase after the job is complete Unprocessed GB The amount of data that was unprocessed by the deduplication process Seconds Elapsed The amount of time in seconds that the deduplication process required Rate MB sec The amount of data per unit of time that it took to deduplicate the data MB sec Reference The name of the backup set that this backupset was compared against during d
365. ses all enabled hosts in the SAN list See Figure 6 1 on page 2 to see all defined devices in the S Series system All LUN mapping information is lost To disable LUN Mapping perform the following steps 1 Navigate to the Host Access Mode screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping The Host Access Mode screen is displayed Figure 6 2 2 Click All Devices to select that mode and then click Apply A confirmation dialogue is displayed Figure 3 3 Click Yes to confirm the host access mode change A success message appears on the screen and the additional LUN mapping screens Device View and Host View are no longer available in the navigation tree 4 For each media server that can access the S Series system do the following before performing any backup restore operations e Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files Editing Cartridges Once created cartridges have several parameters that can be modified e The library with which they are associated e Capacity e Write Access In addition the S Series system has a FireSafe for cartridges Moving cartridges to the FireSafe causes the S Series system to mark those cartridges as vaulted making them unavailable for use by a backup application NOTE Make sure that all the active tape image replication jobs associated with a cartridge have been canc
366. should relabel the other cartridge s System Sizing It is important to size the system appropriately to provide adequate free storage for the space required by backups that will not be deduplicated until the environment meets the delta differencing deduplication requirements The best practices of sizing a system for delta differencing deduplication technology follow Maintaining Your 1500 6 37 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Cartridge Sizing and Backup J ob Concerns 6 38 There is a relationship between the backup job size and the cartridge size Sites running delta differencing deduplication should have the virtual tape cartridge capacity set properly for delta differencing deduplication to efficiently deduplicate backups Factors that affect cartridge sizing include the amount of incremental backups and number of tape drives used for the incremental backups The most recent backup of each policy is maintained in a nondeduplicated form to maximize ingestion and recovery speed These optimized backups take space in the so called landing zone The worst case landing zone requirement for each policy is equal to 2 Full_ backup Incremental _backup 1 67 which is the expected hardware compression size IN practice due to the concurrent processing capabilities of the system previous generation backups are being differenced and undergoing space reclamation while others are being ingested so the landing zone is
367. sible values are compression and no compression The current state of the duplication job See the States table below for details S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Create Time Wait Sec Restarts Last Update Logical Bytes Unique Bytes Compressed Bytes Reason The timestamp of when the duplication job was created for example 9 12 2012 1 36 46 PM The amount of time in seconds that a job had to wait from the time it was created until the time it first got to run Duplication jobs go into a queue and only a limited number of jobs are allowed to run simultaneously per configured node so if there are many jobs pending the wait times may increase The number of times a job had been restarted during its execution Jobs may be suspended multiple times during their execution for a variety of reasons for example waiting for deduplication instructions to be generated waiting for dependent images to duplication failures writing to the destination system etc The jobs will later restart and retry the number of times a job restarts is counted here The timestamp of when a job record was last updated for example 9 18 2012 3 16 43 PM The number of logical total bytes transferred for the duplication job This is the equivalent of the actual source size of the image or subimage that was copied The number of unique bytes after deduplication transferred for the duplication
368. siliency as described in Why Use Multiple Storage Pools There are performance considerations to the creation and configuration of storage pools that can affect deduplication ratios and processing capabilities All delta differencing deduplication considerations apply to tape image replication as well e Like data which has the following characteristics in common must be in the same storage pool for deduplication to occur Policy Host Data type Conversely you can put into separate storage pools or the same storage pools Microsoft Exchange files or database backups because they are of different data types e In multitenancy environments cartridges used by different companies should be in different storage pools Put Company A s backups into Storage Pool Company A put Company B s backups into Storage Pool Company B etc This also simplifies cost allocations across the companies In multitenancy environments you can allocate costs to companies based on the size of their storage pool Similarly enterprises with several subsidiaries divisions and departments can back up to different storage pools thereby segregating the data e Effective deduplication requires cartridges to stay in the same storage pool and for tape image replication systems this would be on the Same storage pool on both the source and target systems For example if you have a single storage pool on the source S Series system and two storage p
369. sinwinensy 2 1 Setting Up Your Network Configuration 2 1 Configuring a Static IP Address for Your System 2 2 Configuring Your System for DHCP 2 2 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Contents Contents 1 Changing Your System Host Name or Domain Name 2 2 Synchronizing Your System to an External NTP Server 2 3 Configuring Your System Time Zone Settings 2 3 Configuring Your System 10 GbE NIC Network 2 3 CEI ACCOUN Ger intr ake Sia cant ln a AR eae Ghana 2 4 Changing the Password ce ee 2 4 Setting User Preferences 0 cee eee ees 2 5 Changing the User Preferences 00000 2 5 Configuring Notifications a Mail Server Reports and SNMP AIMS 3o48G e425 eee eee ee bees Bs 2 6 Setting Up Notifications 0 000 cee eee 2 6 Adding Users to Receive Email Alerts 2 6 Configuring Notifications for Hitachi Technical Support 2 8 Changing the Notification Settings 2 8 Deleting a User from Notifications Setup List 2 8 Setting Up a Mail Server ee 2 9 setting UD REDOM Smi 3 5 teed ok ae dak On 2 9 Adding Users to Receive Reports 2 11 Changing the Report Settings 0 2 12 Deleting a User from the Report List 2 12 Deleting a Report from the List 2 13 Configuring SNMP Settings 0000 aes 2 13 Adding a Host to Receive SNMP Alerts 2 1
370. sociated with that library 3 Click the checkbox beside the device to map a host or hosts In the host selection drop down select the host to map If you want to select multiple hosts press the Ctrl key and click each host to map 5 Click Map The screen refreshes updating the Total Mapped column and Hosts column with your selections Repeat these steps to specify the host mapping for additional devices 7 For each media server that can access the S Series system do the following before performing any backup restore operations Rescan the SAN for hardware changes via the media server s operating system e Using the backup application rescan for new devices and update the device files 6 6 Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Mapping Devices on a Node In multi node systems tape drives often reside on different nodes You can filter the devices shown on this screen to only display devices residing on a specific node and map those devices to a host or hosts Follow these steps to map one or more hosts to a device 1 Navigate to the Device View screen System gt Chassis gt LUN Mapping gt Device View The Device View screen Is displayed Figure 6 4 Select the library to map hosts from the Library drop down menu near the top of the screen The screen refreshes to show that library and all tape drives associated with that library Select the processing node from the View
371. ss svc_alerts_ vti sepatoncrm com b Select the name of the S Series system from the Chassis listings c Select the All alert s to report from the Alerts listings All Send all notifications errors warnings info d Specify the Long format of the reported information from the Alert Format listings Long Detailed message describing the notification e Select the All Event Source f Select the All Configuration setting All Send auto save configuration when it is changed 4 When all selections have been made click Add to add the Hitachi Technical Support team to the list of added users NOTE For users to receive email alerts and reports from the S Series system you must configure the email server See Setting Up a Mail Server on page 2 9 Changing the Notification Settings You may want to change the notification settings of an existing user To change the type of alerts received for an existing user address in the list of users you must remove that user first and then add the user again with the new alert settings Deleting a User from Notifications Setup List You may want to remove an existing user from the list of users receiving notifications To remove a user from the list on the Notifications Setup screen 1 Select the email address you intend to delete by clicking on the checkbox besides it 2 Click Remove The list refreshes and no longer displays that user s email address The deleted user s w
372. st of cartridges with the capability to be viewed as per a group For example clicking on the echo copy pool state Mirror Complete will display the following screen Mirror Complete Tasks Restore Media Refresh SUMMARY OF MIRROR COMPLETE CARTRIDGES 99 items found displaying 1 to 25 of items found 61234089 Barcode Cartridge Status Local Library Destination Library Copy Pool Last Mirrored 480001 Up To Date Library 0 192 168 10 111 CHO 4B Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 21 2011 09 04 32 480002 Up To Date Library 0 192 166 10 111 CHO 4B Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 21 2011 01 09 37 480003 Up To Date Library 0 192 168 10 111 CHO 48 Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 20 2011 22 44 27 480004 Up To Date Library 0 192 168 10 111 CHO 48 Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 20 2011 22 55 34 460005 Up To Date Library 0 192 168 10 111 CHO 48 Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 20 2011 21 42 57 480006 Up To Date Library 0 192 168 10 111 CHO 4B Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 21 2011 00 00 47 480007 Up To Date 192 168 10 111 CHO 48 Mirror Copy Pool 1 01 21 2011 00 25 43 Figure 5 34 Summary of Mirror Complete Cartridges This Summary screen allows you to group the list of cartridges in this state by its local library destination library or copy pool By default this screen displays the list of all the cartridges currently in this state To view the additional information for a particular cartridge click the link in the Barcode field on the S
373. stem The following list defines the behavior of the system when the storage pool capacity is 98 percent consumed Warning notifications are displayed on the Console Manager If email alerts are configured emails are sent to the specified users If SNMP traps are configured alerts are sent to the management Stations The Reclaim Space link is displayed on the Storage Pool Status screen All writes will shut down and a Writes Disabled summary is displayed on the Storage Pool Status screen NOTE Hitachi recommends that you free up extra storage space at this point You can now perform the following tasks Erase Cartridges Reclaim Space Enable Writes Erase Cartridges Erasing cartridges allows you to create extra storage space by erasing or relabeling the cartridges in the scratch pool Erasing data from expired cartridges that contain deduplicated data will not free the same amount of storage capacity as a cartridge that contains data that has not been deduplicated Configuring the 1500 2 34 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The S Series system provides a Cartridge to Backup Summary report to assist you in identifying the cartridges that are consuming more space and can be expired to create free storage space in the storage pool NOTE When EMC NetWorker attempts to perform backups while in this condition it will attempt to write to an available cartridge This write will not be successful and NetWor
374. stname capecod sangate com Chassis Serial Number 1154 Revision Tag VTL_6 1 0 13 Job ID Source Jol Source DestJob Destinatio 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuy 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuf ss capeco netbackug 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy s5 capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 160 netba netbackuy ss capeco netbackuf 192 168 11 rTimeout Compress State Minimize Create Tin Wait sec Restarts Last Updai Logical By Unique By HHHH compressi done FARAH 4 O HHHH 379072 579072 HHH compressidone HHHH a O HHHH 1024 1024 HH compressidone HHHH O HHHH 2048 2048 HH compressidone HHHH 6 O HHHH 2048 2048 HHHH compressidone HHHH 5 O HHHH 7168 7168 HHHH compressi done FARAH 6 O HHHHHHH 10082308 3791116 HHHH compressi done FARAH 2 O HHHH 6914048 3942004 HH compressidone HHHH a O HHHH 4096 4096 HHH compressidone HHHH a O HHHH 1024 1024 HHH compressi done HHHH a O HHHH 2048 2048 HH compressidone HHHH O HHHH 6062080 6062080 Figure D 5 Sample OST A I R History Report The OST A I R History Report and the OST Optimized Duplication History Report field descriptions are desc
375. storage pool Storage Pool Status Parameter Details The Storage Pool Status screen shows the following parameters Total Physical Capacity Total usable physical storage capacity associated with this storage pool Allocated User Capacity Amount of physical storage capacity that can potentially be consumed by the cartridges currently defined in this storage pool Capacity Used This is the amount of physical storage in use by the cartridges defined in that storage pool It provides an indication of how much data has already been written to those cartridges Cartridges Number of cartridges defined in that storage pool Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 1 14 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Maximum Number of Cartridges per Storage LUN The maximum number of cartridges that can be created on a single storage LUN is 16 000 Number of Storage LUNs Number of storage LUNs contained in that storage pool Extent Size Amount of data written The write size is fixed at 32 MB Disk Array n Disk array s in this S Series system A disk array is a controller array and its associated expansion arrays S Series systems cite a single disk array only NOTE If you have delta differencing deduplication technology licensed on your system the amount of Capacity Used includes the deduplication metadata on the cartridges Confirming Storage LUNs The following screens depict the health of the storage LU
376. storage that are designed to provide maximum data protection and availability The S Series platform offers a scalable architecture to meet the demands of your backup environment You can create virtual devices libraries and tape drives through the S Series Console Manager There can be one or more tape drives associated with a library Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Delta differencing deduplication technology is a bundled feature of the S Series system that makes powerful deduplication technology available to your backup environment Delta differencing deduplication technology intelligently eliminates redundant portions of backup data When redundancies are found delta differencing deduplication technology eliminates them in each data sequence Delta differencing deduplication technology provides industry leading restore and vaulting performance Tape I mage Replication The Hitachi remote replication solution allows data centers to electronically replicate their data from an S Series system to a geographically remote S Series system This licensed application utilizes a secure network infrastructure to facilitate data movement between Hitachi S Series systems The Hitachi remote replication solution with deduplication is a high performance replication solution that leverages delta differencing deduplication technology and enables you to protect data faster by transferring only the changes between backups The tap
377. store eds OCom low Sten iedunicwiediep Resan Boken Mino OAcented Search Aetresh SUMMARY FOR SLOTS OO rmri4siriog ooo 8 oO Do g Figure 3 13 Slots Summary Screen 4 Click Restore Media in the Tasks bar The Restore Media wizard is displayed 5 Select the cartridge that you want to restore and click Submit A Success dialog appears confirming that the restore has been successfully scheduled Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 23 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Copy Now Use the Copy Now task to force replication cartridges that are Out of Sync The most common situation is when the source cartridge has changed yet the policy window is inactive Copy Now still sends the cartridge in a deduplicated manner If a cartridge transitions back to Backup Postprocessing after clicking Copy Now there is more deduplication that must take place Out of Sync cartridges are automatically replicated the next time the policy window is active The main use of this button is to replicate cartridges outside of a policy window To copy a cartridge now 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Expand the navigation tree to see the Slots and Mirror Copy Pools associated with this library and click Slots to display the Summary for Slots screen Figure 3 13 3 Click Copy Now in the Tasks ba
378. t Incident Site Select a Site Locatian Module Select a Module Serial Number Select a Serial Number Component Select a Component Contact Select a Contact Contact Method Email Customer XRef Alternate Phone Case Source Please Select Attachment Browse Mo file selected Summary Description 8000 Chars Left Impact Information Severity Priority Severity 1 Examples Urgent Severity 2 Examples High Severity 3 Medium Severity 4 Low Severity 1 Severity 2 Sewerity 3 Severity 4 To l 2 A Severity 1 problem is one that severely impacts the customer s ability to conduct normal business operations with its WTL Appliance This may mean that the customer s WTL Appliance or programs are down or not functioning and no procedural work around exists A Severity 2 problem is a problem in which the customer s operation is disrupted but there is enough capacity to remain productive and maintain necessary business lewel operations A Severity 3 problem is a problem that involves partial loss of non critical functionality The problem impairs some operations but allows the customer to continue to function A Severity 4 will be assigned to general usage questions recommendations for future product enhancements or modifications and calls that are informational in nature There is no impact on the quality performance or functionality of the customers WTL Appliance Figure 6 51 O
379. t appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme ala norme NMB O03 du Canada EMC Directive Safety Europe 2004 108 EC formerly 89 336 EEC EMC EN55022 Class A Limit EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 12 EN61000 3 3 Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC formerly 73 23 EEC EN60950 1 ROHS Directive 2011 65 EU EN50581 EN62474 EN62321 This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Regulatory Compliance Notices E 9 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 10 11 E 10 EMC Directive 2004 108 EC formerly 89 336 EEC EN55022 Class A Limit EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 12 EN61000 3 3 Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC formerly 73 23 EEC EN60950 1 Noise Emission Decree 3rd decree to the GPSG WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC ROHS Directive 2002 95 EC 2011 65 EU formerly 2002 95 EC EN50581 EN62474 EN62321 C KC KN22 Class A Limit KC KN24 C Tick AS NZ CISPR 22 EN55022 Class A Limit IRAM IEC60950 1 LT GOST GOST R EC60950 1 GOST GOST R 51318 22 Class A Limit GOST GOST R 51318 24 GOST GOST R 51317 3 2 GOST GOST R 51317 3 3 o BSMI CNS14336 1 BSMI CNS13438 Class A Limit Safety EMC Other Safety EMC MC Safety Safety E Regulatory Compliance Notices Germany Korea Australia New Zealand Russia Taiwan
380. tabase re buli H D 5 ms Steamin st Product Archi TZ E r pant beT E Michs R El Photobucket Selects Hits Dats Systems Cle 5 s To Acth Host And Sen T mS Taguines Updiat Profile Passwort Fliers Of Customer Photos C um OST Fi Oh mes FE port 16 Users Ondine D Hitachi Dats Systems Unlocks Invaluable Informat trom T m Es H r Lo out Link EJ Hitachi Data Systems Flash and High End Storage Leaderst pE nm g Infeperient SPC 1 Resul Changing GUI support log n password Hitachi Data Svstems dnmounces Int souir Chos 4 man LST LEL Syams S DES Lr m a LLE OST Cart Mism Cloud Flexitdity Contr and Improv E mics for S amp P E nts z EWH fury un res sI m fi H Systems domounces Intent te Acquire 5 t Acre from E z Int m Things That Matter Figure 6 46 HPP Support Portal Dashboard Screen Profile I nformation Your profile information is displayed on the bottom left pane of the Dashboard screen The profile information includes your login name and the number of users currently logged in and online on the HPP support portal Updating Profile I nformation 1 Click your profile name on the Dashboard screen The Update Profile screen is displayed Maintaining Your 1500 6 57 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Hitachi Data Systems MultiCare Ad cc emen IMeEr o Helpde me E ement Pi Inform IDI if D E Michse hugo Update Profile Password 13 Users Online Logoff Home gt Account Management
381. tained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the pool used for data whether deduplicated or not Monitoring Your S1500 5 20 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Available The physical storage in the pool currently available for Capacity additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the pool The Libraries Disk Volume Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 4 Libraries Disk Volume Capacity Table Libraries Disk Volume Capacity Table Library Disk The name of the library disk volume or FireSafe in Storage Volume Pool x Allocated Total storage capacity allocated to the Library This is the Capacity product of the number and size of the cartridges in the Library This value might be oversubscribed Logical Data The size of all backup data in the Library currently retained and visible to the backup application Used Capacity The physical storage in the Library used for data whether deduplicated or not Available The physical storage currently available in the Library for Capacity additional backup data This is the total Allocated Capacity minus the Used Capacity Ratio The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the Library The name of the Library Disk Volume in the Libraries Disk Volume Capacity table is a link to display capacity information about the li
382. tape drive was successful Figure C 5 Successful Unload Message Force Unload All Cartridges in Use in a Library To force unload all cartridges in use by a library 1 Navigate to the Library Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries The Library Summary screen is displayed Select the library whose drives you want to unload The Device Summary screen for that library is displayed Library _ 4 0 Eys Calame heres Tae Crest Canrgge Ced Tae Die Edi ibra Destra Lorarj Force Unica All Chassis br sspr sepsin omm E a apei Cerys Tos Lerini Frocsssing Hsia id Processing Pon Map Cartridge Losdsd I wa Decduplicantion DET m ETE ET QOTAR A _ Library 24 STELT SCSeMTaRe I a rice reg Hodas Figure C 6 Force Unload All 3 Click Force Unload All in the Tasks bar The Force Unload All confirmation message is displayed Troubleshooting Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Help Yes No Cancel Figure C 7 Force Unload All Confirmation 4 Click Yes to unload all cartridges and return them to their slots in the library Click No or Cancel to exit from the Force Unload All wizard If the cartridges were successfully unloaded a confirmation message appears If any cartridge could not be moved a different message appears stating that Data Path Failure Description The S Series system through a combination of hardware and software maximizes data availability by pr
383. tarting byte offset on the source cartridge The ending record on the source cartridge This record is required for the internal Hitachi calculations The ending byte offset on the source cartridge The Source Cartridge Start Offset and Source Cartridge End Offset helps in determining whether the replication job was a dedup transfer or a wholesale transfer If Source Cartridge End Offset Source Cartridge Start Offset gt Replication Data Size then it was a dedup transfer If Source Cartridge End Offset Source Cartridge Start Offset Replication Data Size then it was a wholesale transfer The size of the unique data that is replicated from the source system to the target system in bytes The size of the meta data that is replicated from the source system to the target system in bytes S1500 Platform Reports D 13 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual D 14 S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Regulatory Compliance Notices This section contains important compliance guidelines for using a Hitachi Compute Rack You Should read and understand the information in this section before using the system components Federal communications commission FCC compliance U S A Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection aga
384. ted version number last tape ready version number last prepared version number and the mounted in drive status The Cartridge Details screen also provides a Job History table listing the detailed historical information about replication jobs for this cartridge The Job History table lists the start time end time size in MB data transfer time total processing time transfer rate source location target location status and compression state of each replication job for this cartridge The following tasks are provided on the Cartridge Details screen Figure 5 35 e Export Cartridge Details e Export Log File e View Log e Refresh Export Cartridge Details The Cartridge Details screen also allows you to export the cartridge details to a file 1 Click Export Cartridge Details in the Tasks bar Export Log File The S Series software monitors the status and activity of each cartridge managed by replication A detailed activity log file is generated and stored for each cartridge This log file includes the list of replication activities performed on this cartridge and the date and time when these activities were performed The Cartridge Details screen allows you to export the activity log file 1 Click Export Log File in the Tasks bar 5 39 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual View Log The Cartridge Details screen allows you to view the log file of a cartridge on the Console Manager 1 Clic
385. tem to temporarily stop using the target system without unmanaging the libraries This can be achieved by placing the destination library in an offline status To place an existing destination library in an offline status On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Select the library that you want to unmanage from the navigation tree or from the list of libraries displayed on the LAN WAN Replication Library Summary screen 3 Click Offline in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click OK to confirm A success dialog appears on the screen and the library is placed temporarily offline The libraries that are placed offline can be brought back online to allow replication NOTE The library is offline from the replication perspective only and not from the backup application perspective To place an existing offline destination library into an online status On the Source System 1 Click Replication gt Destination Libraries gt LAN WAN Replication Libraries The list of existing managed destination libraries is displayed 2 Select the offline library that you want to bring online Click Online in the Tasks bar A confirmation dialog is displayed Click OK to confirm A success dialog appears on the screen and the library is online The libraries are brought online 3 22 Configuring and
386. ter the change Is confirmed 8 A message appears on the screen confirming that the password has been successfully changed Configuring the 1500 2 4 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 9 Click Close The browser window closes 10 Open a new browser session and log into your system using the new password Setting User Preferences There are several parameters you can set that affect the format of information displayed on the screens These parameters include the administrator s email address polling frequency etc These values also appear in the alert notifications and support tickets and assist in system identification Changing the User Preferences 2 5 1 Navigate to the Chassis Status screen System gt Chassis 2 Select User Preferences by clicking on the User Preferences in the MAINTENANCE TASKS list The User Preferences screen is displayed 3 Specify a frequency in seconds after which to check the health status of the system components The default value is 15 seconds The maximum value is 60 seconds 4 Enter the number of most recent notifications to make available for viewing The number of notifications should be in the range of 0 to 1000 The default value is 512 NOTE Hitachi strongly recommends you fill in the contact information fields This information is included in support tickets and assists in system identification during troubleshooting 5 Enter a description for the location o
387. ters that are used across targets These global parameters are applied to all existing and subsequent targets created on this S Series system These parameters include the default compression setting for data transfer and an unencrypted data transfer port number To configure the global LAN WAN replication target parameters follow these steps 1 Navigate to the LAN WAN Replication Targets screen by clicking the Replication tab and selecting Tape Image Replication LAN WAN Target from the navigation tree 2 Click Global LAN WAN Replication Target Settings in the Tasks bar The following screen Is displayed Hitachi Protection Platform S Series Console HITACHI Inspire the Next GO Egad Collapse iy Cartridge istus H p ob Fieporting Cag Destination Libraries D BAN Auiomigraiion Libraries ae Tape image Repdloeion LAH WAH api Mirror Copy Pools Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration Reiras Tasks Test Replication Report Setup GLOBAL LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGET CONFIGURATION Default Compression Setting for LAN WAN Replication T Targets m Un Enerpted Data Transtar Port Mumbar S570 Max number of Jobs to run on master nodaj 4 4 Ipi imporvEnpor Pools gel bounces Cartridges Gp Library_24 Fire fats QF Tps imags Replication LAN WAN Tenge api Conni Fess Logg Configuration summary gl import Hepes Replication Report Information Host Name Host Public Ke
388. th or Starting on the Add Remove Barcode Templates page To modify barcode templates Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual 1 Select Cartridges in the expanded navigation tree for your chassis System gt Chassis gt Cartridges 2 Click Add Remove Barcode Templates in the Tasks bar of the Cartridges screen The Add Remove Barcode Templates screen is displayed Add Remove i Chassis PE Mapt ENT Barcode z i Templates Figure 2 26 Add Remove Barcode Templates Adding a Barcode Template To add a barcode template 1 Enter a prefix for the barcode This prefix may be up to six alpha characters 2 Enter the number of digits for cartridge sequencing Optional If your backup application requires a barcode suffix enter it here 4 Specify the starting numeric value for the cartridges As the S Series system creates each cartridge it increments this value by 1 5 Click Add The screen refreshes with the new template values added to the barcode selection list Deleting a Barcode Template The Console Manager does not allow you to delete a barcode template that has been used to create cartridges that are currently present in the S Series system 1 To remove a barcode template all cartridges using that barcode templates must be removed See Deleting Cartridges on page 6 14 for information on how to delete cartridges 2 Click Remove beside the barcode template you want
389. th the library NOTE This operation cannot take place if a cartridge is loaded in the tape drive That is the cartridge is actively being used by the backup application or was left in the tape drive by the backup application In this case refer to Force Unload Cartridge s on page 1 To modify libraries or to view their current settings i 6 18 Navigate to the Libraries Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries The Libraries Summary screen is displayed Maintaining Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Libraries O Egad Collapse Remesi Tasks Creak Lian O Monfor Tape Dries Peronmance j Chassis br sept sepedoncom RY F ALL LE T apaty EAMARY FOR ALL LIERARE amp a opiaton heme Virus Devis E Procssaing Por Mapping LURE Tepe Drives Ceriridges Vendor Produa inquiry tiring I ge DET ss ikea teh Library ai 2 d amp 2 0 STK SaorageTek L700 L70 E Maye Processing Modes oLan 2 2 J a 1 J SEATON SEPATONS2100 S21 gg LUM Mapping Library 28 25 d w a J SEPATON SEFATONS2100 52100 gg Libraries Fl gh Storage Pools Olibray 2 J H 4 215 SEPATON SEPATON 52100 52100 gj Borage LUNs aj Carirkiges H ask Arrays Figure 6 16 Library Summary Screen 2 Select the library you want to edit by clicking its name The Library Status screen for that library is displayed GO Egad Collapse amp Reres Bj Chassis or repl seqsion com T ape apao
390. the storage consumed reaches the user defined threshold level This task allows you to schedule reclamation of extra storage created by erasing cartridges After you have erased cartridges from your backup application you can schedule space reclamation on the S Series system Follow the steps below to Reclaim Space 1 Navigate to the Storage Pool Status screen System gt Storage Pools gt Storage Pool n 2 Click Reclaim Space in the Task bar StoragePool 1 Expand Collapse Refresh Reclaim Space El O Chassis sun sepaton com E DeltaStor Backup Report GENERAL DISK ARRAY are Ex Usable Capacity 14 95 TB Disk Array 0 lt S gt Cartridge Report a a ee cee eee dp Coniigureti i v Allocated User Capacity 13 51 TB 90 38 Configuration I Capacity Used 12 90 TB 86 30 S gt System Capacity Cartridges 451 i SRE Nodes StoragePool 1 Maximum number of cartridges per Storage LUN 8000 SRE Hode 0 Status Number of Storage LUNS 2 SRE Ports aa SH Hardware Compression paneer aJ LUN Mapping a O ja lt a Setup Faled ibraries Storage Pools iii 9 Storage Pool 1 FIGURE 2 38 Chassis Status Screen with the Reclaim Space link The S Series system initiates space reclamation and a Space Reclamation is scheduled notification is displayed on the Notification screen Configuring the 1500 2 36 Hitachi Protection Platform
391. tics Maintaining Your S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Dashboard Screen After you have successfully logged into the HPP support portal the Dashboard screen is displayed Your profile information is displayed on the bottom left pane of the Dashboard screen The HPP support portal Dashboard screen provides Hitachi press releases Hitachi news articles and knowledge base articles along with site navigation links Hitachi Data Systems HPP Support Portal Dashboard Screen HITACHI as UiMassMemorial R Medical Center Site Navigation Li nks Sepaton acquired by Hitachi Data Systems Customers Win Advanced Sepaton deduplication integrates with extensive Hitachi storage portfolio and market reach Customers gain exceptional data protection solutions and support Read Sean Moser s Blog to learn more about the the acquisition Recent HDS Press Releases Popular Knowledge Base Articles H sts 5 ms La C rm u Environm iat USA pth se E Graph Simply soipt us Ei H p Sy ms U s Pow Li af Sof re d2fined Inira rz Solutions Designs All Trersa Analytics Workddoads H aS EK m Hotau Mi ee ee ee Hep S i T z itachi Dasta Systems Introduces New 5 5a jake Sooetes 5 a Chee PEE theres an it iran tke cornet Profile Information e i tak Mafa 5 4 r Wit n m m sleri DWM A D m Hitachi Data Systems Recognized s One Of The 20 York s Most Ethical Companies i ge i B p a ie h z ST snvirrnm er da
392. ting behavior The default login information for a user is User name user Password guest Accepting the EULA The S Series system comes with an End User License Agreement EULA that is displayed on the screen when you log in to the Console Manager for the first time IMPORTANT NWOTICE READ CAREFULLY THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEWEEN YOU THE END USER CUSTOMER AND SEPATON INC BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON OR OTHERWISE USING THE SEPATON APPLIANCE AND OR SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS DO NOT CLICK ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON AND DO NOT F Figure 1 3 End User License Agreement EULA Screen Read the EULA and click the button to Accept the license agreement the Dashboard screen is displayed Appendix Hitachi End User License Agreement provides a copy of the online Hitachi End User License Agreement 1 9 Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual After you have logged in and accepted the end user license agreement the Dashboard screen displays A notification No license file found is displayed on the Notifications pane on the Dashboard screen 01 14 11 16 27 23 EM No license file found docs 2 sepaton com Figure 1 4 No License File Found Notification Follow the instructions under the to install the license on your S Series system Obtaining a License Key from the HPP Suppo
393. tion Job History report is designed to provide detailed information of various replication jobs running on your source and target S Series systems The Tape Image Replication Job History report values are described in detail as follows Barcode The barcodes of the cartridges that have been replicated Start Time The time when the replication job started End Time The time when the replication job ended Size MB The size of data transferred in MB For S Series systems running VTL Versions 5 3 and later this includes the LZ compression on the wire if enabled in the Mirror Pool Data Transfer Time The total time taken for the data transfer from the source secs system to the target system in seconds Source Location The devices or host names that initiated the replication job Target Location The devices or host names where the data was replicated Job Node The processing node on the source S Series system that initiated the replication job D 12 S1500 Platform Reports Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Completion Status Source Cartridge Start Record Source Cartridge Start Offset Source Cartridge End Record Source Cartridge End Offset Replication Data Size Bytes Replication Meta Data Size Bytes The status of the replication job i e Successful Rescheduled Failed Error The starting record on the source cartridge This record is required for the internal Hitachi calculations The s
394. tion hours and enter the number of hours Enter the number of hours when tape image replication should notify you In case a cartridge is not replicated with in the specified number of hours The At End of the Policy Window allows you to cancel replication jobs if they have not completed within the specified replication window they would be restarted on the next window NOTE To keep replicated cartridges in a source and target node in sync with one another you should cancel any active jobs before moving cartridges out of a copy pool 12 13 Click Next The Create Mirror Copy Pool screen is displayed While creating Mirror Copy Pool you can restrict the replication jobs to only run during specific hours of the day on specific days Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Enter the details of the window duration for the Mirror Copy Pool If the replication does not take place during this window the job is maintained in the queue until the next start time NOTE The window times are local so if the source and target S Series systems are on different time zones make sure the source and target windows overlap NOTE Replication jobs can only begin during the policy window 14 Click Add The window refreshes and the window parameters you just added is moved to the Current Availability Windows section of the screen Repeat steps 12 and 13 for as many windows as you need
395. tion je g bathup restore ete in progress will not complete Help u Pho Cancel Figure 6 40 Shutdown processing node Wizard 3 You will be prompted to confirm this action Click Yes to continue This process will take several minutes If you do not want to shutdown your processing nodes click No or Cancel to exit the wizard without performing any action 4 If you selected Yes in Step 2 click Close at the next prompt to terminate your browser session The VTL and Console Manager services will Shutdown This process will take several minutes It is now safe to power down the processing nods 5 Manually power off the S1500 from the front panel button Maintaining Your 1500 6 31 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual Restarting Replication Services 6 32 Some Console Manager operations require that the Replication Services be restarted in order for changes to become known Or you may be directed to restart the Replication Services by a Hitachi Customer Support representative To restart the Replication Services 1 Click Restart Replication Services in the Tasks bar A warning is displayed stating that any Replication operation i e replication tape shredding in progress will be stopped O WARNING Any Replication operation i e replication tape seeding in Progress will be stopped Figure 6 41 Restart Replication Services Step 1 2 Click Restart to stop the Replication services If you do not wa
396. tion libraries on the source system allows you to view the target system its corresponding slots and its Mirror Copy Pool settings Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 7 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Slots Like a tape library the S Series system shows slots to the backup application for writing backup data After the Mirror Copy Pool is created the replication job will move cartridges from the source system to the target system to these slots in the library You must select the range of slots in the library while creating the replication target on the target system Defining the start and the end Slot allows you to replicate selected cartridges only The cartridges that are not within the Slot range will not be replicated These slots are also displayed on the Source S Series system under the Destination Library The Hitachi tape image replication allows you to edit the slot maps from the source system Mirror Copy Pool The Mirror Copy Pool acts as an asynchronous mirror between the selected source system and the replication target library You can create multiple Mirror Copy Pools for a single destination library by specifying different slot ranges within the same replication library On the source S Series system you could either have one source library mapped to multiple Mirror Copy Pools or you could have a separate library for each Mirror Copy Pool In either case you divide your backup jobs s
397. torage capacity on your S Series by moving data to tape after some specific retention period Hitachi recommends that your create the vaulting tapes immediately after the backup At the end of the retention period you can simply relabel the virtual cartridge to free up space If you delay tape production until the end of the on site retention period tape performance will suffer because the system has to follow many pointers to assemble a complete image of a backup from that point in time Hitachi strongly recommends that you exploit the vaulting optimized copy of data that resides on the system immediately after a backup Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Configuring OpenStorage Servers Volumes and A I R Hitachi Protection Platform OpenStorage OST support enables Symantec NetBackup users to control platforms intelligently and access the Hitachi Protection Platform through the Symantec OST API OST tightly integrates third party intelligent storage devices with NetBackup This gives NetBackup users improved management of their backup images along with the functionality of third party intelligent storage devices These instructions provide the steps necessary to install the Hitachi Protection Platform OST system plug ins and configure the OST Storage Server environment for operation The OST plug in must be installed from an existing S Series system that is licensed for delta
398. tricS nananana 6 52 Reporting oaaae ees 6 52 Reviewing Operational Changes sssaaa aaaea 6 53 Configuring and Using the HPP Support Portal 6 54 Accessing the HPP Support Portal 0 6 55 HPP Support Portal Information 00005 6 56 Dashboard Screen aaa aaa ee ee 6 57 Profile Information 000 0 eee eae 6 57 S1500 Components LEDs and SpecificationsA 1 Hitachi Compute Rack 220S 0 0 0 A 1 Physical Characteristics of S Series Systems A 2 Component Locations 000 cee eee eee A 2 Power consumption saaa ea a es A 6 Hitachi Compute Rack 220S Specifications A 13 Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL S rvel cccccccseceeseseveeeeeveveveesevevauanes B 1 Oracle RMAN Scripting Best Practices with the S Series Systems B 1 Contents 7 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual PaCkOrOUNG 2545 sau eee aeeannas eae bea ee ea B 2 Delta Differencing Deduplication Technology Recommended Practices for Oracle RMAN Sed aoe gon oe OSES ON Ga ee ee ae oe B 5 Good Practice aaa B 5 Better Practice 2 ees B 5 Recommendations for Updating Your RMAN Scripts B 6 NetBackup SQL Server Integration 00 B 9 NetBackup SQL Server Integration Samples B 10 SQL Server with Multiple Streams 000 es B 12 Re PPOUIGI SIIO OLIN acasasieciichersenarsmenesupsrseniveivesevenierns C 1 Force Unload Cartridge S
399. tual device ID on that node For example a tape drive with a virtual device ID of 1 on node O has a device ID of 1 but on processing node 1 14 Choose one of the following options a Click Create Cartridges to continue defining the virtual cartridges to associate with the new library b Click Create more Tape Drive s to define additional tape drives to associate with the new library The Create Tape Drive s screen is displayed c Click Cancel to exit the Create Library wizard CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Figure 2 17 Create Cartridges 15 Define the barcode template to use with the cartridges for this library Although you can define multiple templates you will be creating the cartridges with only one template at this time a Enter the barcode prefix The barcode prefix may be one to six alpha characters Enter the number of digits for the barcode number Enter a suffix for your cartridge barcodes if required by your backup application Otherwise ignore the field 2 21 Configuring the 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual c Enter the starting barcode number and click Add d Repeat steps a to d for each additional barcode template to create 16 Select the barcode template to use for the cartridges and click Next Step The cartridge types compatible with your tape drive emulation are displayed CARTRIDGE PARAMETERS Lag 3590 Eg DLT E IF Dg LTO E EMNI kg SULT Log 5849 Figure 2 18 Cartridge Types
400. u must do a Force Unload All to make sure no cartridges are stuck in tape drives The Force Unload task on the Tape Drive Status screen enables you to overcome either of the above issues The Force Unload option is only available when a cartridge is actually loaded in a tape drive Figure C 3 These conditions must be cleared from the Console Manager or alternatively you can restart the VTL as described in Restarting the VTL Troubleshooting C 1 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual WARNING Attempting to perform this task while backups are in progress can cause data corruption to the cartridges in the tape drives Force Unload a Single Cartridge To Force Unload a Cartridge from a Tape Drive 1 Navigate to the Library Summary screen System gt Chassis gt Libraries The Library Summary screen is displayed Libraries O Ega Colmes amp naires Tasks Crea Lonn O Moohor Tape Dries Perbimmamce Fg Chassis for sep2 sepstonccm T ge Caney PUMAR POR ALL UERARIE H E a yn age Decupostion ame Virtual Device ID Processing Pori Mapping LUKE Tepe Drives Cariridges Wendor Produc inquiry Biring H ie OT T tga Processing Hodes OLibray 24 id J 5 2 xJ DTE moray Te LT t qd LUNH Mapping H Gp braies J Horsgs Podis 4 Biorage LUH aj Cartridges H ge Disk Arrays Figure C 1 Library Summary Screen 2 Select the library name with the stuck cartridge in the tape drive The library Device Summary screen
401. u to monitor the progress of active replication jobs with percentage complete indicators to monitor the actual replication transfer and create reports for historical replication jobs The S Series system stores replication job status and history allowing reports to be generated and displayed online or exported in a comma separated values CSV file format Current replication job status and job history can be monitored using reports on demand Monitoring Your 1500 5 40 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Current J obs 5 41 Tape image replication allows you to view the active replication jobs on both the source and target S Series system This screen can be used to monitor the progress of the active replication jobs with the percentage complete to monitor the actual replication transfer and you can manually cancel active replication jobs To view the status of active replication jobs click Replication gt Job Reporting The Current Status screen is displayed Current Status hiks tetas CURRENT STATUS Select Fitter Criteriajs To Filter Jobs Expand Wrass Joh Resunee eh W Cancel Jot Page Sine 5 w ga Remy foamed deyplayaneg all Gere rari Lami Update See Tanget Hath Expected dali q E z Bao E Acton Job Type Time kompie Tim Leal Lecilinn Hoia pme Completions Tina iie K birin TUNNIL ma LENTU APFEL ep A naom ADA pepe a Pic re X bal j i F Porn PORSE ra Figure 5 36 Current Status Scree
402. ummary screen The details of that particular cartridge are displayed laski Bkxpot Cathie Delile Gkyphii L yHi GUia Lag Oe eah DETAILS OF CARTRIDGE 460001 Cimrent Shite lp To Cain Tine in Crem Siria Limi in Syni Tire THA I po N Lasi Modificsiten Tine Current Phya ca Sire i Curreni Logia Site Tmn D CoHieation La fice venho mamili Til Faiged ver aion tamili Last mrami oi wer akin pamiiri Ty Last Uninet ween nea yyl Lert tape renty veasbar manmebsar 7242520 Last prepared version mumber 27437530 Mex eal m hire JOE HISTORY Yh Mami Pill apla T he of Aija paima amp fis F374 5 07 0 5 D Sip hata Toria Tire Told Pr ochswing Thee Tidiri rains Soich EDA SEa Tine Pil Time Sat L im Mi Tia E End Tin MB seca secal IME Location Location seal ESNE J ta PML OLR Noh Figure 5 35 Cartridge Details Screen Monitoring Your 1500 5 38 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual The Cartridge Details screen displays a summary of all information for that cartridge This includes the current state of the cartridge amount of time the cartridge has been in this state the time when the source cartridge was last synchronized with the cartridge on the target library time when the cartridge was last modified current physical size of the cartridge current logical size of the cartridge the slot numbers on the source and the target system source version number target version number last mounted version number last unmoun
403. uplication Technology This section provides information that is useful while configuring delta differencing deduplication for NetBackup Multistreaming Storage Groups in an MS Exchange I nformation Store You can use multiple streams when creating a backup policy but name of each stream must be unique within each policy Deduplication is only performed on backup sets that have the same policy and group a group Is defined as the longest common path name in the backup set If you are multistreaming the Storage Groups in an MS Exchange Information Store ensure that the databases reside in different fully qualified paths Volume Pools Use as few volume pools as possible This reduces the likelihood that a client will have similar backup sets residing on the same cartridge Default Block Size and Number of Buffers Following are the NetBackup default block size and the default number of buffers Buffer Size 262144 Note that this will increase the memory usage on your server by a factor of eight times per tape drive so you might not choose to do this Do Not Set a Maximum Fragment Size Do not set a maximum fragment size Reduce fragment size to for S Series system storage units Leaving this setting unchecked defaults to a 1 TB fragment size Maintaining Your 1500 6 45 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual You Must Use Supported NetBackup Libraries and Drives With NetBackup you must use the supported Hitachi
404. uplication information for tracking duplication jobs and determining the efficiency of transfers This report lists the OST Optimized Duplication information for all duplications from the Source system Provides a list of all the existing tape image replication jobs The report includes the barcode of the cartridge replicated start and end time of replication size in MB total data transfer time in seconds source location of the cartridge target location and more The Tape Image Replication Job History report provides Hitachi tape image replication information While you might see this report listing as available and could request that it be sent to you the report will contain tape image replication information only if you have tape image replication licensed on your system Configuring the 1500 2 10 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Adding Users to Receive Reports Follow these steps to configure email reports l Navigate to the Report Setup screen by clicking on the Notifications tab and selecting Report Setup in the Task bar The following screen is displayed Click Schedule Download Reports to add job reports The Add Job Report screen is displayed Tasks O Noiticstions Seu Mall Sener Setup D SNMP Seiwa Doiked SNMP MS Delivery Method Emal F Gowns Email Addresses Yad Report Type Schedule P Cnetine only Ge Daily Ge Weekly GP Monti Figure 2 7 Add Report J ob Screen 3 4
405. ur S Series system in a manner that allows cartridges to be filled and deduplicated regularly This information also helps you to prevent having an insufficient amount of available backend storage along with information on moving and deleting cartridges and data erasure Maximum Path Lengths The maximum path lengths are imposed by the backup applications The current maximum path length for both NetBackup and TSM is 1024 characters Allocating and Filling Cartridges Determining the correct number and size of cartridges necessary for your backup environment includes several steps Hitachi Customer Support has a cartridge sizing tool that assists you with this process After establishing a baseline number of cartridges you should pay careful attention as to whether you are filling the cartridges in a timely manner to make sure that you are properly deduplicating your backups If it appears that the cartridges are not filling up after performing a full backup then you Should reduce the number of available cartridges in the backup set library You might need to perform this exercise two or three times until you have the appropriate number of cartridges available in the backup set library You want to use about 85 percent of the storage space when all of the cartridges are full Maintaining Your 1500 6 39 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Allocating Your S Series System Storage Properly Oversubscription allows you to allocat
406. vely deduplicate the incoming data NetBackup SQL Server I ntegration Samples B 10 Following are some NetBackup sample scripts MS SQL Server layout SQL Server host Name sql 1 Sql server Instance Name sql 1 Database Name Test Database File Group Name 1 Primary with two data files File Name 1 Test db filel mdf 2 Test do file2 ndf 2 Test DB FG with two data files File Name 1 Test_db fg1 ndf 2x Test do Iga ndi If you have one policy to backup the entire database including Test_Database the default NetBackup backup bch will be Ark kkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk OPERATION BACKUP DATABASE SALL SQLHOST sql 1 SQLINSTANCE sql 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 4 BLOCKSIZE 7 NBSERVER sql 1 ENDOPER TRUE Akk kkkkkkkkk kk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kk Modify this as follows to convert the test_database to a file level backup and prevent interleaving Akk kkkkkkkkkkkkkk kk kk kk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkk kkkk k OPERATION BACKUP DATABASE SALL EXCLUDE Test Database SQLHOST sql 1 SQLINSTANCE sql 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 4 BLOCKSIZE 7 NBSERVER sql 1 ENDOPER TRUE OPERATION BACKUP OBJECTTYPE FILE OBJECTNAME Test db filel Delta Differencing Deduplication with Oracle RMAN and SQL Server Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual DATABASE Test Database FILEGROUP PRIMARY SOLHOST TSOL 1 NBSERVER SQL 1 MAXTRANSFERSIZE 0 BLOCKSIZE 7 POLICY test database mssql file b
407. veness NetWorker 6 49 Maximum Path Lengths 6 39 Minimize Number of Pools NetWorker 6 49 Mirror Copy Pool Operations 3 33 changing local library 3 36 deleting an existing Mirror Copy Pool 3 33 Modify the Delta Differencing by data type 2 40 by policy or management class 2 41 Mount Retention TSM 6 47 Move Cartridge 6 14 move cartridge move cartridges used by tape drive replication 6 14 move or delete cartridges data erasure 6 40 Naming backup job 6 42 backup jobs NetBackup 6 42 backup jobs NetWorker 6 42 backup jobs TSM 6 42 Navigation Tree 5 6 NetBackup 3 40 block size 6 45 fragment size maximum 6 45 naming 6 42 NetBackup Libraries and Drives supported 6 46 NetBackup SQL Server Integration B 9 samples B 11 Network Transmission load guidelines 6 43 NetWorker deduplication effectiveness maximizing 6 49 naming 6 42 number of pools minimize 6 49 No Match Found 5 33 Non Deduplicated Copy 3 25 Notifications 2 8 best practice 6 40 Notifications Setup 2 6 adding a single user to receive email alerts 2 adding users to receive email alerts 2 6 changing notification type 2 8 configure notifications for Sepaton technical support 2 8 email alert types 2 6 Number of Notifications to View 2 5 O Open Storage OST 1 5 OpenStorage OST 4 1 downloading appropriate OST plug in s 4 1 installation 4 1 Operational Best Practices 6 52 Operational Changes reviewing 6 53 Operator s Ops Panel A 4 Ops Panel LEDs A 4 Optim
408. w library or FireSafe for that cartridge s from the drop down list at the bottom of the screen and click GO The progress of the move operation is indicated on the Move Cartridge wizard step 1 When the move operation is complete a success message is displayed stap 2 of 2 1 out of 1 Cartridges moved to Fire Safe successfully Cartridge Eisius Figure 6 10 Move Cartridges Wizard Step 2 4 Click Finish to return to the Cartridge Summary screen Moving Cartridges Used by Tape I mage Replication 6 14 You may move the cartridges that are being used by tape image replication on the source or the target S Series system However moving source or target cartridges results in different behavior depending on the following scenarios Moving a source cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library does not change the replication process Moving a source cartridge from its existing library to a different library or the FireSafe causes the target cartridge on the target S Series system to disappear from the echo copy pool It is moved to the FireSafe The same behavior applies if the source cartridge is ejected Moving a target cartridge from its existing slot to a different slot in the same library within the same replication target and copy pool moves the source cartridge to a new slot Moving a target cartridge from its existing library to a different library or the FireSafe or to a different slot t
409. y User Nama User Privata Key Destination Directory Report Start Hour 8 23 hrs Report interval Hirs Figure 3 5 Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration Settings Screen 3 Tape image replication allows you to use default compression in addition to deduplication Select whether the Default compression setting for LAN WAN replication targets is on Yes or off No by default 4 Enter the unencrypted data transfer port number for all LAN WAN Replication transfers This is the TCP IP port number that will be used for replication data transfers Default is port 5570 5 Enter the maximum number of jobs to run on the master node Configuring and Using Tape Image Replication 3 13 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual 6 Click Submit If the settings were configured successfully a confirmation message appears E Global LAN WAN Replication Target Configuration O Egad Colp Reres Tasks Tast Replication Report Setup paj Carirkige tiiu H Yall Jon Reporting ip Desnan Libraries GLOBAL LAN WAN REPLICATION TARGET CONFIGURATION The global LAN WAN Replication target configuration were successfully modified ee ee ee Detauit Compression Setting Tor LAN VUAN Replication ae Tere mags Rapis LAH i WAH L Targets om Meukon ino Eaa Lin Encrypted Data Transfer Port Number S570 Magee Max mumiber of jobs to run on master noda 4 p Soures Cartridges eo Replication Report In
410. y Capacity available for additional backup data This is the total Usable Capacity less the Used Capacity The ratio of Logical Data to Used Capacity in the Disk Volume The Disk Volume name in the Disk Volumes Capacity table is a link to display the capacity information about the disk volume 5 25 Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 User Manual Viewing Additional Disk Volume I nformation To view additional capacity information about a disk volume click the Disk Volume name field link on the Disk Volume Capacity screen Figure 5 25 The screen displays capacity information for this disk volume and a graphical representation showing the Logical Used and Available storage Capacity You may need to scroll down to view additional capacity information OST_DP2 Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Disk Volume OST _DP2 Allocated Capacity Logical Data Used Capacity Available Capacity Ratio 1 76 TB 85 78 GB 6 88 GB 1 76 TB Figure 5 26 Disk Volume x Capacity Screen The Disk Volumes x Capacity table lists the following capacity values Table 5 11 Disk Volumes x Capacity Table Disk Volumes x Capacity Table Allocated The total storage capacity allocated to the Disk Volume The Capacity allocated capacity can be as high as the maximum capacity of the storage pool containing the disk volume Logical Data The size of all backup data in the disk volume currently retained a
411. y region To change the size of a region position your cursor on the border of a pane and press the left mouse button while simultaneously dragging the border until the region is of the desired size The Task bar located above the status pane lists management operations that are associated with the current status display Clicking the task can bring up a single screen display for parameter entry or launch a wizard for a multistep process The system level task available on the Chassis Status screen is Create Library Figure 5 3 This task creates a tape library emulation the virtual tape drives associated with that library and the cartridges under that library s control Status and Parameter Entry The left side of the Status pane shows an icon of that component within the S Series system Directly below that icon is a status indicator of that component s overall health state These states indicate the following Good There are no error conditions detected within the component Degraded One or more elements in the component Is disconnected or has failed but the component is operational Critical One or more elements in the component has failed and the component is operational but attention is required Failed The S Series system can communicate with the component but the component is not operational due to some error condition Immediate attention is required Monitoring Your 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform 150
412. ystem If you did not select a valid Hitachi license file the Console Manager warns you of this condition and allows you to try again 5 Click Return to System In the case of a fresh installation the S Series system reboots the system to load the new settings and update the appropriate system services NOTE The VTL platform reboot will take approximately five minutes 1 11 Introducing the Hitachi Protection Platform 1500 Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual If you have email notifications enabled the system reports via email when the S Series system is again ready for use If the system has not completed the restart process before you attempt any activities in the browser a Failed to connect or Cannot communicate with chassis message appears on the screen Wait a few more minutes and try to connect again System Startup The system has to pass health checks before the Fibre Channel or the 10 GbE host ports are enabled If the S Series does not start up properly then the system will not start Once the delta differencing deduplication technology license is applied to the system a first time initialization of the delta differencing deduplication database follows the automatic system reboot This initialization takes approximately five minutes You can verify that the system is operational when you launch the Console Manager The Dashboard screen appears and the green system icon indicates that the system is

Hitachi Protection Platform S1500 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents